p3T32 2024 Version

PowerLogic P3T32
Transformer protection relay

User Manual
10/2024
P3T/EN/M/30-208A
www.schneider-electric.com
Table of Contents Transformer protection relay
Table of Contents
1 About this manual........................................................................ 12
1.1 Purpose...........................................................................................................12
1.2 Related documents......................................................................................... 12
1.3 Abbreviations and terms................................................................................. 13
1.4 Easergy to PowerLogic renaming................................................................... 18
1.5 Description of the document versions.............................................................19
2 Product introduction..................................................................... 20
2.1 Warranty..........................................................................................................20
2.2 Product overview............................................................................................ 20
2.3 Product selection guide...................................................................................21
2.4 Access to device configuration....................................................................... 29
2.4.1 User accounts.......................................................................................30
2.4.2 Logging on via the front panel.............................................................. 30
2.4.3 HTTP and FTP logon details................................................................ 31
2.4.4 Password management........................................................................ 31
2.4.5 Password restoring............................................................................... 32
2.5 Front panel......................................................................................................32
2.5.1 Push-buttons.........................................................................................33
2.5.2 LED indicators...................................................................................... 33
2.5.3 Configuring the LED names via eSetup Easergy Pro...........................34
2.5.4 Controlling the alarm screen.................................................................35
2.5.5 Accessing operating levels................................................................... 35
2.5.6 Adjusting the LCD contrast................................................................... 35
2.5.7 Testing the LEDs and LCD screen........................................................36
2.5.8 Controlling an object with selective control...........................................36
2.5.9 Controlling an object with direct control................................................ 36
2.5.10 Menus................................................................................................. 36
2.5.10.1 Moving in the menus ............................................................ 39
2.5.10.2 Local panel messages...........................................................39
2.6 eSetup Easergy Pro setting and configuration tool.........................................40
3 Mechanical structure.................................................................... 41
3.1 Modularity....................................................................................................... 41
3.2 Slot info and order code..................................................................................42
4 Measurement functions................................................................44
4.1 Primary, secondary and per unit scaling......................................................... 48
4.1.1 Frequency adaptation mode................................................................. 51
4.1.2 Current scaling......................................................................................52
4.1.3 Voltage scaling for analog module E, F................................................ 54
4.1.4 Residual value scaling.......................................................................... 56
4.2 Measurements for protection functions...........................................................58
4.3 Measurements for arc flash detection function............................................... 59
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 3
Transformer protection relay Table of Contents
4.4 RMS values.....................................................................................................60

4.5 Harmonics and total harmonic distortion (THD)..............................................60
4.6 Demand values............................................................................................... 61
4.7 Minimum and maximum values...................................................................... 63
4.8 Maximum values of the last 31 days and 12 months...................................... 64
4.9 Memory management of measurements........................................................ 66
4.10 Power and current direction.......................................................................... 68
4.11 Symmetrical components.............................................................................. 69
5 Control functions.......................................................................... 70
5.1 Digital outputs................................................................................................. 70
5.2 Digital inputs................................................................................................... 74
5.3 Virtual inputs and outputs................................................................................80
5.4 Matrix.............................................................................................................. 87
5.4.1 Output matrix........................................................................................ 87
5.4.2 Blocking matrix..................................................................................... 88
5.4.3 LED matrix............................................................................................ 90
5.4.4 Object block matrix............................................................................... 92
5.5 Releasing latches............................................................................................92
5.5.1 Releasing latches using eSetup Easergy Pro.......................................92
5.5.2 Releasing latches using buttons and local panel display......................93
5.5.3 Releasing latches using F1 or F2 buttons............................................ 93
5.6 Controllable objects........................................................................................ 94
5.6.1 Object control with digital inputs........................................................... 96
5.6.2 Local or remote selection......................................................................96
5.6.3 Object control with I and O buttons.......................................................97
5.6.4 Object control with F1 and F2...............................................................97
5.6.5 Adjustable time delay mechanism for the object’s closing operation....99
5.7 Logic functions.............................................................................................. 100
5.8 Local panel....................................................................................................108
5.8.1 Mimic view.......................................................................................... 109
5.8.2 Local panel configuration.................................................................... 112
6 Protection functions.................................................................... 117

6.1 Current transformer requirements for overcurrent elements......................... 117
6.1.1 CT requirements when settings are unknown.....................................118
6.1.2 Principle for calculating the saturation current in class P....................118
6.1.3 Examples of calculating the saturation current in class P................... 118
6.1.4 Principle for calculating the saturation current in class PX................. 119
6.1.5 Examples of calculating the saturation current in class PX................ 120
6.1.6 CT requirements for REF protection...................................................120
6.2 Current transformer requirements for generator and transformer block
differential protection...........................................................................................121
6.3 Current transformer requirements for transformer differential protection......122
6.4 Maximum number of protection stages in one application............................124
6.5 General features of protection stages...........................................................124
6.6 Dependent operate time............................................................................... 132
6.6.1 Standard dependent delays using IEC, IEEE, IEEE2 and RI curves..134
4 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
6.6.2 Free parameterization using IEC, IEEE and IEEE2 curves................ 155
6.6.3 Programmable dependent time curves...............................................156
6.7 Volts/hertz overexcitation protection Uf> (ANSI 24)...................................... 160
6.8 Synchrocheck (ANSI 25)...............................................................................162
6.9 Undervoltage (ANSI 27)................................................................................166
6.10 Positive sequence undervoltage (ANSI 27P)..............................................169
6.11 Negative sequence overcurrent (ANSI 46) .................................................172
6.12 Negative sequence overvoltage protection (ANSI 47)................................ 174
6.13 Thermal overload (ANSI 49 RMS).............................................................. 175
6.14 Breaker failure (ANSI 50BF)....................................................................... 179
6.15 Breaker failure 1 and 2 (ANSI 50BF).......................................................... 181
6.16 Switch-on-to-fault (ANSI 50HS) ................................................................. 187
6.17 Phase overcurrent (ANSI 50/51).................................................................189
6.18 Earth fault overcurrent (ANSI 50N/51N) .................................................... 194
6.18.1 Earth fault faulty phase detection algorithm......................................197
6.19 Capacitor bank unbalance (ANSI 51C) ......................................................198
6.19.1 Taking unbalance protection into use............................................... 201
6.20 Overvoltage (ANSI 59)................................................................................205
6.21 Neutral voltage displacement (ANSI 59N).................................................. 209
6.22 Restricted high-impedance earth fault (ANSI 64REF, 64BEF)....................212
6.23 Restricted earth fault (ANSI 64REF) ..........................................................213
6.24 Directional phase overcurrent (ANSI 67) ................................................... 218
6.25 Directional earth fault overcurrent (ANSI 67N)........................................... 226
6.25.1 Earth fault faulty phase detection algorithm......................................231
6.26 Magnetizing inrush detection (ANSI 68F2)................................................. 233
6.27 Fifth harmonic detection (ANSI 68H5)........................................................ 235
6.28 Overfrequency and underfrequency (ANSI 81) ..........................................236
6.29 Rate of change of frequency (ANSI 81R)................................................... 239
6.30 Lockout (ANSI 86).......................................................................................243
6.31 Differential overcurrent protection (ANSI 87T) ........................................... 245
6.32 Arc flash detection (AFD)............................................................................253
6.32.1 Arc flash detection, general principle................................................253
6.32.2 Arc flash detection menus................................................................ 253
6.32.3 Binary inputs and outputs................................................................. 257
6.32.4 Binary input and binary output self-supervision................................ 258
6.32.5 Configuration example of arc flash detection....................................259
6.32.6 Arc flash detection characteristics.................................................... 263
6.33 Programmable stages (ANSI 99)................................................................ 265
7 Supporting functions.................................................................. 268

7.1 Event log....................................................................................................... 268
7.2 Disturbance recording...................................................................................270
7.2.1 Configuring the disturbance recorder................................................. 275
7.3 Cold load start and magnetizing inrush.........................................................276
7.4 System clock and synchronization................................................................277
7.5 Voltage sags and swells................................................................................284
7.6 Voltage interruptions..................................................................................... 287
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 5
7.7 Current transformer supervision (ANSI 60)...................................................289

7.8 Voltage transformer supervision (ANSI 60FL).............................................. 291
7.9 Circuit breaker wear......................................................................................294
7.10 Circuit breaker condition monitoring........................................................... 300
7.11 Energy pulse outputs...................................................................................303
7.12 Active and reactive energy..........................................................................307
7.13 Running hour counter................................................................................. 308
7.14 Timers......................................................................................................... 309
7.15 Combined overcurrent status...................................................................... 311
7.16 Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74) ...............................................................316
7.16.1 Trip circuit supervision with one digital input.....................................316
7.16.2 Trip circuit supervision with two digital inputs................................... 322
7.16.3 Trip circuit supervision with two combined digital inputs...................325
8 Communication and protocols....................................................327

8.1 Cybersecurity................................................................................................ 327
8.2 Communication ports.................................................................................... 327
8.2.1 Ethernet port....................................................................................... 331
8.2.2 Disabling the Ethernet communication............................................... 332
8.2.3 Disabling remote configuration........................................................... 334
8.3 Storm protection............................................................................................336
8.4 Parallel Redundancy Protocol.......................................................................336
8.5 Communication protocols............................................................................. 337
8.5.1 Modbus RTU and Modbus TCP..........................................................338
8.5.2 Profibus DP.........................................................................................338
8.5.3 SPA-bus.............................................................................................. 339
8.5.4 IEC 60870-5-103 (IEC-103)................................................................339
8.5.5 DNP 3.0.............................................................................................. 340
8.5.6 IEC 60870-5-101 (IEC-101)................................................................340
8.5.7 IEC 61850...........................................................................................341
8.5.8 Ethernet/IP..........................................................................................342
8.5.9 HTTP server – Webset....................................................................... 342
8.5.10 IEC 60870-5-104 (IEC-104)..............................................................342
8.6 IP filter...........................................................................................................343
8.6.1 Configuring the IP filter....................................................................... 343
8.6.2 Unexpected packets........................................................................... 345
8.6.3 Alarms.................................................................................................346
9 Applications and configuration examples...................................347

9.1 Arc flash detection........................................................................................ 347
9.2 Using CSH120 and CSH200 with I02 0.2 A / 1 A core balance CT input...... 350
10 Installation................................................................................ 352
10.1 Safety in installation.................................................................................... 352
10.2 Checking the consignment..........................................................................354
10.3 Product identification...................................................................................354
10.4 Storage....................................................................................................... 355
10.5 Mounting..................................................................................................... 355
6 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
10.6 Connections................................................................................................ 359

10.6.1 Supply voltage cards........................................................................ 360
10.6.2 Analog measurement cards..............................................................362
10.6.2.1 Analog measurement cards E and 1 (slot 8)....................... 362
10.6.2.2 Analog measurement cards T and 1 (slot 4)....................... 364
10.6.3 I/O cards........................................................................................... 366
10.6.3.1 I/O card “B = 3BIO+2Arc”.................................................... 366
10.6.3.2 I/O card “C = F2BIO+1Arc”..................................................367
10.6.3.3 I/O card “D = 2IGBT”........................................................... 369
10.6.3.4 I/O option card “D=4Arc”..................................................... 370
10.6.3.5 I/O card “G = 6DI+4DO”...................................................... 370
10.6.3.6 I/O card “H = 6DI + 4DO (NC)”............................................372
10.6.3.7 I/O card “I = 10DI”................................................................374
10.6.4 Arc flash sensor................................................................................ 375
10.6.4.1 Mounting the sensors to the switchgear..............................376
10.6.4.2 Connecting the sensors to the device................................. 378
10.6.5 Communication cards....................................................................... 379
10.6.5.1 COM 1 port..........................................................................385
10.6.5.2 COM 3 – COM 4 ports.........................................................386
10.6.6 Local port.......................................................................................... 391
10.6.7 Connection data................................................................................391
10.6.8 External option modules................................................................... 398
10.6.8.1 VSE-001 fiber-optic interface module..................................398
10.6.8.2 VSE-002 RS-485 interface module..................................... 399
10.6.8.3 VPA-3CG Profibus interface module................................... 401
10.6.8.4 VIO 12A RTD and analog input / output modules............... 402
10.6.9 Block diagrams................................................................................. 402
10.6.10 Connection examples..................................................................... 404
10.7 Arc flash detection system setup and testing..............................................405
10.7.1 Setting up the arc flash system.........................................................405
10.7.2 Commissioning and testing...............................................................406
10.7.2.1 Checking zones...................................................................407
10.7.2.2 Disconnecting trip circuits....................................................407
10.7.2.3 Sensor testingTesting.......................................................... 408
10.7.2.3.1 Testing the sensors.............................................409
10.7.2.3.2 Testing the sensor supervision........................... 409
10.7.2.3.3 Testing the binary I/O connectivity...................... 410
10.7.3 Test report ........................................................................................410
10.7.3.1 Filling in the test report........................................................ 410
10.7.3.2 Test report example............................................................. 411
10.7.4 Troubleshooting................................................................................ 412
10.8 Voltage measurement modes..................................................................... 412
10.8.1 Multiple channel voltage measurement ........................................... 414
10.9 CSH120 and CSH200 Core balance CTs................................................... 422
11 Test and environmental conditions........................................... 427

11.1 Disturbance tests.........................................................................................427
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 7
11.2 Electrical safety tests...................................................................................428

11.3 Mechanical tests..........................................................................................429
11.4 Environmental tests.....................................................................................429
11.5 Environmental conditions............................................................................ 430
11.6 Casing......................................................................................................... 431
12 Maintenance.............................................................................432
12.1 Preventive maintenance............................................................................. 432
12.2 Periodic testing........................................................................................... 433
12.3 Hardware cleaning...................................................................................... 433
12.4 System status messages............................................................................ 433
12.5 Spare parts................................................................................................. 433
12.6 Self-supervision.......................................................................................... 433
12.6.1 Diagnostics....................................................................................... 435
12.7 Arc flash detection system maintenance.................................................... 437
12.7.1 Visual inspection...............................................................................438
12.7.2 Hardware cleaning............................................................................438
12.7.3 Sensor condition and positioning check........................................... 439
13 Order codes and accessories.................................................. 440

13.1 Order codes................................................................................................ 440
13.2 Accessories.................................................................................................441
14 Firmware revision.....................................................................444
8 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Legal information Transformer protection relay
Legal information
The Schneider Electric brand and any registered trademarks of Schneider Electric
Industries SAS referred to in this guide are the sole property of Schneider Electric
SA and its subsidiaries. They may not be used for any purpose without the
owner's permission, given in writing. This guide and its content are protected,
within the meaning of the French intellectual property code (Code de la propriété
intellectuelle français, referred to hereafter as "the Code"), under the laws of
copyright covering texts, drawings and models, as well as by trademark law. You
agree not to reproduce, other than for your own personal, noncommercial use as
defined in the Code, all or part of this guide on any medium whatsoever without
Schneider Electric's permission, given in writing. You also agree not to establish
any hypertext links to this guide or its content. Schneider Electric does not grant
any right or license for the personal and noncommercial use of the guide or its
content, except for a non-exclusive license to consult it on an "as is" basis, at your
own risk. All other rights are reserved.
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced and maintained only

by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any
consequences arising out of the use of this material.
As standards, specifications and designs change from time to time, please ask for
confirmation of the information given in this publication.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 9
Transformer protection relay Safety information
Safety information
Important information
Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become familiar
with the device before trying to install, operate, service or maintain it.
The following special messages may appear throughout this publication or on the
equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that
clarifies or simplifies a procedure.
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential

personal injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow
this symbol to avoid possible injury or death.
The addition of either symbol to a “Danger” or “Warning” safety

label indicates that an electrical hazard exists which will result
in personal injury if the instructions are not followed.
DANGER
DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result
in death or serious injury.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to physical injury.
Please note
Electrical equipment must only be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained

by qualified personnel. A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge
related to the construction, installation, and operation of electrical equipment and
has received safety training to recognize and avoid the hazards involved.
No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising

out of the use of this material.
Protective grounding
The user is responsible for compliance with all the existing international and
national electrical codes concerning protective grounding of any device.
10 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
EU directive and UKCA regulations compliance Transformer protection relay
EU directive and UKCA regulations compliance
EU directive compliance UKCA regulations compliance
Schneider Electric Limited
Telford, TF3 3BL

United Kingdom
EMC compliance EMC compliance
2014/30/EU SI 2016 No. 1091
Compliance with the European The Electromagnetic Compatibility

Commission's EMC Directive. Product Regulations:
Specific Standard was used to establish • BS EN 60255-26 2013
conformity:
• EN 60255-26 2013
Product safety Product safety
2014/35/EU SI 2016 No. 1101
Compliance with the European The Electrical Equipment (Safety)

Commission's Low Voltage Directive. Regulations:
Product Specific Safety Standard was used • BS EN 60255-27 2014
to establish conformity:
• EN 60255-27 2014
RoHS directive RoHS regulation
2011/65/EU (inclusive of Directive (EU) SI 2012 No. 3032

2015/863) Compliance
The Restriction of the Use of Certain
Compliance with the European Hazardous Substances in Electrical and
Commission's on the restriction of the use Electronic Equipment Regulations
of certain hazardous substances in • BS EN IEC 63000:2018
electrical and electronic equipment
• EN IEC 63000:2018 / IEC 63000:2016
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 11
Transformer protection relay 1 About this manual
1 About this manual
1.1 Purpose
This document contains instructions on the installation, commissioning and
operation of PowerLogic P3T32.
This document is intended for persons who are experts on electrical power
engineering, and it covers the relay models as described by the order code in
13.1 Order codes.
1.2 Related documents

Table 1 - Related documents
Document Identification1)
P3 Advanced Quick Start P3x3x/EN QS/xxxx
eSetup Easergy Pro Setting and P3eSetup/EN M/xxxx

Configuration Tool User Manual
RTD and mA Output/Input Modules User VVIO12A_EN_M_D002

Manual
Profibus Interface Module User Manual VVPA3CG_EN_M_D004
IEC 61850 configuration instructions P3APS19001EN
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) P3APS17002EN
EtherNet/IP configuration instructions P3APS17003EN
Parallel Redundancy Protocol for Easergy P3APS17004EN

P3 relays with dual-port 100 Mbps Ethernet
interface
Communication parameter protocol P3TDS17005EN

mappings
Easergy P3 protection functions' P3TDS17006EN

parameters and recorded values
IEC103 Interoperability List P3TDS17009EN
DNP 3.0 Device Profile Document P3TDS17010EN
P3 Advanced Series facia label instruction P3TDS17012EN
Restricted earth fault protection using an I0 P3APS17016EN

input of an Easergy P3 relay
1) xxxx = revision number
12 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
1 About this manual Transformer protection relay
1.3 Abbreviations and terms

Table 2 - Abbreviations and terms used in this manual
AC Alternating current
AFD Arc flash detection
ANSI American National Standards Institute
A standardization organization
bps Bits per second
CB Circuit breaker
CBFP Circuit breaker failure protection
CLPU Cold load pickup
CM Common mode
Controlling output Heavy duty output rated for the circuit

breaker controlling
CPU Central processing unit
cosφ Active power divided by apparent power =

P/S
(See power factor PF.)
Negative sign indicates reverse power.
CT Current transformer
CT primary CTPRI. Nominal primary value of the IL

(high-voltage) current transformer
CT’ primary CT’PRI. Nominal primary value of the I’L

(low-voltage) current transformer
CT secondary CTSEC. Nominal secondary value of the IL

(high-voltage) current transformer
CT’ secondary CTSEC. Nominal secondary value of the I’L

(low-voltage) current transformer
DC Direct current
Dead band See hysteresis.
DI Digital input
Digital output Relay's output contact
DM Differential mode
DMS Distribution management system
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 13
DO Digital output
Document file Stores information about the relay settings,

events and fault logs
DSR Data set ready
An RS232 signal. Input in front panel port of

PowerLogic P3 devices to disable rear
panel local port.
DST Daylight saving time
Adjusting the official local time forward by

one hour for summer time.
DT Definite time
DTR Data terminal ready
An RS232 signal. Output and always true

(+8 Vdc) in front panel port of PowerLogic
P3 relays.
eSetup Easergy Pro Setting and configuration tool for

PowerLogic P3 protection relays
ETAR T> This measurement indicates the time to

allow a restart coming from the T> stage
(49F, 49M, 49G, 49T)
Eth packets per second limit Use this to set the maximum transmitted
packet limit in each second by the
PowerLogic P3 device. The recommended
setting is 75.
Event A single occurrence in a power system

process. In the HMI, event is abbreviated
as “E” followed by an identification number.
For example, E15 refers to Event 15.
F2BIO 2 x optical BIO interfaces, fibre
fy Frequency on the other side of the breaker.

This measurement is available when the
voltage scaling mode has synchrocheck
configured.
GOOSE Generic object-oriented substation event
A specific definition of a type of generic

substation event, for peer-peer
communication.
Hysteresis I.e. dead band
Used to avoid oscillation when comparing

two nearby values.
14 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
IDMT Inverse definite minimum time
IMODE Nominal current of the selected mode
In feeder mode, IMODE= VTPRIMARY. In

motor mode, IMODE= IMOT.
IMOT Nominal current of the protected motor
IN Nominal current
Rating of CT primary or secondary
ISET Start setting value I> (50/51)
ITN Rated current of the transformer (protected

object)
I0N Nominal current of I0 input in general
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
An international standardization
organisation
IEC-101 Communication protocol defined in

standard IEC 60870-5-101
IEC-103 Communication protocol defined in

standard IEC 60870-5-103
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics

Engineers
IRIG-B Inter-Range Instrumentation Group time

code B
Standard for time transfer
IT Instrument transformer (current or voltage

transformer): electrical device used to
isolate or transform voltage or current
levels
LAN Local area network
Ethernet-based network for computers and

devices
Latching Digital outputs and indication LEDs can be

latched, which means that they are not
released when the control signal is
releasing. Releasing of latched devices is
done with a separate action.
LCD Liquid crystal display
LED Light-emitting diode
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 15
NTP Network Time Protocol for LAN and WWW
Operation delay A setting in eSetup Easergy Pro that

specifies the total operate time from the
fault occurrence until the output contacts
are operated.
The delay contains:

• start delay
• user-configurable operation delay
• output contact delay
OVF Indication of the event overflow
P Active power
Unit = [W]
PF Power factor
The absolute value is equal to cosφ, but the

sign is 'IND' for inductive i.e. lagging current
and 'CAP' for capacitive i.e. leading current.
PLC Programmable logic controller
PM Nominal power of the prime mover
(Used by reverse/under power protection.)
POC signals Binary signals that are transferred in the

communication channel of two P3L30 line
differential relays in both directions. POC
signals are used to transfer statuses of the
DI, VI, VO and logic outputs.
PowerLogic P3 Standard P3U20 and P3U30 relays
PowerLogic P3 Advanced P3F30, P3L30, P3M30/32, P3G30/32 and

P3T32 relays
pu Per unit
PU Depending of the context, the per unit

refers to any nominal value.
For example, for overcurrent setting 1 pu =

1 x I GN .
P3T30 P3T30 transformer protection relay
Q Reactive power
Unit = [var]
RELxxxxx Short order code
RH Relative humidity
RMS Root mean square
16 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
RS232 or RS485 (EIA-232 or EIA-485) Standard defining the electrical

characteristics of a serial communication
interface
RTU Remote terminal unit
S Apparent power
Unit = [VA]
SCADA Supervisory control and data acquisition
SF Alarm duty watchdog output is energized

when the auxiliary power supply is on and
the product status is operative. This output
is referenced as "service status output" in
the setting tool.
Signaling output Alarm duty output rated, not suitable for

direct circuit breaker controlling
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol for LAN and

WWW
SOTF Switch on to fault
Squelch limit Noise filter used to force the measured low

signal level to zero
SPST Single pole single throw
SPDT Single pole double throw
Storm protection limit Use this setting to limit broadcast

messages. For example, limit the storm to
3%, that is 0.03 * 100 Mbps = 30 kbps. This
means that only 30 kb (typically 45 packets)
of broadcast traffic per second is processed
by the PowerLogic P3 device.
TCP keepalive interval Interval between keepalive messages.

Keepalive messages are used to keep the
connection active and to response faster to
a lost connection.
TCS Trip circuit supervision
THD Total harmonic distortion
U0SEC Voltage at input Uc at zero ohm ground

fault. (Used in voltage measurement mode
“2LL+U0”)
UA Voltage input for U12 or UL1 depending on

the voltage measurement mode
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 17
UB Voltage input for U23 or UL2 depending on

UC Voltage input for U31 or U0 depending on

UN Nominal voltage
Rating of VT primary or secondary
UMI User-machine interface
USB Universal serial bus
UTC Coordinated Universal Time
Used to be called GMT = Greenwich Mean

Time
Webset HTTP configuration interface
VI Virtual input
VO Virtual output
VT Voltage transformer
VTPRI Nominal primary value of voltage

transformer
VTSEC Nominal secondary value of voltage

transformer
1.4 Easergy to PowerLogic renaming

Schneider Electric, driven by its “Customer First” Core Value, is fully committed to
easing the customer experience with our portfolio on all fronts. With this core
mission in mind, the decision to optimize the number of brands has been taken
across the entire digital Schneider Electric portfolio to provide a more cohesive
and consistent presentation of our offers across different Divisions, bringing a
simpler and customer-centric approach that will facilitate the navigation through
all the breadth and depth of our offers and that will be a key enabler for an
optimized digitization experience.
This brand optimization initiative affects Protection & Control portfolio including
Easergy P3 protection and control relays. The Easergy P3 has been renamed to
PowerLogic P3. It is essential to emphasize that this renaming exclusively affects
the brand name of the products and will have absolutely no consequence on the
current performance, specifications, characteristics, and/or quality of the product,
which remain totally unaffected by this brand name migration. During the brand
transition project, it may happen that the application of this change to different
parts of the offer becomes effective with different time schedules. There is
absolutely no difference between Easergy and PowerLogic branded P3 products
and accessories. Easergy accessories can be used with PowerLogic P3 product
as long as the commercial reference is matching. The commercial references
18 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
have not changed along with the renaming of the offer. eSetup Easergy Pro and
CET850 remain the software to configure PowerLogic P3 protection and control
relays.
1.5 Description of the document versions

The document version rule was upgraded since the firmware version 30.208 to
help understand for which firmware version the user manual is intended.
The document version is composed of the following information:
• Product type
◦ P3U stands for PowerLogic P3 Standard; P3X stands for PowerLogic P3
Advanced;
◦ P3F stands for PowerLogic P3 Feeder;
◦ P3G stands for PowerLogic P3 Generator;
◦ P3L stands for PowerLogic P3 Line differential;
◦ P3M stands for PowerLogic P3 Motor;
◦ P3T stands for PowerLogic P3 Transformer.
• Language and standard definition
◦ EN, FR, IT, ES, PT, RU, CN, ANSI, and so on.
◦ By default, the IEC standard applies. ANSI version is always published in
the English language.
• Document type
◦ M stands for User Manual, QS stands for Quick Start Manual, C stands for
Communication Manual.
• Major version of the firmware
• Release version of the firmware
• Document version, which loops from A to Z for a dedicated release version.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 19
Transformer protection relay 2 Product introduction
2 Product introduction
2.1 Warranty
This product has a standard warranty of 2 years.
Ask your local Schneider Electric representative about our optional 10-year
warranty. Local conditions and availability apply.
2.2 Product overview

The relay has a modular design, and it can be optimized to medium and big sized
transformers.
Main characteristic and options
• The relay is a transformer protection relay for medium sized transformers in

power distribution.
• The relay has an optional interface for connecting four arc flash point sensors.
• The relay has optional arc flash communications and high speed outputs to
allow for simple arc flash system configuration.
• Two alternative display options
◦ 128 x 128 LCD matrix
◦ 128 x 128 LCD matrix detachable
• Power quality measurements and disturbance recorder enable capture of
transients
• Wide range of communication protocols, for example:
◦ Modbus TCP/IP
◦ Profibus
◦ IEC61850
The following options depend on the order code:
• power supply options

• earth fault overcurrent input sensitivity
• number of digital inputs
• number of trip contacts
• integrated arc-options (point sensors)
• various possibilities with communication interfaces:
◦ high-speed outputs
◦ simple arc flash system communications (BIO)
◦ fiber loop
• front panel protection of IP54
Protection functions
• Universal, adaptive protection functions for user-configurable transformer

applications
• Neutral voltage displacement, overvoltage and frequency protection including
synchrocheck for two breakers
20 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
2 Product introduction Transformer protection relay
• Single-line diagram, measurements and alarms in the user-machine interface

(UMI)
• User-configurable interlocking for primary object control
• Optional arc flash detection utilizing point sensors and a fiber loop that can
provide system wide arc flash detection.
Virtual injection
• Current and voltage injection by manipulating the database of the product by

setting tool disturbance recorder file playback through the product's database
Robust hardware
• User-selectable Ethernet, RS485 or RS232 -based communication interfaces

• Designed for demanding industrial conditions with conformal-coated printed
circuit boards
• Standard USB connection (type B) for Easergy P3 setting software
Common technology for cost efficiency
• Powerful CPU supporting IEC 61850

• Thanks to four setting groups, adaptation to various protection schemes is
convenient
User-machine interface (UMI)
• Clear LCD display for alarms and events

• Single-line diagram mimic with control, indication and live measurements
• Programmable function keys and LEDs
• Circuit breaker ON/OFF control
• Common firmware platform with other PowerLogic P3 range protection relays
2.3 Product selection guide

The selection guide provides information on the PowerLogic P3 platform to aid in
the relay selection. It suggests PowerLogic P3 types suitable for your protection
requirements, based on your application characteristics. The most typical
applications are presented along with the associated PowerLogic P3 type.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 21
Table 3 - Applications
PowerLogic P3 Standard PowerLogic P3 Advanced
Voltage – –
Feeder P3F30
w. directional
–
P3L30
P3U30 w. line diff.
with directional
Transformer o/c P3T32
–
P3U20 with voltage with differential
protection
Motor P3M32
P3M30
with differential
Generator P3G32
P3G30
with differential
Measuring inputs Phase current 1/5A CT (x3) 1/5A CT (x3) or 1/5A CT (x3) or 1/5A CT (x6)
LPCT (x3) LPCT (x3)2)
Residual current 1/5A CT or 0.2/1A CT or CSH 5/1A+1/0.2A or or 5/1A+1/0.2A +

5/1A + CSH 5/1A+1/0.2A CT
Voltage VT (x1) VT (x4) or LPVT VT (x4) or LPVT VT (x4)

(x4) (x4)2)
Arc flash sensor input – 0 to 4 point sensor 0 to 4 point sensor
Digital I/O Input 8/10 14/16 6 to 36 6 to 16
Output 5/8 + SF 11/8 + SF 10 to 21 + SF 10 to 13 + SF
Analog I/O Input 0 or 4 3) 0 or 4 3)
Output 0 or 4 3) 0 or 4 3)
Temperature sensor input 0 or 8 or 123) 0 or 8 or 123)
Front port USB USB
Nominal power supply 24 Vdc or 24...48 Vdc (20...57 Vdc) or 24...48 Vdc (20...57 Vdc) or 110...240
48...240 Vdc/ac (39...265 V dc/ac)4) Vdc/ac (88...265 V dc/ac)
Ambient temperature, in service -40...60°C (-40...140°F) -40...60°C (-40...140°F)

2) LPCT/LPVT available for P3F30 and P3M30 only
3) Usingexternal RTD module
4) Check the available power supply range from the device's serial number label.
22 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Table 4 - Communication & others
PowerLogic P3 PowerLogic P3 Advanced

Standard
Communication
Rear ports RS-232 ■ ■ ■
IRIG/B ■ ■ ■
RS-485 ■ Using external I/O Using external I/O

module module
Ethernet ■ ■ ■
Protocols IEC 61850 Ed1 & Ed2 ■ ■ ■
IEC 60870-5-101 ■ ■ ■
IEC 60870-5-103 ■ ■ ■
IEC 60870-5-104 ■ ■ ■
DNP3 Over Ethernet ■ ■ ■
Modbus serial ■ ■ ■
Modbus TCP/IP ■ ■ ■
Ethernet/IP ■ ■ ■
Profibus DP ■ ■ ■
SPAbus ■ ■ ■
Redundancy RSTP ■ ■ ■
protocols
PRP ■ ■ ■
Others
Control 8 objects 8 objects

Mimic Mimic
Logic Matrix ■ ■
Logic equations ■ ■
Cyber security Password Password
Withdrawability (Pluggable connector) ■ –
Remote UMI – ■
NOTE: The numbers in the following tables represent the amount of stages
available for each PowerLogic P3 type.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 23
Table 5 - Protection functions for P3U
Protection functions ANSI Feeder P3U20 Feeder P3U30 Motor P3U20 Motor P3U30
code
Fault locator 21FL – 1 – 1
Synchronization check5) 25 – 2 – 2
Undervoltage 27 – 3 – 3
Directional power 32L, 32R – 2 – 2
Phase undercurrent 37 1 1 1 1
Temperature monitoring6) 38/49T 12 12 12 12
Negative sequence 46 – – 2 2
overcurrent (motor,
generator)
Cur. unbalance, broken 46BC 1 1 – –

conductor
Incorrect phase sequence 47 – – 1 1
Negative sequence 47 – 3 – 3
overvoltage protection
Motor start-up 48/51LR – – 1 1

supervision / Locked rotor
Thermal overload 49 1 1 1 1
Phase overcurrent 50/51 3 3 3 3
Earth fault overcurrent 50N/51N 5 5 5 5
Breaker failure 50BF 1 1 1 1
SOTF 50HS 1 1 1 1
Capacitor bank 51C 2 2 2 2

unbalance7)
Voltage-dependent 51V – 1 – 1
overcurrent
Overvoltage 59 – 3 – 3
Capacitor overvoltage 59C 1 1 – –
Neutral voltage 59N 3 3 3 3

displacement
CT supervision 60 1 1 1 1
VT supervision 60FL – 1 – 1
Restricted earth fault with 64REF 1 1 1 1

external connection (high
64BEF
impedance)
Frequent start inhibition 66 – – 1 1
24 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Protection functions ANSI Feeder P3U20 Feeder P3U30 Motor P3U20 Motor P3U30
code
Directional phase 67 – 4 – 4
overcurrent
Directional earth fault o/c 67N 5 5 5 5
Transient intermittent 67NI 1 1 – –
Magnetizing inrush 68F2 1 1 1 1

detection
Fifth harmonic detection 68H5 1 1 1 1
Vector shift 78V – 1 – 1
Auto-Recloser 79 5 5 – –
Over or under frequency 81 – 2/2 – 2/2
Rate of change of 81R – 1 – 1

frequency
Under frequency 81U – 2 – 2
Lockout 86 1 1 1 1
High-impedance busbar 87HiZ BB 1 1 1 1
Programmable stages 99 8 8 8 8
Cold load pickup (CLPU) – 1 1 1 1
Programmable curves – 3 3 3 3
Setting groups 8) – 4 4 4 4
5) The availability depends on the selected voltage measurement mode (in the Scaling setting view in eSetup Easergy Pro)
6) Using external RTD module
7) Capacitor bank unbalance protection is connected to the earth fault overcurrent input and shares two stages with the earth fault
overcurrent protection.
8) Not all protection functions have 4 setting groups. See details in the manual.
Table 6 - Protection functions for Px3x
Protection functions ANSI P3F30 P3L30 P3M30 P3M32 P3G30 P3G32 P3T32
code
Under-impedance 21G – – – – 2 2 –
Fault locator 21FL 1 1 – – – – –
Overfluxing 24 – – – – 1 1 1
Synchronization check9) 25 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Undervoltage 27 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Positive sequence under- 27P – – – – 2 2 2

voltage
Directional power 32L, 32R 2 2 2 2 2 2 –
Phase undercurrent 37 – – 1 1 – – –
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 25
code
Temperature monitoring10) 38/49T 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Loss of field 40 – – – – 1 1 –
Under-reactance 21/40 – – – – 2 2 –
Negative sequence 46 – – 2 2 2 2 2
overcurrent (motor,
generator)
Cur. unbalance, broken 46BC 1 1 – – – – –

conductor
Incorrect phase sequence 47 – – 1 1 – – –
Negative sequence 47 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
overvoltage protection
Excessive start time, 48/51LR – – 1 1 – – –

locked rotor
Thermal overload 49 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Phase overcurrent 50/51 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Earth fault overcurrent 50N/51N 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Breaker failure 50BF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
SOTF 50HS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Capacitor bank 51C 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

unbalance11)
Voltage-dependent 51V 1 1 – – 1 1 –
overcurrent
Overvoltage 59 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Capacitor overvoltage 59C 1 1 – – – – –
Neutral voltage 59N 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

displacement
CT supervision 60 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
VT supervision 60FL 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Restricted earth fault with 64REF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

external connection (high
64BEF
impedance)
Restricted earth fault (low 64REF – – – 1 – 1 1

impedance)
Stator earth fault 64S – – – – 1 1 –
Frequent start inhibition 66 – – 1 1 – – –
Directional phase 67 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
overcurrent
26 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
code
Directional earth fault o/c 67N 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Transient intermittent 67NI 1 1 – – – – –
Magnetizing inrush 68F2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

detection
Fifth harmonic detection 68H5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Pole slip 78PS – – – – 1 1 –
Auto-Recloser 79 5 5 – – – – –
Over or under frequency 81 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2
Rate of change of 81R 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

frequency
Under frequency 81U 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Lockout 86 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Line differential 87L – 2 – – – – –
Machine differential 87M – – – 2 – 2 –
Transformer differential 87T – – – – – – 2
High-impedance busbar 87HiZ BB 1 1 1 – 1 – –
Programmable stages 99 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Arc flash detection (AFD) – 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Cold load pickup (CLPU) – 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Programmable curves – 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Setting groups 12) – 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) The availability depends on the selected voltage measurement mode (in the Scaling setting view in eSetup Easergy Pro)
10) Using external RTD module
11) Capacitor bank unbalance protection is connected to the earth fault overcurrent input and shares two stages with the earth fault
12) Not all protection functions have 4 setting groups. See details in the manual.
Table 7 - Control functions
Control functions P3U20 P3U30 P3F30 P3L30 P3M30 P3M32 P3G30 P3G32 P3T32
Switchgear control and 2 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

monitoring
Switchgear monitoring – – 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
only
Programmable switchgear ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
interlocking
Local control on single- ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

line diagram
Local control with O/I keys ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 27
Control functions P3U20 P3U30 P3F30 P3L30 P3M30 P3M32 P3G30 P3G32 P3T32
Local/remote function ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Function keys 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Custom logic (logic ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

equations)
Control with Smart App ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Table 8 - Measurements
Measurement P3U20 P3U30 P3F30 P3L30 P3M30 P3M32 P3G30 P3G32 P3T32
RMS current values ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■13) ■ ■13) ■13)
RMS voltage values ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
RMS active, reactive and – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

apparent power
Frequency ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Fundamental frequency ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■13) ■ ■13) ■13)

current values
Fundamental frequency – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
voltage values
Fundamental frequency – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
active, reactive and
apparent power values
Power factor – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Energy values active and – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

reactive
Energy transmitted with – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

pulse outputs
Demand values: phase ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

currents
Demand values: active, – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

reactive, apparent power
and power factor
Min and max demand ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

values: phase currents
Min and max demand ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

values: RMS phase
currents
Min and max demand – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

values: active, reactive,
apparent power and
power factor
28 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Measurement P3U20 P3U30 P3F30 P3L30 P3M30 P3M32 P3G30 P3G32 P3T32
Maximum demand values – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

over the last 31 days and
12 months: active,
Minimum demand values – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

over the last 31 days and
12 months: active,
reactive power
Max and min values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

currents
Max and min values: – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

voltages
Max and min values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

frequency
Max andmin values: – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

active, reactive, apparent
power and power factor
Harmonic values of phase ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■13) ■ ■13) ■13)

current and THD
Harmonic values of – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
voltage and THD
Voltage sags and swells – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

13) Function available on both sets of CT inputs
Table 9 - Logs and records
Logs and Records P3U20 P3U30 P3F30 P3L30 P3M30 P3M32 P3G30 P3G32 P3T32
Sequence of event record ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Disturbance record ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Tripping context record ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Table 10 - Monitoring functions
Monitoring functions P3U20 P3U30 P3F30 P3L30 P3M30 P3M32 P3G30 P3G32 P3T32
Trip circuit supervision 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

(ANSI 74)
Circuit breaker monitoring 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Relay monitoring ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
2.4 Access to device configuration

You can access the device configuration via:
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 29
• the eSetup Easergy Pro setting tool

• the device’s front panel
NOTE: There is a timeout mechanism for Telnet/Serial/Http connections.

When logging on via the front panel or web HMI, you are automatically logged
out after 15 minutes inactivity.
2.4.1 User accounts
By default, the PowerLogic P3 device has three user accounts.
Table 11 - User accounts
User account User name Default Use

password
User user 0 Can view parameter values,

measurements and events. This
account cannot modify settings
and files.
Operator operator 1 Has the same rights as User

account and can perform control
actions and change settings.
Configurator conf 2 Has the same rights as Operator

account and is needed during P3
device commissioning. For
example, the scaling of the voltage
and current transformers can be
set only with Configurator account.
2.4.2 Logging on via the front panel
NOTE: To log on via the front panel, you need a password that consists of
letters, digits, or other characters in the scope of ASCII 0x21~0x7E.
1. Press and on the front panel. The Enter password view opens.
Figure 1 - Enter password view
2. Enter the password for the desired access level.
Select a digit value using , and if the password is longer than one digit,
move to the next digit position using .
30 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
NOTE: There are 16 digit positions in the Enter password view. Enter the
password starting from the first digit position.
For example, if the password is 2, you can enter 2***, **2*, ***2, or 0002
to log on.
3. Press to confirm the password.
Related topics
2.4.4 Password management
2.4.3 HTTP and FTP logon details
You can log on to the HTTP server and FTP using these user names and
passwords.
Table 12 - HTTP and FTP logon details
Protocol User name Password
HTTP conf 2
FTP conf 2
2.4.4 Password management
NOTICE
CYBERSECURITY HAZARD
• Change all passwords from their default values when taking the protection
device into use.
• Change all passwords regularly.
• Ensure a minimum level of password complexity according to common
password guidelines.
Failure to follow these instructions can increase the risk of unauthorized

access.
You can change the password for the operator or configurator user accounts in
the DEVICE/TEST > System info setting view in eSetup Easergy Pro.
The password can contain letters, digits or other characters in the scope of ASCII
0x21~0x7E. However, the new password cannot be any of the default passwords
(digits 0–4 or 9999).
Follow these guidelines to improve the password complexity and thus device
security:
• Use a password of minimum 8 characters.
• Use alphabetic (uppercase and lowercase) and numeric characters in addition
to symbols.
• Avoid character repetition, number or letter sequences and keyboard patterns.
• Do not use any personal information, such as birthday, name, etc.
• Do not use the same password for different user accounts.
• Do not reuse old passwords.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 31
Also, all users must be aware of the best practices concerning passwords
including:
• not sharing personal passwords
• not displaying passwords during password entry
• not transmitting passwords in email or by other means
• not saving the passwords on PCs or other devices
• no written passwords on any supports
• regularly reminding users about the best practices concerning passwords
Related topics
2.4.2 Logging on via the front panel
2.4.5 Password restoring
If you have lost or forgotten all passwords, contact Schneider Electric to restore
the default passwords.
2.5 Front panel

PowerLogic P3T32 has a 128 x 128 LCD matrix display.
Figure 2 - PowerLogic P3T32 front panel
A B D E F
ON Service
A B
C D
E F
G H
I J
K L
M N
F1 F2
I J G C G J H
A. Power LED F. Service LED

B. HOME/CANCEL push-button G. Function push-buttons and LEDs showing their status
C. Navigation push-buttons H. Local port
D. LCD I. Object control buttons
E. INFO push-button J. User-configurable LEDs
32 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
2.5.1 Push-buttons
Symbol Function
HOME/CANCEL push-button for returning to the previous menu. To

return to the first menu item in the main menu, press the button for at
least 3 seconds.
INFO push-button for viewing additional information, for entering the

password view and for adjusting the LCD contrast.
Programmable function push-button.14)
Programmable function push-button.14)
ENTER push-button for activating or confirming a function.
UP navigation push-button for moving up in the menu or increasing a

numerical value.
DOWN navigation push-button for moving down in the menu or

decreasing a numerical value.
LEFT navigation push-button for moving backwards in a parallel menu

or selecting a digit in a numerical value.
RIGHT navigation push-button for moving forwards in a parallel menu or

selecting a digit in a numerical value.
Circuit breaker ON push-button
Circuit breaker OFF push-button
14) The default names of the function buttons are Function button 1 and 2. You can change the names
of the buttons in the Control > Names for function buttons setting view.
2.5.2 LED indicators
The relay has 18 LEDs on the front panel:
• two LEDs for function buttons (F1 and F2)

• two LEDs represent the unit's general status (power and service)
• 14 user-configurable LEDs (A-N)
When the relay is powered, the power LED is green. During normal use, the
service LED is not active, it activates only when an error occurs or the relay is not
operating correctly. Should this happen, contact your local representative for
further guidance. The service LED and watchdog contact are assigned to work
together. Hardwire the status output into the substation's automation system for
alarm purposes.
The user-configurable LEDs may be red or green. You can configure them via
eSetup Easergy Pro.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 33
To customize the LED texts on the front panel for the user-configurable LEDs, the
text may be created using a template and then printed. The printed text may be
placed in the pockets beside the LEDs.
You can also customize the LED texts that are shown on the screen for active
LEDs via eSetup Easergy Pro.
Table 13 - LED indicators and their information
LED indicator LED color Meaning Measure /

Remarks
Power LED lit Green The auxiliary power Normal operation

has been switched state
on.
Service LED lit Red Internal fault. The relay attempts

Operates in parallel to reboot. If the
with the self- service LED remains
supervision output lit, call for
maintenance.
A–H LED lit Green or red Application-related Configurable in the

status indicators. Matrix setting view
F1 or F2 LED lit Green Corresponding Depending on the

function key function
pressed / activated programmed to F1 /
F2
2.5.3 Configuring the LED names via eSetup Easergy Pro
1. Go to General > LED names.
2. To change a LED name, click the LED Description text and type a new
name. To save the new name, press Enter.
34 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 3 - LED NAMES menu in eSetup Easergy Pro for LED configuration
2.5.4 Controlling the alarm screen
You can enable or disable the alarm screen either via the relay's local display or
using eSetup Easergy Pro:
• On the local display, go to Events > Alarms.

• In eSetup Easergy Pro, go to General > Local panel conf.
2.5.5 Accessing operating levels
1. On the front panel, press and .
2. Enter the password, and press .
2.5.6 Adjusting the LCD contrast
Prerequisite: You have entered the correct password.
1. Press , and adjust the contrast.
◦ To increase the contrast, press .

◦ To decrease the contrast, press .
2. To return to the main menu, press .
NOTE: By nature, the LCD display changes its contrast depending on the
ambient temperature. The display may become dark or unreadable at low
temperatures. However, this condition does not affect the proper operation of
the protection or other functions.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 35
2.5.7 Testing the LEDs and LCD screen
You can start the test sequence in any main menu window.
To start the LED and LCD test:
1. Press .
2. Press .
The relay tests the LCD screen and the functionality of all LEDs.
2.5.8 Controlling an object with selective control
Prerequisite: You have logged in with the correct password and enabled selective
control in the Objects setting view.
When selective control is enabled, the control operation needs confirmation

(select before operate).
• Press to close an object.
– Press again to confirm.
– Press to cancel.
• Press to open an object.
– Press again to confirm.
– Press to cancel.
2.5.9 Controlling an object with direct control
Prerequisite: You have logged in with the correct password and enabled direct
control in the Objects setting view.
When direct control is enabled, the control operation is done without confirmation.
• Press to close an object.
• Press to open an object.
2.5.10 Menus
This section gives an overview of the menus that you can access via the device's
front panel.
The main menu
Press the right arrow to access more measurements in the main menu.
36 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Table 14 - Main menu
Menu name Description
Active LEDs User-configurable texts for active LEDs
Measurements User-configurable measurements
Single line Single line or Single line mimic,

measurements and control view. This is a
default start view. To return to this view
from any location, press the HOME/
CANCEL button for at least 3 seconds.
Info Information about the relay: relay's name,

order code, date, time and firmware version
P Power: power factor and frequency values

calculated by the relay. Press the right
arrow to view more measurements.
E Energy: the amount of energy that has

passed through the protected line,
calculated by the relay from the currents
and voltages. Press the right arrow to view
more energy measurements.
I Current: phase currents and demand

values of phase currents. Press the right
arrow to view more current measurements.
U Line-to-line voltages. Press the right arrow

to view other voltage measurements.
Dema Minimum and maximum phase current and

power demand values
Umax Minimum and maximum values of voltage

and frequency
Imax Minimum and maximum current values
Pmax Minimum and maximum power values
Month Monthly maximum current and power

values
FL Short-circuit locator applied to incomer or

feeder
Evnt Event log: event codes and time stamps
DR Disturbance recorder configuration settings
Runh Running hour counter
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 37
Menu name Description
TIMR Timers: programmable timers that you can

use to preset functions
DI Digital input statuses and settings
DO Digital output statuses and settings
Arc Arc flash detection settings
Prot Protection: settings and statuses for various

protection functions
I>, I>>, etc. Protection stage settings and statuses. The

availability of the menus are depends on
the activated protection stages.
AR Auto-recloser settings, statuses and

registers
OBJ Objects: settings related to object status

data and object control (open/closed)
Lgic Logic events and counters
CONF General device setup: CT and VT scalings,

frequency adaptation, units, device info,
date, time, clock, etc.
Bus Communication port settings
Slot Slot info: card ID (CID) that is the name of

the card used by the relay firmware
Diag Diagnosis: various diagnostic information
38 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
2.5.10.1 Moving in the menus
Figure 4 - Moving in menus using the front panel
Main menu Submenus
Prot protection enabling
OK
ISTART setting
OK OK
• To move in the main menu, press or .

• To move in the submenus, press or .
• While in the submenu, press or to jump to the root.
• To enter a submenu, press and use or for moving down or up
in the menu.
• To edit a parameter value, press and .
• Enter the password, and press .
• To go back to the previous menu, press .
• To go back to the first menu item in the main menu, press for at least three
seconds.
NOTE: To enter the parameter edit mode, enter the password. When the
value is in edit mode, its background is dark.
2.5.10.2 Local panel messages
Table 15 - Local panel messages

Value is not editable: The value can not be edited or password is
not given
Control disabled: Object control disabled due to wrong

operating level
Change causes autoboot: Notification that if the parameter is changed

the relay boots itself
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 39
2.6 eSetup Easergy Pro setting and configuration tool
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC
FLASH
Only qualified personnel should operate this equipment.

Such work should be performed only after reading this
entire set of instructions and checking the technical
characteristics of the device.
Failure to follow this instruction will result in death or

serious injury.
eSetup Easergy Pro is a software tool for configuring PowerLogic P3 relays. It

has a graphical interface where the relay settings and parameters are grouped
under seven tabs:
• General
• Measurements
• Inputs/outputs
• Protection
• Matrix
• Logs
• Communication
The contents of the tabs depend on the relay type and the selected application
mode.
eSetup Easergy Pro stores the relay configuration in a setting file. The
configuration of one physical relay is saved in one setting file. The configurations
can be printed out and saved for later use.
For more information, see the eSetup Easergy Pro user manual.
NOTE: Download the latest version of the software from se.com.
NOTICE
HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
After writing new settings or configurations to a device, perform a test to verify

that the relay operates correctly with the new settings.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in unwanted shutdown of

the electrical installation.
40 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
3 Mechanical structure Transformer protection relay
3 Mechanical structure
3.1 Modularity
The relay has a modular structure. The relay is built from hardware modules that
are installed into 10 different slots at the back of the relay. The location of the
slots is shown in Figure 5.
The type of the hardware modules is defined by the order code.
Figure 5 - Slot numbering and card options in the PowerLogic P3T32 rear panel
and an example of defining the pin address 1/C/1:1
A
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10
C
A. Card C 1 Supply voltage [V]
B. Connector 2 2, 3 I/O card
C. Pin 1 4, 5 I/O or analog

measurement card
D. Protective grounding 6, 9 Communication or

I/O option card
7, 8, 10 Analog
measurement card
(I, U)
For complete availability information on the different option cards, see 13.2
Accessories.
10.6 Connections contains detailed information on each card.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 41
Transformer protection relay 3 Mechanical structure
Example
Table 16 - Example of typical model PowerLogic P3T32-CGATA-AAENA-B2
SLOT NAME TYPE
Application T32 = Transformer

protection relay
1 Supply voltage Power C 110 – 240 V (80–

265 V ac/dc, 5 x DO heavy
duty, A1, SF)
2 I/O card I G = 6DI+4DO (6 x DI, 4 x

DO)
3 I/O card II A = None
4 I/O card III T = 3xI (5/1A) + Io (5/1A) for

Transformer differential,
excludes I/O card in slot 5
5 I/O card IV A = None
6 Option card I A = None
7 Future option A = None
8 Analog measurement card E = 3L(5A)+4U+2IO (5/1A

(See application) +1/0.2A)
9 Communication interface I N = 2 x RJ (Ethernet RJ 100

Mbs, RSTP, PRP)
10 Future option A = None
Display type B = 128x128 (128 x 128

LCD matrix)
DI nominal voltage 2 = 110 V dc/ac
3.2 Slot info and order code

The relay's configuration can be checked via the front panel or eSetup Easergy
Pro menu called Slot or Slot info. “Card ID” is the name of the card used by the
relay firmware.
42 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
3 Mechanical structure Transformer protection relay
Figure 6 - Hardware configuration example view from eSetup Easergy Pro

configuration tool
NOTE: See 13.1 Order codes for the relay ordering options.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 43
Transformer protection relay 4 Measurement functions
4 Measurement functions
PowerLogic P3 has various amounts of analog inputs depending on the model in
use. Also see 2.3 Product selection guide.
The current scaling impacts the following functions:

• Protection stages
• Measurements
• Disturbance recorder
• Fault location calculation
Table 17 - Measurement functions in PowerLogic P3
Measurements P3U20 P3U30 P3x3x Measurement Inaccuracy

Specification range
RMS phase ■ ■ ■ 0.025–50 x IN I ≤ 1.5 x IN: ±0.5 %

current of value or ±15 mA
I > 1.5 x IN: ±3 %

of value
RMS earth fault ■ ■ ■ 0.003–10 x IN I ≤ 1.5 xI0N: ±0.3 %

overcurrent of value or ±0.2 %
of I0N
I > 1.5 xI0N: ±3 %

of value
RMS line-to-line — ■ ■ 0.005–1.7 x UN ±0.5 % or ±0.3 V

voltage15)
RMS phase-to- — ■ ■ 0.005–1.7 x UN ±0.5 % or ±0.3 V

neutral voltage15)
RMS active power — ■ ■ ±0.1–1.5 x PN ±1 % for range

(PF >0.5) 0.3–1.5xPN
±3 % for range
0.1–0.3xPN
RMS reactive — ■ ■ ±0.1–1.5 x QN ±1 % for range

power (PF >0.5) 0.3–1.5xQN
±3 % for range
0.1–0.3xQN
RMS apparent — ■ ■ ±0.1–1.5 x SN ±1 % for range

power (PF >0.5) 0.3–1.5xSN
±3 % for range
0.1–0.3xSN
Frequency ■ ■ ■ 16 Hz – 75 Hz ±10 mHz
44 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
4 Measurement functions Transformer protection relay

Specification range
Fundamental ■ ■ ■ 0.025-50 x IN I ≤ 1.5 x IN: ±0.5 %

frequency current of value or ±15 mA
values
I > 1.5 x IN: ±3 %
of value
Fundamental — ■ ■ 0.005–1.7 x UN ±0.5 % or ±0.3 V

frequency voltage
values
Fundamental — ■ ■ ±0.1–1.5 x PN ±1 % for range

frequency active, 0.3–1.5xPN
reactive and
±3 % for range
apparent power
0.1–0.3xPN
values
Fundamental — ■ ■ ±0.1–1.5 x QN ±1 % for range

frequency active 0.3–1.5xQN
power values
±3 % for range
0.1–0.3xQN
Fundamental — ■ ■ ±0.1–1.5 x SN ±1 % for range

frequency reactive 0.3–1.5xSN
power values
±3 % for range
0.1–0.3xSN
Power factor — ■ ■ 0.02–1 ±2° or ±0.02 for PF

> 0.5
Active energy — ■ ■ ±1 % for range

0.3–1.5xEPN
Reactive energy — ■ ■ ±1 %/1h for range

0.3–1.5xEQN
±3 %/1h for range

0.1–0.3xEQN
Energy transmitted — ■ ■ ±1 %/1h for range

with pulse outputs 0.3–1.5xEPN
±3 %/1h for range

0.1–0.3xEPN
Demand values: ■ ■ ■ 0.025–50 x IN I ≤ 1.5 x IN: ±0.5 %

phase currents of value or ±15 mA
I > 1.5 x IN ±3 % of
value
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 45

Specification range
Active power — ■ ■ ±0.1–1.5 x PN ±1 % for range

demand 0.3–1.5xPN
±3 % for range
0.1–0.3xPN
Reactive power — ■ ■ ±0.1–1.5 x QN ±1 % for range

demand 0.3–1.5xQN
±3 % for range
0.1-0.3xQN
Apparent power — ■ ■ ±0.1–1.5 x SN ±1 % for range

demand 0.3–1.5xSN
±3 % for range
0.1–0.3xSN
Power factor — ■ ■ ±2° or ±0.02 for PF

demand > 0.5
Min. and max. ■ ■ ■ 0.025–50 x IN I ≤ 1.5 x IN: ±0.5 %

demand values: of value or ±15 mA
phase currents
I > 1.5 x IN ±3 % of
value
Min. and max. ■ ■ ■ 0.025–50 x IN I ≤ 1.5 x IN: ±0.5 %

demand values: of value or ±15 mA
RMS phase
I > 1.5 x IN ±3 % of
currents
value
Min. and max. — ■ ■ ±1 % for range

demand values: 0.3–1.5xPN, QN,
active, reactive, SN
apparent power
and power factor ±3 % for range
0.1–0.3xPN, QN,
SN
Maximum demand — ■ ■ ±1 % for range

values over the 0.3–1.5xPN, QN,
last 31 days and SN
12 months: active,
reactive, apparent ±3 % for range
power 0.1–0.3xPN, QN,
SN
46 P3T/EN/M/30-208A

Specification range
Minimum demand — ■ ■ ±1 % for range

values over the 0.3–1.5xPN, QN,
last 31 days and SN
12 months: active,
reactive power ±3 % for range
0.1–0.3xPN, QN,
SN
Max. and min. ■ ■ ■ 0.025–50 x IN I ≤ 1.5 x IN: ±0.5 %

values: currents of value or ±15 mA
I > 1.5 x IN ±3 % of
value
Max. and min. — ■ ■ 0.005–1.7 x UN ±0.5 % or ±0.3 V

values: voltages
Max. and min. ■ ■ ■ 16 Hz-75 Hz ±10 mHz

values: frequency
Max. and min. — ■ ■ ±0.1–1.5 x PN, QN, ±1 % for range

values: active, SN 0.3–1.5xPN, QN,
reactive, apparent SN
power and power
factor ±3 % for range
0.1–0.3xPN, QN,
SN
±2° or ±0.02 for PF

> 0.5
Harmonic values ■ ■ ■ 2nd–15th

of phase current
and THD
Harmonic values — ■ ■ 2nd–15th

of voltage and
THD
Voltage sags and — ■ ■ 0.005–1.7 x UN ±2° or ±0.02 for PF

swells > 0.5
15) The RMS voltage measurement is dependent on the voltage scaling mode.
NOTE: The measurement display's refresh rate is 0.2 s.
Refer to the following table for the right Modbus address to retrieve measurement
values under voltage measurement modes.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 47
Table 18 - Modbus measurement register list
Mod RMS UL1 UL2 UL3 U12 U23 Uo Uo UL1y U12y UL1 U12 UL1z U12z
bus volta RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS y(LN y(LL RMS RMS
regis ge +Uo/ +Uo/
ter mea 6250 6251 6252 6253 6254 6255 6256 6257 6258 y/z) y/z) 6261 6262
n RMS RMS
3045 6259 6260
Meas
urem
ent
mode
2LL ■ — — — ■ ■ — ■ — — — — — —
+Uo
3LN ■ ■ ■ ■ — — — — — — — — — —
3LN/L ■ ■ ■ ■ — — — — ■ — — — — —
Ny
3LN/L ■ ■ ■ ■ — — — — — ■ — — — —
Ly
2LL ■ — — — ■ ■ — ■ ■ — — — — —
+Uo/L
Ny
2LL ■ — — — ■ ■ — ■ — ■ — — — —
+Uo/L
Ly
3LN ■ ■ ■ ■ — — ■ — — — — — — —
+Uo
LL — — — — ■ — — ■ — — — ■ — ■
+Uo/y
/z
LN — ■ — — — — — ■ — — ■ — ■ —
+Uo/y
/z
4.1 Primary, secondary and per unit scaling

Many measurement values are shown as primary values although the device is
connected to secondary signals. Some measurement values are shown as
relative values – per unit or percent. Almost all start setting values use relative
scaling.
The scaling is done using the rated values of VTs and CTs depending on the
selected model order option.
48 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Scaling settings
The scaling settings define the characteristics of measurement transformers

connected to the PowerLogic P3 protection device and determine the correct
adaptation and performance of the metering and protection functions. They are
accessed via:
• eSetup Easergy Pro or the web HMI in the General > Scaling view
• on local panel in the CT-VT view of the General menu
Table 19 - Phase current and earth fault overcurrent scaling parameters
Parameter Description
CT' primary Primary current value of the CT at the I’L (low-voltage) side (only
P3x32 devices).
In eSetup Easergy Pro, this parameter is CT primary (2).
CT' secondary Secondary current value of the CT at the I’L (low-voltage) side
(only P3x32 devices).
In eSetup Easergy Pro, this parameter is CT secondary (2).
Nominal input (IL Rated value of the phase current input. The given thermal
side) withstand, burden and impedance are based on this value.
See Table 166 for details.
Nominal input (I'L Rated value of the phase current input at I' side. The given
side) thermal withstand, burden and impedance are based on this
value (only P3x32 devices). See Table 166 for details.
CT primary Primary current value of the IL (high-voltage) current transformer
CT secondary Secondary current value of the IL (high-voltage) current

transformer
I01 CT primary Primary current value of the earth fault I01 overcurrent transformer
I01 CT secondary Secondary current value of the earth fault I01 overcurrent
transformer
Nominal I01 input Selectable nominal input rating for the earth fault overcurrent
input. Select either 5A or 1A depending on which Io input is used.
The given thermal withstand, burden and impedance are based
on this value.
See Table 166 for details.
I02 CT secondary Secondary current value of the I02 overcurrent transformer
input. Select either 1A or 0.2A depending on which Io input is
used. The given thermal withstand, burden and impedance are
based on this value. See Table 166 for details.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 49
I03 CT secondary Secondary current value of the earth fault I03 overcurrent
transformer
VT primary Primary voltage value of the voltage transformer
input. Select either 1A or 0.2A depending on which Io input is
used. The given thermal withstand, burden and impedance are
based on this value. See Table 166 for details.
VT secondary Secondary voltage value of the voltage transformer
VT0 secondary Secondary voltage value of the neutral voltage displacement

voltage transformer
Voltage Indicates at which side of the protected object the voltage

measurement side transformers are located.
Voltage The device can be connected either to zero-sequence voltage,

measurement mode line-to-line voltage or line-to-neutral voltage. Set the voltage
measurement mode according to the type of connection used.
Frequency adaptation Parameter used to set the system frequency. There are three
mode modes available: manual, auto and fixed. For more information,
see 4.1.1 Frequency adaptation mode.
Adapted frequency When the frequency adaption mode is set to manual, you can set
the frequency in the Adapted frequency field, and it is not be
updated even if the measured frequency is different.
Angle memory Time setting for the directional overcurrent stage to keep the
duration phase angle fixed if the system voltage collapses
I' 180 deg. angle turn A setting to turn I' currents 180 degrees (only P3x32 devices)
Power direction Direction of the power flow:

• “Outgoing” retains all the operation as it is in the existing
PowerLogic P3 platform.
• “Incoming” changes the sign of real and reactive power by
multiplying the said quantities by -1.
Transformer nominal Nominal power of the transformer

power
IL side nominal Nominal power system voltage at the IL side

voltage
I'L side nominal Nominal power system voltage at I’L side

voltage
Connection group Connection group of the power transformer
Io compensation Zero-current compensation on the I’L side. If the transformer is

earthed on the IL side, this must be set.
50 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
I'o compensation Zero-current compensation on the I’L side. If the transformer is

earthed on the IL side, this must be set.
Residual value Choose to show primary or per unit value of residual currents and
scaling voltages.
The scaling equations presented in 4.1.2 Current scaling and 4.1.3 Voltage
scaling for analog module E, F are useful when doing secondary testing.
4.1.1 Frequency adaptation mode
You can set the system frequency in General > Scaling in eSetup Easergy Pro.
There are three frequency adaptation modes available:
• Manual: When the adaption mode is set to manual, you can set the frequency
in the Adapted frequency field, and it will not be updated even if the
measured frequency is different. However, the relay monitors the system
frequency internally and adapts to the new frequency even if the frequency
has been set manually.
• Auto: The network frequency is automatically updated when the relay has
measured the voltage for approximately 45 seconds. The Adapted frequency
field is updated even if it has been set previously. The frequency is measured
from the voltage signals.
Table 20 - Voltage signals
Voltage measurement Voltage Voltage channel

mode
2LL+U0, 2LL+U0/LNy, 2LL U12, U23 U1, U2

+U0/LLy
3LN, 3LN+U0, 3LN/LNy, UL1, UL2 U1, U2

3LN/LLy
LN+U0/y/z UL1 U1
LL+U0/y/z U12 U1
• Fixed: The frequency is not updated based on the measured voltage and only
the set value is used. This mode is recommended to be used for the line-
differential function.
Frequency is not measured under the following two conditions:
• The maximum secondary value of three phase to phase or phase to neutral

voltage is less than 5.5 V.
• For the P3U20 device only, the maximum secondary value of three phase
current is less than 0.625 A.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 51
4.1.2 Current scaling
NOTE: The rated value of the relay's current input, for example 5 A or 1 A,
does not have any effect on the scaling equations, but it defines the
measurement range and the maximum allowed continuous current. See Table
166 for details.
Table 21 - Primary and secondary scaling
Current (CT)
Residual current calculated
secondary → primary CTPRI

I PRI = I SEC ⋅
CTSEC
primary → secondary
CTSEC
I SEC = I PRI ⋅
CTPRI
For earth fault overcurrent to input I0, use the corresponding CTPRI and CTSEC
values. For earth fault stages using I0 Calc signals, use the phase current CT
values for CTPRI and CTSEC.
Examples
1. Secondary to primary
CT = 500 / 5
Current to the relay's input is 4 A.
=> Primary current is IPRI = 4 x 500 / 5 = 400 A
2. Primary to secondary
CT = 500 / 5
The relay displays IPRI = 400 A
=> Injected current is ISEC = 400 x 5 / 500 = 4 A
Per unit [pu] scaling
For phase currents excluding ArcI>stage:
1 pu = 1 x IN = 100%, where IN is the rated current of the transformer.
The rated current for high-voltage side (HV) and low-voltages side (LV) are
calculated by the relay itself using Equation 1.
Equation 1
SN
IN =
3 ⋅U N
IN = The rated current 1 pu.
SN = Rated apparent power of the protected object
52 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
UN = Rated line-to-line voltage of the protected object
For earth fault overcurrents and ArcI> stage:
1 pu = 1 x CTSEC for secondary side and 1 pu = 1 x CTPRI for primary side.
Phase current scaling Earth fault overcurrent

excluding ArcI> stage (3I0) scaling and phase
current scaling for
ArcI> stage
secondary → per unit I SEC ⋅ CTPRI I SEC

I PU = I PU =
CTSEC ⋅ I N CTSEC
per unit → secondary

I SEC = I PU ⋅ CTSEC ⋅
IN I SEC = I PU ⋅ CTSEC
CTPRI
Examples
1. Secondary to per unit for ArcI>

CT = 750 / 5
Current injected to the relay's inputs is 7 A.
Per unit current is IPU = 7 / 5 = 1.4 pu = 140%
2. Secondary to per unit for phase currents excluding ArcI>
CT = 750/5
IN = 525 A
Current injected to the relay's inputs is 7 A.
Per unit current is IPU = 7 x 750 / (5 x 525) = 2.00 pu = 2.00 x IN = 200%
Per unit current is IPU = 7 x 750 / (5 x 525) = 2.00 pu = 2.00 x ITN= 200%
3. Per unit to secondary for ArcI>
CT = 750 / 5
The relay setting is 2 pu = 200%.
Secondary current is ISEC = 2 x 5 = 10 A
4. Per unit to secondary for phase currents
CT = 750 / 5
IN = 525 A
The relay setting is 2 x IN = 2 pu = 200%.
The relay setting is 2 x ITN = 2 pu = 200%.
Secondary current is ISEC = 2 x 5 x 525 / 750 = 7 A
5. Secondary to per unit for earth fault overcurrent
Input is I01.
CT0 = 50 / 1
Current injected to the relay's input is 30 mA.
Per unit current is IPU = 0.03 / 1 = 0.03 pu = 3%
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 53
Input is I01.
CT0 = 50 / 1
The relay setting is 0.03 pu = 3%.
Secondary current is ISEC = 0.03 x 1 = 30 mA
Input is I0 Calc.
CT = 750 / 5
Currents injected to the relay's IL1 input is 0.5 A.
IL2 = IL3 = 0.
Per unit current is IPU = 0.5 / 5 = 0.1 pu = 10%
Input is I0 Calc.
CT = 750 / 5
The relay setting is 0.1 pu = 10%.
If IL2 = IL3 = 0, then secondary current to IL1 is ISEC = 0.1 x 5 = 0.5 A
4.1.3 Voltage scaling for analog module E, F
NOTE: Voltage transformer scaling is based on the line-to-line voltages in all

voltage measurements modes.
Table 22 - Primary/secondary scaling of line-to-line voltages
Line-to-line voltage Line-to-neutral voltage

measurement (LL) with measurement (LN) with
VT VT
secondary → primary VTPRI VTPRI

U PRI = U SEC ⋅ U PRI = 3 ⋅ U SEC ⋅
VTSEC VTSEC
primary → secondary VTSEC U PRI VTSEC

U SEC = U PRI ⋅ U SEC = ⋅
VTPRI 3 VTPRI
Examples
1. Secondary to primary. Voltage measurement mode is "2LL+U0"
VT = 12000/110
Voltage connected to the relay's input UA or UB is 100 V.
=> Primary voltage is UPRI = 100x12000/110 = 10909 V.
2. Secondary to primary. Voltage measurement mode is "3LN
VT = 12000/110
Three phase symmetric voltages connected to the relay's inputs UA, UB
and UC are 57.7 V.
=> Primary voltage is UPRI = √3 x58x12000/110 = 10902 V
3. Primary to secondary. Voltage measurement mode is "2LL+U0"
54 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
VT = 12000/110
The relay displays UPRI = 10910 V.
=> Secondary voltage is USEC = 10910x110/12000 = 100 V
4. Primary to secondary. Voltage measurement mode is "3LN
VT = 12000/110
The relay displays U12 = U23 = U31 = 10910 V.
=> Symmetric secondary voltages at UA, UB and UC are USEC = 10910/√3
x110/12000 = 57.7 V.
Per unit [pu] scaling of line-to-line voltages
One per unit = 1 pu = 1 x UN = 100%, where UN = rated voltage of the VT.
Line-to-line voltage scaling
Voltage measurement Voltage measurement

mode = "2LL+U0", "1LL mode = "3LN"
+U0/LLy", "2LL/LLy",
"LL/LLy/LLz"
secondary → per unit U SEC VTPRI U SEC VTPRI

U PU = ⋅ U PU = 3 ⋅ ⋅
VTSEC U N VTSEC U N
per unit → secondary UN VT U

U SEC = U PU ⋅ VTSEC ⋅ U SEC = U PU ⋅ SEC ⋅ N
VTPRI 3 VT PRI
Examples
1. Secondary to per unit. Voltage measurement mode is "2LL+U0".
VT = 12000/110
Voltage connected to the relay's input UA or UB is 110 V.
=> Per unit voltage is UPU = 110/110 = 1.00 pu = 1.00 x UN = 100%
2. Secondary to per unit. Voltage measurement mode is "3LN".
VT = 12000/110
Three symmetric phase-to-neutral voltages connected to the relay's inputs
UA, UB and UC are 63.5 V
=> Per unit voltage is UPU = √3 x63.5/110x12000/11000 = 1.00 pu = 1.00 x
UN = 100%
3. Per unit to secondary. Voltage measurement mode is "2LL+U0".
VT = 12000/110
The relay displays 1.00 pu = 100%.
=> Secondary voltage is USEC = 1.00 x 110 x 11000/12000 = 100.8 V
4. Per unit to secondary. Voltage measurement mode is "3LN".
VT = 12000/110
UN = 11000 V
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 55
The relay displays 1.00 pu = 100%.

=> Three symmetric phase-to-neutral voltages connected to the relay 's
inputs UA,UB and UC are USEC = 1.00 x 110/√3 x 11000/12000 = 58.2 V
Per unit [pu] scaling of neutral displacement voltage
Neutral displacement voltage (U0) scaling

mode = "2LL+U0", "1LL mode = "3LN"
+U0/LLy"
secondary → per unit U SEC U a +U b +U c

U PU = U PU =
1
⋅ SEC
U 0 SEC VTSEC 3
per unit →secondary U SEC = U PU ⋅ U 0 SEC U a +U b +U c

SEC
= 3 ⋅ U PU ⋅ VTSEC
Examples
1. Secondary to per unit. Voltage measurement mode is "2LL+U0".
U0SEC = 110 V (This is a configuration value corresponding to U0 at full

earth fault.)
Voltage connected to the relay's input UC is 22 V.
=> Per unit voltage is UPU = 22/110 = 0.20 pu = 20%
2. Secondary to per unit. Voltage measurement mode is "3LN".
VT = 12000/110
Voltage connected to the relay's input UA is 38.1 V, while UB = UC = 0.
=> Per unit voltage is UPU = (38.1+0+0)/(√3 x110) = 0.20 pu = 20%
3. Per unit to secondary. Voltage measurement mode is "2LL+U0".
U0SEC = 110 V (This is a configuration value corresponding to U0 at full

earth fault.)
The relay displays U0 = 20%.
=> Secondary voltage at input UC is USEC = 0.20x110 = 22 V
4. Per unit to secondary. Voltage measurement mode is "3LN".
VT = 12000/110
The relay displays U0 = 20%.
=> If UB = UC = 0, then secondary voltages at UA is USEC = √3 x0.2x110 =
38.1 V
4.1.4 Residual value scaling
“Residual value scaling” setting allows users to choose to show primary or per
unit value of residual currents and voltages. The conversion is based on primary
and secondary nominal value of CT and PT.
56 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
The user can see the changes through “measurements -> current and voltage”
and residual value relevant protection page, such as 50N/51N, 67N,67NI,59N and
50BF.
Table 23 - Scaling equations between residual pu voltage and primary voltage
Residual voltage scaling

mode with U0 mode without U0
measurement measurement
Primary → per unit U PRI VT SEC U a +U b + U c

U pu = • U PU = PRI
U 0 SEC VTPRI 3 VTPRI

•
Per unit → primary VT PRI U a +U b + U c = 3 U PU VTPRI

UPRI = UPU U0SEC
• •
• •
PRI
VT SEC
Examples
1. Primary to per unit for with U0 measurement
VT = 10000 / 100
U0SEC = 57.75 V
The relay displays U0 = 57.75 V
The per unit UPU = (57.75 * 100) / (57.75 * 10000) = 0.01 pu
2. Per unit to primary for with U0 measurement
VT = 10000 / 100
U0SEC = 57.75 V
The U0 injected to the relay is 0.01 pu.
The primary value is UPRI = 0.01 * 57.75 * 10000 / 100 = 57.75 V.
3. Primary to per unit for without U0 measurement
VT = 10000 / 100
Three symmetric phase-to-neutral voltages UA is 1747 V, while UB = UC =

0.
Per unit value is UPU = (1747 + 0 + 0)/(√3 * 10000) = 0.1 pu = 10%.
4. Per unit to primary value for without U0 measurement
VT = 10000 / 100
The relay displays U0 = 0.1 pu.
The primary value is U0PRI = √3 * 0.1 * 10000 = 1747 V.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 57
Table 24 - Scaling equations between residual pu current and primary current
Residual current scaling
Phase current scaling Calculated I0 scaling
Primary → per unit I PRI I PRI

I PU = I PU =
I MODE CTPRI
Per unit → primary I PRI = IPU IMODE

•
I PRI = IPU CTPRI
•
Examples
1. Primary to per unit for phase current scaling

Input is I0.
The relay displays IPRI = 50 A.
The IMODE = 50 A.
Per unit current is Ipu = 50 / 50 = 1 pu.
2. Per unit to primary for phase current scaling
Input is I0.
U0SEC = 57.75 V
The relay displays Ipu = 1 pu.
The IMODE = 50 A.
Primary current is IPRI = 1 * 50 = 400 A.
3. Primary to per unit for calculated I0 scaling
Input is I0Calc
CT = 750 / 5.
Current IL1 is 75 A.
IL2 = IL3 = 0
Per unit current is IPU = 75 / 750 = 0.1 pu = 10%.
4. Per unit to primary for calculated I0 scaling
Input is I0Calc .
CT = 750 / 5
Current injected to the relay’s inputs is 0.1 pu.
Primary current is IPRI = 0.1 * 750 = 75 A.
4.2 Measurements for protection functions

The relay uses root mean square (RMS) measurement for the protection stages if
not stated otherwise in the protection stage description.
58 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 7 - Example of various current values of a transformer inrush current
Load = 0%
100
rms f2/f1 (%)

5 f1 50
Relative 2nd harmoic f2/f1 (%)

Current (PU)
f2
0 0
-5
IL2
-10
0.00 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30

Time (s)
All the direct measurements are based on fundamental frequency values. The
exceptions are frequency and instantaneous current for arc protection. Most
protection functions are also based on the fundamental frequency values.
Figure 7 shows a current waveform and the corresponding fundamental

frequency component f1, second harmonic f2, and RMS value in a special case
where the current deviates significantly from a pure sine wave.
4.3 Measurements for arc flash detection function

The three-phase current measurement and ground fault current measurement for
arc flash detection are done with electronics. The electronics compares the
current levels to the start settings - THRESHOLDs - and gives a binary signals
“I>” or “I01>” to the arc flash detection function if limit is exceeded. All the
frequency components of the currents are taken into account.
Signals “I>” or “I0>” are connected to an FPGA chip which implements the arc
flash detection function. The start settings are named “I> int” and “I01> int” in the
local LCD panel or eSetup Easergy Pro views, these settings are used to set the
THRESHOLD levels for the electronics.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 59
Figure 8 - Measurement logic for the arc flash detection function

3xI
f
6xI + 3Io + 4U A/D

3xI
Io
3xI
B
Io
A Io>> I>>
FPGA
A. Threshold C. Conf. memory

B. Comp. D. CPU
4.4 RMS values

RMS currents
The relay calculates the RMS value of each phase current. The minimum and
maximum RMS values are recorded and stored (see 4.7 Minimum and maximum
values).
I RMS = I f 1 + I f 2 + ... + I f 15
2 2 2
RMS voltages
The relay calculates the RMS value of each voltage input. The minimum and the
maximum of RMS values are recorded and stored (see 4.7 Minimum and
maximum values).
U RMS = U f 1 + U f 2 + ... + U f 15
2 2 2
4.5 Harmonics and total harmonic distortion (THD)

The relay calculates the the total harmonic distortions (THDs) as a percentage of
the currents and voltages values measured at the fundamental frequency. The
60 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
relay calculates the harmonics from the 2nd to the 15th of phase currents and
voltages. (The 17th harmonic component is also shown partly in the value of the
15th harmonic component. This is due to the nature of digital sampling.)
The harmonic distortion is calculated:
Equation 2
15
∑f
i =2
i
2
THD =
h1
f1 = Fundamental value
f2– 15 = Harmonics
Example
f1 = 100 A, f3 = 10 A, f7 = 3 A, f11 = 8 A
10 2 + 3 2 + 8 2
THD = = 13.2%
100
For reference, the RMS value is:
RMS = 100 2 + 10 2 + 3 2 + 8 2 = 100.9 A

Another way to calculate the THD is to use the RMS value as reference instead of
the fundamental frequency value. In the example above, the result would then be
13.0 %.
4.6 Demand values

The device calculates average i.e. demand values of phase currents IL1, IL2, IL3
and power values S, P and Q.
The demand time is configurable from 10 to 60 minutes with the parameter

"Demand time".
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 61
Figure 9 - Demand values
Table 25 - Demand value parameters
Parameter Value Unit Description Set16)
Time 10 – 30 min Demand time (averaging time) Set
Fundamental frequency values
IL1da A Demand of phase current IL1
Pda kW Demand of active power P
PFda Demand of power factor PF
Qda kvar Demand of reactive power Q
Sda kVA Demand of apparent power S
RMS values
IL1RMSda A Demand of RMS phase current IL1
Prmsda kW Demand of RMS active power P
Qrmsda kvar Demand of RMS reactive power Q
Srmsda kVA Demand of RMS apparent power S

16) Set = An editable parameter (password needed)
62 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
4.7 Minimum and maximum values

Minimum and maximum values are registered with time stamps since the latest
manual clearing or since the relay has been restarted. The available registered
values are listed in Table 26.
Figure 10 - Minimum and maximum values
Table 26 - Minimum and maximum measurement values
Min & Max measurement Description
IL1, IL2, IL3 Phase current, fundamental frequency

value
IL1 RMS, IL2 RMS, IL3 RMS Phase current, RMS value
I01, I02 Earth fault overcurrent, fundamental value
UA, UB, UC, UD Voltages, fundamental frequency values
UARMS, UBRMS, UCRMS, UDRMS Line-to-neutral voltages, RMS value
U0 Neutral voltage displacement, fundamental

value
f Frequency
P, Q, S Active, reactive, apparent power
IL1da, IL2da, ILda3 Demand values of phase currents
IL1da, IL2da, IL3da (rmsvalue) Demand values of phase currents, rms

values
P.F. Power factor
The clearing parameter "ClrMax" is common for all these values.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 63
Table 27 - Parameters
Parameter Value Description Set17)
ClrMax -; Clear Reset all minimum Set

and maximum
values
17) Set = An editable parameter (password needed).
4.8 Maximum values of the last 31 days and 12 months

The maximum and minimum values of the last 31 days and the last 12 months
are stored in the relay's non-volatile memory. You can view them in the Logs >
Month max setting view in eSetup Easergy Pro.
NOTE: The saving process starts every 30 minutes and it takes a while. If the
relay's auxiliary supply power is switched off before all values have been
saved, the old values remain for the unsaved ones.
Corresponding time stamps are stored for the last 31 days. The registered values
are listed in Table 28.
Figure 11 - Maximum and minimum values of the past 31 days
64 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 12 - Maximum and minimum values of the past 12 months
Table 28 - Maximum registered values of the last 31 days and 12 months
12 Max Min Descriptio 31 12

months n days months
Measur
ement
IL1, IL2, IL3 X Phase

current
(fundamental
frequency
value)
I01, I02 X Earth fault

overcurrent
S X Apparent X X
power
P X X Active power X X
Q X X Reactive X X
power
The timebase can be a value from one cycle to one minute. Also a demand value
can be used as the timebase and its value can be set between 10 and 60
minutes. The demand value menu is located under the Measurements view.
Table 29 - Parameters of the day and month registers
Timebase Parameter to select Set

the type of the
registered values
20 ms Collect min & max of

one cycle values19)
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 65
200 ms Collect min & max of

200 ms average
values
1s Collect min & max of

1 s average values
1 min Collect min & max of

1 minute average
values
demand Collect min & max of

demand values (4.6
Demand values)
ResetDays Reset the 31 day Set

registers
ResetMon Reset the 12 month Set

registers
19) This is the fundamental frequency RMS value of one cycle updated every 20 ms.
4.9 Memory management of measurements

Table 30 - Memory management of measured and recorded values
Measurement Online Non- Non-

volatile20) volatile21)
RMS phase current x
RMS earth fault overcurrent x
RMS line-to-line voltage x
RMS phase-to-neutral voltage x
RMS active power x
RMS reactive power x
RMS apparent power x
Frequency x
Fundamental frequency current x

values
Fundamental frequency voltage x

values
Fundamental frequency active, x

reactive and apparent power
values
66 P3T/EN/M/30-208A

Fundamental frequency active x

power values
Fundamental frequency reactive x

power values
Power factor x
Active energy x
Reactive energy x
Energy transmitted with pulse x

outputs
Demand values: phase currents x
Active power demand x
Reactive power demand x
Apparent power demand x
Power factor demand x
Min. and max. demand values: x

phase currents

RMS phase currents

active, reactive, apparent power
and power factor
Max. demand values over the last x

31 days and 12 months: active,
Min. demand values over the last x

31 days and 12 months: active,
reactive power
Max. and min. values: currents x
Max. and min. values: voltages x
Max. and min. values: frequency x
Max. and min. values: active, x

reactive, apparent power and
power factor
Harmonic values of phase current x

and THD
Harmonic values of voltage and x

THD
Voltage sags and swells x
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 67

Engine running counter x
Events x
Disturbance record x
Protection stage fault values and x

events
20) Capacitor-backed-up for 5-10 days
21) FLASH
4.10 Power and current direction

Figure 13 shows the concept of three-phase current direction and sign of cosφ
and power factor PF (the absolute value is equal to cosφ, but the sign is 'IND' for
inductive i.e. lagging current and 'CAP' for capacitive i.e. leading current). Figure
14 shows the same concepts on a PQ power plane.
Figure 13 - Quadrants of voltage/current phasor plane
+90°
II I
ind +cap
cos = cos = +
PF = + PF =
V REF 0°
III I IV
cap +ind
cos = cos = +
PF = PF = +
I: Forward capacitive power, current is leading
II: Reverse inductive power, current is leading
III: Reverse capacitive power, current is lagging
IV: Forward inductive power, current is lagging
Figure 14 - Quadrants of power plane
Q
+90°
II cap +ind I
cos = cos = +
PF = PF = +
S
P 0°
III IV
ind +cap
cos = cos = +
PF = + PF =
68 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
I: Forward inductive power, current is lagging
II: Reverse capacitive power, current is lagging
III: Reverse inductive power, current is leading
IV: Forward capacitive power, current is leading
Table 31 - Power quadrants
Power Current Power cosφ Power factor

quadrant related to direction PF
voltage
+ inductive Lagging Forward + +
+ capacitive Leading Forward + -
- inductive Leading Reverse - +
- capacitive Lagging Reverse - -
4.11 Symmetrical components

In a three-phase system, the voltage or current phasors may be divided into
symmetrical components.
• Positive sequence 1
• Negative sequence 2
• Zero sequence 0
Symmetrical components are calculated according to the following equations:
S 0  1 1 1   S A
 S  = 1 1 a a   S B
2
 1 3
 S 2  1 a 2 a   S C
S 0 = zero sequence component
S 1 = positive sequence component
S 2 = negative sequence component
1 3
a = 1∠120° = − + j
2 2
, a phase rotating constant
SA = phasor of phase L1 (phase current or voltage)

SB = phasor of phase L2
SC = phasor of phase L3
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 69
Transformer protection relay 5 Control functions
5 Control functions
5.1 Digital outputs

The digital outputs are also called controlling outputs, signaling outputs and self-
supervision outputs. Trip contacts can be controlled by using the relay output
matrix or logic functions. Also forced control is possible. To use forced control,
you must enable it in the Device/Test > Relays setting view.
The digital outputs can be set to normal or reverse position with eSetup Easergy
Pro and Web HMI by selecting "NO" or "NC" in the Relays Polarity view of
Device/Test menu. As the relay polarity parameter is set to “NC”, the relay
position will be set reverse.
Any internal signal can be connected to the digital outputs in the Matrix > Arc
matrix - output setting views.
The Output matrix and Relays setting views represent the state (de-energized /
energized) of the digital output's coil. For example, a bright green vertical line in
the Output matrix and a logical "1" in the Relays view represent the energized
state of the coil. The same principle applies for both NO and NC type digital
outputs. The actual position (open / closed) of the digital outputs' contacts in coil's
de-energized and energized state depends on the type (NO / NC) of the digital
outputs. De-energized state of the coil corresponds to the normal state of the
contacts. A digital output can be configured as latched or non-latched. 5.5
Releasing latches describes releasing latches procedure.
The difference between trip contacts and signal contacts is the DC breaking
capacity. The contacts are single pole single throw (SPST) normal open (NO)
type, except signal relay A1 which has a changeover contact single pole double
throw (SPDT).
In addition to this, the relay has so called heavy duty outputs available in the
power supply modules C and D. For more details, see Table 166.
Programming matrix
1. Connected (single bullet)
2. Connected and latched (single bullet rounded with another circle)
3. Not connected (line crossing is empty)
Trip contacts can be connected to protection stages or other similar purpose in

the Output matrix setting view.
70 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
5 Control functions Transformer protection relay
Figure 15 - Output matrix view
Figure 16 - Trip contacts assigned directly to outputs of logical operators
NOTE: Logic outputs are assigned automatically in the output matrix as well
when logic is built.
Trip contact status can be viewed and forced to operate in the Relays setting
view. Logical "0" means that the output is not energized and logical "1" states that
the output is set active.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 71
Figure 17 - Relays view
Enable NO / NC outputs in the Polarity setting view for the signals shown.
Figure 18 - Polarity view
Default numbering of DI / DO
Every option card and slot has default numbering. Below is an example of model
P3x30 CGGII-AAEAA-BA showing the default numbering of digital outputs.
You can see the default digital output numbering and change the numbering of
the following option cards in the Inputs/Outputs > Relay config setting view: slot
2, 3, 4, 5: G, I.
72 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 19 - Default numbering of digital outputs for model P3x30-CGGII-AAEAA-

BA
C: T1, T9–12, A1, SF I: –

G: T13-16 I: –
G: T17-20
Power supply card outputs are not visible in the Relay config setting view.
Figure 20 - Relay config setting view
Table 32 - Parameters of digital outputs
Parameter Value Unit Description Note
T1 – Tx the available 0 Status of trip controlling output F22)

parameter list
1
depends on the
number and type of
the I/O cards.
A1 0 Status of alarm signalling output F
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 73
SF 0 Status of the SF relay F
1 In eSetup Easergy Pro, it is

called "Service status output"
Force On Force flag for digital output Set23)

forcing for test purposes
Off
Names for output relays (editable with eSetup Easergy Pro only)
Description String of Names for DO on eSetup Set

max. 32 Easergy Pro screens. Default is
characte
"Trip relay n", n=1 – x or
rs
"Signal relay n", n=1
22) F = Editable when force flag is on
5.2 Digital inputs

Digital inputs are available for control purposes. The number of available inputs
depends on the number and type of option cards.
The polarity normal open (NO) / normal closed (NC) and a delay can be
configured according to the application by using the front panel or eSetup
Easergy Pro.
Digital inputs can be used in many operations. The status of the input can be
checked in the Output matrix and Digital inputs setting views. The digital inputs
make it possible to change group, block/enable/disable functions, to program
logics, indicate object status, etc.
The digital inputs require an external control voltage (ac or dc). The digital inputs
are activated after the activation voltage is exceeded. Deactivation follows when
the voltage drops below threshold limit. The activation voltage level of digital
inputs can be selected in the order code when such option cards are equipped.
Digital inputs can be connected, latched or unlatched to trip contacts or other

similar purpose in Output matrix setting view.
74 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 21 - Output matrix view
Digital inputs can be assigned, latched or unlatched directly to inputs/outputs of

logical operators.
Figure 22 - Digital inputs assigned to outputs of logical operators
Digital inputs can be viewed, named and changed between NO/NC in the Digital
inputs and Names for digital inputs setting views.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 75
Figure 23 - Names for digital inputs view
Figure 24 - Digital inputs view
If inputs are energized by using ac voltage, “mode” has to be selected as ac.
76 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
All essential information on digital inputs can be found in the same location in the
Digital inputs setting view. DI on/off events and alarm display (pop-up) can be
enabled and disabled in Digital inputs setting view. Individual operation counters
are located in the same view as well.
Label and description texts can be edited with eSetup Easergy Pro according to
the demand. Labels are the short parameter names used on the local panel and
descriptions are the longer names used by eSetup Easergy Pro.
The digital input activation thresholds are hardware-selectable.
Digital input delay determines the activation and de-activation delay for the input.
Figure 25shows how the digital input behaves when the delay is set to 1 second.
Figure 25 - Digital input’s behavior when delay is set to 1 second

1 s. 1 s.
1
VOLTAGE
0
1
DIGITAL INPUT
0
Table 33 - Parameters of digital inputs
Mode dc, ac Used voltage of Set24)

digital inputs
Input DI1 – DIx Number of

digital input. The
available
parameter list
depends on the
number and
type of the I/O
cards.
Slot 2–6 Card slot

number where
option card is
installed.
State 0, 1 Status of digital

input 1 – digital
input x.
Polarity NO For normal open Set

contacts (NO).
NC
Active edge is 0
>1
For normal
closed contacts
(NC)
Active edge is 1
>0
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 77
Delay 0.00 – 60.00 s Definite delay Set

for both on and
off transitions
On event On Active edge Set

event enabled
Off Active edge

event disabled
Off event On Inactive edge Set

event enabled
Off Inactive edge

event disabled
Alarm display no No pop-up Set

display
yes Alarm pop-up

display is
activated at
active DI edge
Counters 0 – 65535 Cumulative (Set)

active edge
counter
NAMES for DIGITAL INPUTS (editable with eSetup Easergy Pro only)
Label String of max. Short name for Set

10 characters DIs on the local
display
Default is "DI1 –
DIx". x is the
maximum
number of the
digital input.
Description String of max. Long name for Set

32 characters DIs. Default is
"Digital input 1 –
Digital input x".
x is the
maximum
number of the
digital input.
Every option card and slot has default numbering. After making any changes to
the numbering, read the settings from the relay after the relay has rebooted.
78 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Below is an example of model P3x30-CGGII-AAEAA-BAAAA showing default

numbering of DI.
You can see the default digital input numbering and change the numbering of the
following option cards in the Inputs/Outputs > Digital inputs setting view: slot 2,
3, 4, 5: G, I.
Figure 26 - Default numbering of digital inputs for model P3x30-CGGII-AAEAA-

BA
C: -
G: DI1–6
G: DI7–12
I: DI13–22
I: DI23–32
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 79
Figure 27 - Digital inputs setting view
5.3 Virtual inputs and outputs

There are virtual inputs and virtual outputs that can in many places be used like
their hardware equivalents except that they are located in the memory of the
relay. The virtual inputs act like normal digital inputs. The status of the virtual input
can be changed via the local display, communication bus and eSetup Easergy
Pro. For example setting groups can be changed using virtual inputs.
Virtual inputs can be used in many operations. The status of the input can be
checked in the Matrix > Output matrix and Control > Virtual inputs setting
views. The status is also visible on local mimic display, if so selected. Virtual
inputs can be selected to be operated with the function buttons F1 and F2, the
local mimic or simply by using the virtual input menu. Virtual inputs have similar
functions as digital inputs: they enable changing groups, block/enable/disable
functions, to program logics and other similar to digital inputs.
The activation and reset delay of the input is approximately 5 ms.
Table 34 - Virtual inputs and outputs

Number of inputs 20
Number of outputs 20
Activation time / Reset time < 5 ms
Virtual inputs and outputs can be used for many purposes in the Output matrix
setting view.
80 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 28 - Virtual inputs and outputs in Output matrix view
Virtual inputs and outputs can be assigned, latched or unlatched, directly to

inputs/outputs of logical operators.
Figure 29 - Virtual inputs and outputs assigned to outputs of logical operators
Virtual inputs
The virtual inputs can be viewed, named and controlled in the Control > Virtual
inputs setting view.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 81
Figure 30 - Configurable virtual inputs and non-configurable virtual inputs
82 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 31 - Names for virtual inputs view
Table 35 - Parameters of virtual inputs
VI1-VI20 0 Status of virtual

input
1
Events On Event enabling Set
Off
Names for virtual inputs (editable with eSetup Easergy Pro only)
Label String of max. Short name for Set

10 characters VIs on the local
display
Default is "VIn",
n = 1–20
Description String of max. Long name for Set

32 characters VIs. Default is
"Virtual input n",
n = 1–20
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 83
Virtual input pulse time operation
VI1 to VI10 are configurable virtual inputs. They can operate on pulse mode,
which is achieved by a settable VI pulse length. When the VI pulse length is set to
"0 = infinite", it keeps actual operation; and with any setting >0 s, the VI state gets
automatically reset to 0 (low/ inactive), once the pulse timer expires.
Figure 32 - Layout of VI pulse time
NOTE: The configurable VIs state is cleared once the power supply is lost
when the timer is still counting down.
Table 36 - Characteristics of virtual inputs pulse length
Input Pulse length
Setting range 0.0-600.0 s
Inaccuracy Pulse length <100 ms
Configurable VI number 10
Virtual outputs
In eSetup Easergy Pro, the Virtual outputs setting view is located under Control.
84 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 33 - Virtual outputs view
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 85
Figure 34 - Names for virtual outputs view
Table 37 - Parameters of virtual outputs
0 Status of virtual output F

VO1-VO20
1
Events On Event enabling Set
Off
NAMES for VIRTUAL OUTPUTS (editable with eSetup Easergy Pro only)
Label String of Short name for VOs on the local Set

max. 10 display
characte
rs Default is "VOn", n=1-20
Description String of Long name for VOs. Default is Set

max. 32
characte "Virtual output n", n=1-20
rs
26) Set = An editable parameter (password needed). F = Editable when force flag is on.
86 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
5.4 Matrix
The relay has several matrices that are used for configuring the relay:
• Output matrix used to link protection stage signals, digital inputs, virtual
inputs, function buttons, object control, logic output, relay's internal alarms,
GOOSE signals and release latch signals to outputs, disturbance recorder trig
input and virtual outputs
• Block matrix used to block protection stages
• LED matrix used to control LEDs on the front panel
• Object block matrix used to inhibit object control
• Auto-recloser matrix used to control auto-recloser
• Arc matrix used to control current and light signals to arc stages and arc
stages to the high-speed outputs
Figure 35 - Blocking matrix and output matrix

Protection stages
Directly
measured Block matrix Output matrix User’s logic
I values n
n START
TRIP I
V Calculate START N
n TRIP P
S, P, Q, U
START
cosφ, tanφ, n TRIP T
BLOCK
symmetric S
INPUT
components BLOCK
etc. INPUT
BLOCK
INPUT OUTPUTS
Virtual
inputs
Digital n
inputs
n Output relays Virtual
optional
DI delay and indicators outputs
n
and
inversion n
Output contacts
NOTE: Blocking matrix can not be used to block the arc flash detection
stages.
5.4.1 Output matrix
With the output matrix, the output signals of the various protection stages, digital
inputs, logic outputs and other internal signals can be connected to the digital
outputs, virtual outputs and so on.
NOTE: For configuring the high-speed operations of the arc flash detection,
use the Arc matrix – output view. The configuration also becomes visible in
the output matrix. The output matrix shows the status of the FPGA-driven
outputs whereas the other electro-mechnical outputs can also be configured
in the output matrix.
There are general-purpose LED indicators – "A", "B", "C" to ”N” – available for
customer-specific indications on the front panel. Their usage is to define in a
separate LED matrix.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 87
There are two LED indicators specified for keys F1 and F2. The triggering of the
disturbance recorder (DR) and virtual outputs are configurable in the output
matrix.
A digital output or indicator LED can be configured as latched or non-latched. A

non-latched relay follows the controlling signal. A latched relay remains activated
although the controlling signal releases.
There is a common "release all latches" signal to release all the latched relays.
This release signal resets all the latched digital outputs and indicators. The reset
signal can be given via a digital input, via front panel or remotely through
communication. For instructions on how to release latches, see 5.5 Releasing
latches.
Trip and alarm relays together with virtual outputs can be assigned in the output
matrix. Also automatic triggering of disturbance recorder is done in the output
matrix.
Figure 36 - Output matrix example view
5.4.2 Blocking matrix
By means of a blocking matrix, the operation of any protection stage (except the
arc flash detection stages) can be blocked. The blocking signal can originate from
the digital inputs or it can be a start or trip signal from a protection stage or an
output signal from the user's programmable logic. In Figure 37, an active blocking
is indicated with a black dot (●) in the crossing point of a blocking signal and the
signal to be blocked.
All protection stages (except Arc stages) can be blocked in the block matrix
88 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 37 - Block matrix view
The Blocked status becomes visible only when the stage is about to activate.
Figure 38 - DI input blocking connection
Figure 39 - Result for the I> stage when the DI is active and the stage exceeds its
current start value
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 89
NOTICE
RISK OF NUISANCE TRIPPING
Activate the protection stages first, then store the settings in a relay. After that,
refresh the blocking matrix before configuring it.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in unwanted shutdown of

the electrical installation.
NOTE: The blocking matrix is dynamically controlled by selecting and

deselecting protection stages.
5.4.3 LED matrix
The LED matrix is used to link digital inputs, virtual inputs, function buttons,
protection stage outputs, object statuses, logic outputs, alarm signals and
GOOSE signals to various LEDs located on the front panel.
In the LED configuration setting view, each LED has three checkboxes with
which the behavior of the LED is configured.
Figure 40 - LED configuration
LEDs are assigned to control signals in the LED matrix setting view. It is not
possible to control LEDs directly with logics.
Figure 41 - LED matrix
90 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Normal setting
With no checkboxes selected, the assigned LED is active when the control signal
is active. After deactivation, the LED turns off. LED activation and deactivation
delay when controlled is approximately 10 ms.
Latch setting
A latched LED activates when the control signal activates but remains active
when the control signal deactivates. Latched LEDs are released using the
procedure described in 5.5 Releasing latches.
Blink setting
When the Blink setting is selected, the LED blinks when it is active.
Store setting
In the LED configuration setting view, you can configure the latched states of
LEDs to be stored after a restart. In Figure 40, storing has been configured for
LED A (green).
NOTE: To use the Store setting, Latch must also be selected.
Inputs for LEDs
Inputs for LEDs can be assigned in the LED matrix. All 14 LEDs can be assigned
as green or red. The connection can be normal, latched or blink-latched. In
addition to protection stages, there are lots of functions that can be assigned to
output LEDs. See Table 38.
Table 38 - Inputs for LEDs A-N
Input LED mapping Latch Description Note
Protection, Arc and LED A–N Normal/ Latched/ Different type of Set
program-mable stages BlinkLatch protection stages can
green or red
be assigned to LEDs
Digital/Virtual inputs LED A–N Normal/ Latched/ All different type of Set
and function buttons BlinkLatch inputs can be assigned
green or red
to LEDs
Object open/close, LED A–N Normal/ Latched/ Information related to Set

object final trip and BlinkLatch objects and object
green or red
object failure control
information
Local control enabled LED A–N Normal/ Latched/ While remote/local Set
BlinkLatch state is selected as
green or red
local the “local control
enabled” is active
Logic output 1–20 LED A–N Normal/ Latched/ All logic outputs can be Set
BlinkLatch assigned to LEDs at
green or red
the LED matrix
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 91
Input LED mapping Latch Description Note
Manual control LED A–N Normal/ Latched/ When the user has Set
indication BlinkLatch controlled the
green or red
objectives
COM 1–5 comm. LED A–N Normal/ Latched/ When the Set
BlinkLatch communication port 1 -
green or red
5 is active
Setting error, seldiag LED A–N Normal/ Latched/ Self diagnostic signal Set
alarm, pwd open and BlinkLatch
green or red
setting change
GOOSE NI1–64 LED A–N Normal/ Latched/ IEC 61850 goose Set
BlinkLatch communication signal
green or red
GOOSEERR1–16 LED A–N Normal/ Latched/ IEC 61850 goose Set

BlinkLatch communication signal
green or red
5.4.4 Object block matrix
The object block matrix is used to link digital inputs, virtual inputs, function
buttons, protection stage outputs, logic outputs, alarm signals and GOOSE
signals to inhibit the control of objects, that is, circuit breakers, isolators and
earthing switches.
Typical signals to inhibit controlling of the objects like circuit breaker are:
• protection stage activation

• statuses of other objects
• interlocking made with logic
• GOOSE signals
These and other signals are linked to objects in the object block matrix.
There are also event-type signals that do not block objects as they are on only for
a short time, for example "Object1" open and "Object1 close" signals.
5.5 Releasing latches

You can release latches using:
• eSetup Easergy Pro
• buttons and local panel display
• F1 or F2 buttons
5.5.1 Releasing latches using eSetup Easergy Pro
1. Connect eSetup Easergy Pro to the device.
2. From the eSetup Easergy Pro toolbar, select Device > Release all latches.
92 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 42 - Releasing all latches
Alternatively, go to Control > Release latches, and click the Release button.
Figure 43 - Release latches
5.5.2 Releasing latches using buttons and local panel display
Prerequisite: You have entered the correct password
1. Press .
2. Press .
3. Select Release, and press .

All latches are released.
5.5.3 Releasing latches using F1 or F2 buttons
You can use the function buttons F1 or F2 to release all latches after configuring
this function in eSetup Easergy Pro. You can make the configuration either under
Control > Release Latches or under Control > Function buttons.
• To configure F1 to release latches under Control > Release latches:
a. In eSetup Easergy Pro, go to Control > Release latches.
b. Under Release latches, select F1 from the DI to release latches drop-

down menu.
c. Set 1 s delay for Latch release signal pulse.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 93
Figure 44 - Release latches view
After this, pressing the F1 button on the relay’s front panel releases all
latches.
• To configure F1 to release latches under Control >Function buttons:
a. Under Function buttons, for F1, select PrgFncs from the Selected
control drop down menu.
b. Set 1 s delay for F1 pulse length.
c. Under Programmable functions for F1, select “On” from the Release all
latches drop-down menu.
Figure 45 - Function buttons view
After this, pressing the F1 button on the relay's front panel releases all
latches.
NOTE: The latch release signal can be activated only if the latched
output is active.
5.6 Controllable objects

The relay allows controlling eight objects, that is, circuit breakers, disconnectors
and earthing switches by the "select before operate" or "direct control" principle.
Controlling is possible in the following ways:
94 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
• through the object control buttons

• through front panel and display using single-line diagram
• through the function keys
• through digital input
• through remote communication
• through eSetup Easergy Pro setting tool
• through Web server
• through Smart APP
The connection of an object to specific controlling outputs is done via an output

matrix (object 1–8 open output, object 1–8 close output). There is also an output
signal “Object failed” that is activated if the control of an object is not completed.
Object states
Each object has the following states:
Setting Value Description
Object state Undefined (00) Actual state of the object
Open
Close
Undefined (11)
Basic settings for objects
Each object has the following settings:
Setting Value Description
DI for ‘obj open’ None, any digital input, Open information

virtual input or virtual output
DI for ‘obj close’ Close information
DI for ‘obj ready’ Ready information
Max ctrl pulse length 0.02–600 s Pulse length for open and
close commands. Control
pulse stops once object
changes its state
Completion timeout 0.02–600 s Timeout of ready indication
Object control Open/Close Direct object control
If changing the states takes longer than the time defined by the “Max ctrl pulse
length” setting, the object is inoperative and the “Object failure” matrix signal is
set. Also, an undefined event is generated. “Completion timeout” is only used for
the ready indication. If “DI for ‘obj ready’” is not set, the completion timeout has no
meaning.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 95
Output signals of objects
Each object has two control signals in matrix:
Output signal Description
Object x Open Open control signal for the object
Object x Close Close control signal for the object
These signals send control pulse when an object is controlled by digital input,
remote bus, auto-reclose etc.
5.6.1 Object control with digital inputs
Objects can be controlled with digital inputs, virtual inputs or virtual outputs. There
are four settings for each object:
Setting Active
DI for remote open / close control In remote state
DI for local open / close control In local state
If the relay is in local control state, the remote control inputs are ignored and vice
versa. An object is controlled when a rising edge is detected from the selected
input. The length of digital input pulse should be at least 60 ms.
5.6.2 Local or remote selection
In local mode, digital outputs can be controlled via the front panel but they cannot
be controlled via a remote serial communication interface.
In remote mode, digital outputs cannot be controlled via a front panel but they can
be controlled via a remote serial communication interface.
The local or remote mode can be selected by using the front panel or via one
selectable digital input. The digital input is normally used to change a whole
station to local or remote mode. You can select the L/R digital input in the Control
> Objects setting view in eSetup Easergy Pro.
Table 39 - Local or remote selection
Action Control through eSetup Control through

Easergy Pro or SmartApp communication protocol
Local/Remote Local Remote Local Remote

switch status
CB control Yes No No Yes
Setting or Yes Yes Yes Yes

configuration
changes
96 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Action Control through eSetup Control through

Easergy Pro or SmartApp communication protocol
Communication Yes Yes Yes Yes

configuration
Virtual inputs 27) Yes No No Yes

27) Virtual inputs have a general parameter “Check L/R selection” for disabling the L/R check.
5.6.3 Object control with I and O buttons
The relay also has dedicated control buttons for objects. (I) stands for object
closing and (O) controls object open command internally. Control buttons are
configured in the Control > Objects setting view.
Table 40 - Parameters of function keys
Parameter Value Unit Description Set
Object for Obj1–Obj8 Set

control buttons
Button
closes selected
object if
password is
enabled
Button
opens selected
object if
password is
enabled
Mode for control Selective Control

butons operation needs
Direct
confirmation
(select-execute)
Control
operation is
done without
confirmation
5.6.4 Object control with F1 and F2
Objects can be controlled with the function buttons F1 and F2.
By default, the F1 and F2 buttons are configured to control F1 and F2 variables

that can further be assigned to control objects.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 97
Table 41 - Parameters of F1 and F2
Parameter Value State Pulse Description

length 28)
F1 F1, V1-V20, 0.1 0-600 s

controls F1,
ObjCtrl
V1-V20 or
ObjCtrl
parameters.
F2 F2, V1-V20, 0.1 0-600 s

controls F2,
ObjCtrl
V1-V20 and
ObjCtrl
parameters.
28) Pulse length applies to values F1 and F2 only
You can configure the button funtions in the Control > Function buttons setting
view in eSetup Easergy Pro.
Figure 46 - Function buttons view
If ObjCtrl has been selected under Selected control, the selected object is
shown under Selected object. Otherwise, this column is empty.
When selecting ObjCtrl, link the function button to the appropriate object in the
Control > Objects setting view.
98 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 47 - Ctrl object 2 view
5.6.5 Adjustable time delay mechanism for the object’s closing operation
For the safety of the operating personnel, the PowerLogic P3 offers an adjustable
time delay mechanism to ensure the operating personnel has enough time to
evacuate safely. To adjust the local close delay time for the object’s closing
operation, navigate to the CONTROL > Objects setting view in eSetup Easergy
Pro. By enabling the Local close delay setting, you can set the desired close
delay time for the object within a range of 0 to 60 seconds.
Figure 48 - Local close delay setting
Note that the close delay time for the object is only available in Local mode. The
closing operation of the object occurs asynchronously which can ensure smooth
and uninterrupted system performance.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 99
In Output matrix (for PowerLogic P3 Standard) / LED matrix (for PowerLogic P3

Advanced) page, eight matrix signals are incorporated specifically for delay
operation, providing a dedicated interface for monitoring the delay close
operations.
Taking the figure below as an example, if you set 15 seconds close delay for
Object1, the assigned LED E on the device’s front panel is active for the duration
of the delay. After the elapsed 15 seconds, the state of the Object1 will change to
“Close”.
Figure 49 - Close delay for LED E
5.7 Logic functions

The relay supports customer-defined programmable logic for boolean signals.
User-configurable logic can be used to create something that is not provided by
the relay as a default. You can see and modify the logic in the Control > Logic
setting view in the eSetup Easergy Pro setting tool.
Table 42 - Available logic functions and their memory use
Logic functions No. of gates Max. no. of input Max. no. of logic
reserved gates outputs
AND 1
OR 1
32
XOR 1
(An input gate can 20
AND+OR 2 include any number
of inputs.)
CT (Count+Reset) 2
INVAND 2
100 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Logic functions No. of gates Max. no. of input Max. no. of logic
reserved gates outputs
INVOR 2
OR+AND 2
RS (Reset+Set) 2
RS_D (Set D+Load 4

+Reset)
R_OR 1
F_OR 1
E_OR 1
The consumed memory is dynamically shown on the configuration view in

percentage. The first value indicates the memory consumption of inputs, the
second value the memory consumption of gates and the third value the memory
consumption of outputs.
The logic is operational as long the memory consumption of the inputs, gates or
outputs remains individually below or equal to 100%.
Figure 50 - Logic and memory consumption
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 101
Truth tables
Table 43 - Truth table
Gate Symbol Truth table
AND In Out
A Y
0 0
1 1
In Out
A Y
0 1
1 0
In Out
A B Y
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
0 0 0
In Out
A B Y
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
0 0 1
AND+OR In Out
A B Y
0 0 0
1 1 1
1 0 1
0 1 1
102 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
CT (Count+Reset) In Out
A B Y Y
Cou Rese Setti New

nt t ng
1 3 0
1 3 0
1 3 1
1 3 0
INVAND In Out
A B Y
0 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
0 1 0
INVOR In Out
A B Y
0 0 1
1 1 1
1 0 1
0 1 0
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 103
OR In Out
A B Y
0 0 0
1 1 1
1 0 1
0 1 1
In Out
A B Y
0 0 1
1 1 0
1 0 0
0 1 0
In Out
A B C Y
0 0 0 1
1 1 0 1
1 0 0 1
0 1 0 1
1 1 1 1
In Out
A B C Y
0 0 0 1
1 0 0 0
1 1 0 0
0 1 0 0
1 1 1 0
104 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
OR+AND In Out
A B Y
0 0 0
1 1 1
1 0 0
0 1 0
RS (Reset+Set) In Out
A B Y
Set Reset Y
1 0 1
0 0 129)
0 0 030)
X 1 031)
29) Output = 1 (latched), if
previous state was 1, 0, 1.
30) Output = 0, if previous state
was X, 1, 0.
31) Output = 0, if RESET = 1
regardless of state of SET.
RS_D (Set+D+Load+Reset) A B C D Y
Set D Loa Re Stat

d set e
0 0 0 0 032)
1 X X 0 1
1 X X 1 0
0 1 0 0 0
0 1 1 0 1
0 1 1 1 033)
32) Initial
state
33) Thestate remains 1 until
Reset is set active
X = Any state
If Set or D + Load are high,

the state returns to high if
Reset returns to low.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 105
XOR In Out
A B C Y
0 0 0 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 0
1 1 1 1
Pulse OR When the input is set to a

rising edge, output will
A Y generate a 20ms positive
pulse. Falling edge will not
trigger a pulse.
When the input is set to a

rising edge, output will
A Y generate a 20ms negative
pulse. Falling edge will not
trigger a pulse.

falling edge, output will
A Y generate a 20ms positive
pulse. Rising edge will not
trigger a pulse.

falling edge, output will
A Y generate a 20ms negative
pulse. Rising edge will not
trigger a pulse.
106 P3T/EN/M/30-208A

rising or falling edge, output
A Y will generate a 20ms
positive pulse.

rising or falling edge, output
A Y will generate a 20ms
negative pulse.
29) Output = 1 (latched), if previous state was 1, 0, 1.

30) Output = 0, if previous state was X, 1, 0.
31) Output = 0, if RESET = 1 regardless of state of SET.
32) Initial state
33) The state remains 1 until Reset is set active
Logic element properties
After you have selected the required logic gate in eSetup Easergy Pro, you can
change the function of the gate in the Element properties window by clicking the
gate.
Figure 51 - Logic element properties
Table 44 - Settings available for the logical gates depending on the selected
element
Property Description
Element properties
Type Change the logical function of the gate
Inverted Inverts the output state of the logical gate
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 107
Property Description
ON delay Time delay to activate the output after

logical conditions are met
OFF delay Time delay for how long the gate remain
active even the logical condition is reset
Count Setting for counter (CT gate only)
Reverse Use to reverse AND and OR gates (AND

+OR gate only)
Inputs
Normal - / + Use to increase or decrease number of

inputs
Inverting - / + Use to increase or decrease number of

inverted inputs. This setting is visible for
INVAND and INVOR gates only
Count Use to increase or decrease number of

count inputs (CT gate only)
Reset Use to increase or decrease number of

count inputs (CT gate only)
AND Use to increase or decrease number of

inputs for AND gates (AND+OR gate only)
OR Use to increase or decrease number of

inputs for OR gates (AND+OR gate only)
Set Use to increase or decrease number of Set

inputs (RS_D gate only)
D Use to increase or decrease number of

Data inputs (RS_D gate only)
Load Use to increase or decrease number of

Load inputs (RS_D gate only)
Reset Use to increase or decrease number of

Reset inputs (RS_D gate only)
5.8 Local panel

PowerLogic P3T32 has one LCD matrix display.
All the main menus are located on the left side of the display. To get to a
submenu, move up and down the main menus.
108 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 52 - Local panel's main menu
5.8.1 Mimic view
The mimic view is set as the local panel's main view as default. You can modify
the mimic according to the application or disable it, if it is not needed, via the
eSetup Easergy Pro setting tool.
You can modify the mimic in the General > Mimic setting view in eSetup Easergy
Pro and disable the mimic view in the General > Local panel conf setting view.
NOTE: The mimic itself or the local mimic settings cannot be modified via the
local panel.
Figure 53 - Mimic view
C A B F I G H F J
D
E
I
A. To clear an object or drawing, first point an F. The remote/local selection defines whether
empty square (A) with the mouse. Then point the certain actions are granted or not. In remote
object item with the mouse. The color of the object state, it is not possible to locally enable or
item turns red. To clear the whole mimic, click on disable auto-reclosing or to control objects. The
the empty area. remote/local state can be changed in Control >
Objects.
B. Text tool G. Creates auto-reclosing on/off selection to
mimic.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 109
C. To move an existing drawing or object, point it H. Creates virtual input activation on the local
with the mouse. The color turns green. Hold down mimic view.
the left mouse button and move the object.
D. Different type of configurable objects. The I. Describes the relay's location. Text comes
object's number corresponds to the number in from the relay info menu.
Control > Objects.
E. Some predefined drawings. J. Up to six configurable measurements.
Table 45 - Mimic functionality
Sublocation Text field Up to 9 Set

characters.
Fixed location.
Object 1–8 1–8 Double-click on Set

top of the object
to change the
control number
between 1 and
8. Number 1
corresponds to
object 1 in
General >
Objects.
Remote/Local L Local / Remote Set

mode control. R
R
stands for
remote. Remote
local state can
be changed in
General >
Objects as well.
Position can be
changed.
Auto reclosing 0 Possible to Set

enable/disable
1
auto-reclosure
localy in local
mode (L) or
remotely in
remote mode
(R). Position
can be
changed.
110 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Measurement IL1–IL3 Up to 6 freely Set

display 1–6 I0 selectable
measurements.
IL1-IL3Flt
Runh
U12, U23,
U31, UL1,
UL2, UL3, U0
f, P, Q, S,
P.F.
CosPhi
E+, Eq+, E-,
Eq-
ARStart,
ARFaill,
ARShot1–5
IFLT
Starts, Trips
I0 Calc
IL1–IL3da, IL
Pda, Qda,
Sda
T
fSYNC,
USYNC
I’L1–I’L3
dIL1–dIL3
dIA–IC
VAI1–VAI5
ExtAI1–634)
Virtual input 1– 0 Change the Set

12 status of virtual
1
inputs while the
password is
enabled.
Position can be
changed.
34) Requires serial communication interface and External IO protocol activated.
Set = Settable.
NOTE: The measurement view's data selection depends on the voltage

measurement mode selected in the General > Scaling setting view.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 111
5.8.2 Local panel configuration
You can modify the local panel configuration in the General > Local panel conf
setting view in eSetup Easergy Pro.
Figure 54 - Local panel configuration view
112 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Table 46 - Local panel configuration parameters
Display 1–5 IL1–3 20 (5 x 4) freely Set37)

configurable
I0
measurement
IL1-IL3Flt values can be
selected
Runh
U12, U23, U31,

UL1, UL2, UL3,
U0
f, P, Q, S, P.F.
CosPhi
E+, Eq+, E-, Eq-
ARStart,
ARFaill,
ARShot1–5
IFLT
Starts, Trips
I0 Calc
IL
IL1–3da
IL1–3 max
IL1–3 min
IL1–3daMax
Pda, Qda,
Sda
T
fSYNC,
USYNC
I’L1–3
dIL1–3
VAI1–5
ExtAI1–636)
SetGrp
Display contrast 50–210 Contrast can be Set

changed in the
relay menu as
well.
Display DI1–44, Arc1–3, Activates the Set37)

backlight control ArcF, BI, VI1–4, backlight of the
LED1–14, VO1– display.
6
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 113
Panel reset Value range: min Configurable Set

timeout 0.0–2000.0 delay for the
front panel to
Default value:
return to the
15.0
default screen
when the front
panel is not
used.
When this value

is zero (0.0),
this timeout
never occurs.
Default screen Value range: Default screen Set

Mimic, Meas for the front
disp1, Meas panel.
disp2, Meas
If the selected
disp3, Meas
screen would
disp4, Meas
result in a blank
disp5
screen, the title
Default value: screen is used
Mimic as the default
screen.
Backlight off 0.0–2000.0 min Configurable Set

timeout delay for
backlight to
turns off when
the relay is not
used. Default
value is 60
minutes. When
value is zero
(0.0) backlight
stays on all the
time.
Enable alarm Selected Pop-up text box Set

screen for events. pop-
Unselected
up events can
be checked
individually by
pressing enter,
but holding the
button for 2
seconds checks
all the events at
once.
114 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
AR info for Selected Auto reclosure Set

mimic display status visible on
Unselected
top of the local
mimic view.
Sync I info for Selected Synchro-check Set

mimic display status visible on
Unselected
top of the local
mimic view.
Operates
together with
auto-reclosure.
Auto LED Selected Enables Set

release automatix LED
Unselected
release
functionality.
Auto LED 0.1–600 s Default 1.5 s. Set

release enable When new
time LEDs are
latched, the
previous active
latches are
released
automatically if
the set time has
passed.
Fault value PU, Pri Fault values per Set

scaling unit or primary
scsaled.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 115
Local MIMIC Selected Enable or Set

disable the local
Unselected
mimic (enabled
as default).
When selected,
the mimic is the
local panel's
default main
view. When
unselected, the
measurement
view is the
default main
view.
Event buffer 50–2000 Event buffer Set38)

size size. Default
setting is 200
events.
35) Set = Settable
36) Requires serial communication interface and External IO protocol activated.
37) Inputs vary according to the relay type.
38) The existing events are lost if the event buffer size is changed.
116 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
6 Protection functions Transformer protection relay
6 Protection functions
Each protection stage can independently be enabled or disabled according to the
requirements of the intended application.
NOTE: When protection stages are enabled or disabled, the disturbance

recordings are deleted from the relay's memory. Therefore, before activating
or deactivating stages, store the recordings in your PC.
6.1 Current transformer requirements for overcurrent elements

The current transformer (CT) must be sized according to the rules described here
for definite time (DT) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) to avoid saturation
during steady-state short-circuit currents where accuracy is required.
The nominal CT primary and secondary must be selected according to the

maximum short-circuit secondary current to meet the thermal withstand specified
in Table 166.
The condition to be fulfilled by the CT saturation current (Isat) depends on the type
of overcurrent protection operate time.
Table 47 - Condition to be fulfilled by CT saturation current
Time delay Condition to be fulfilled
DT Isat > 1.5 x set point (Is)
IDMT Isat > 1.5 x the curve value which is the smallest of these two values:
• Isc max., maximum installation short-circuit current
• 20 x Is (IDMT curve dynamic range)
Figure 55 - Overcurrent characteristics
A B
t t
I I
Is Isat Is Isat
C D
A. DT C. Minimum (Isc max., 20 Is)

B. IDMT D. 1.5 minimum (Isc max., 20 Is)
The method for calculating the saturation current depends on the CT accuracy
class.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 117
Transformer protection relay 6 Protection functions
6.1.1 CT requirements when settings are unknown
If no other information about the settings is available, these characteristics are

suitable for most situations.
Class P accuracy class
Table 48 - CT requirements
Rated Rated burden Accuracy CT Wiring

secondary (VAct) class and secondary resistance
current (Ins) accuracy resistance (Rw)
limit factor (Rct)
1A 2.5 VA 5P20 <3Ω < 0.075 Ω
5A 7.5 VA 5P20 < 0.2 Ω < 0.075 Ω
Class PX accuracy class
Vk / (Rct + Rw) > 30 x Ins
For 1 A: Vk > 30 x (Rct + Rw); for example: 30 x 3.9 = 117 V
For 5 A: Vk > 150 x (Rct + Rw); for example: 150 x 0.53 = 79.5 V
6.1.2 Principle for calculating the saturation current in class P
A class P CT is characterized by:

• Inp: rated primary current (in A)
• Ins: rated secondary current (in A)
• accuracy class, expressed by a percentage, 5P or 10P, followed by the
accuracy limit factor (ALF), whose usual values are 5, 10, 15, 20, 30
• VAct: rated burden, whose usual values are 2.5/5/7.5/10/15/30 VA
• Rct: maximum resistance of the secondary winding (in Ω)
The installation is characterized by the load resistance Rw at the CT secondary

(wiring + protection device). If the CT load complies with the rated burden, that is,
Rw x Ins2 <= VAct, the saturation current is higher than ALF x Inp.
If the resistance Rct is known, it is possible to calculate the actual CT ALF which
takes account of the actual CT load. The saturation current equals the actual ALF
x Inp.
Equation 3
Rct × Ins2 + VAct

Actual ALF = ALF ×
(Rct + Rw) × Ins2
6.1.3 Examples of calculating the saturation current in class P
The saturation current for a CT is calculated with:
118 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
• transformation ratio: 100 A/5 A

• rated burden: 2.5 VA
• accuracy class and accuracy-limit factor: 5P20
• resistance of the secondary winding: 0.1 Ω
To have an ALF of at least 20, that is, a saturation current of 20 x Inp = 2 kA, the
load resistance Rw of the CT must be less than Equation 4.
Equation 4
VAct 2.5
Rw, max = 2 = = 0.1Ω
Ins 52
This represents 12 m (39 ft) of wire with cross-section 2.5 mm² (AWG 14) for a
resistance per unit length of approximately 8 Ω/km (2.4 mΩ/ft). For an installation
with 50 m (164 ft) of wiring with section 2.5 mm² (AWG 14), Rw = 0.4 Ω.
As a result, the actual ALF is as presented in Equation 5.
Equation 5
Rct × Ins2 + VAct 0.1 × 25 + 2.5

Actual ALF = ALF × = 20× =8
(Rct + Rw) × Ins2 (0.1 + 0.4) × 25
Therefore, the saturation current Isat = 8 x Inp = 800 A.
NOTE: The impedance of a PowerLogic P3 protection device's current inputs

(0.004 Ω) is often negligible compared to the wiring resistance.
6.1.4 Principle for calculating the saturation current in class PX
A class PX CT is characterized by:

• Inp: rated primary current (in A)
• Ins: rated secondary current (in A)
• Vk: rated knee-point voltage (in V)
• Rct: maximum resistance of the secondary winding (in Ω)
The saturation current is calculated by the load resistance Rw at the CT

secondary (wiring + protection device) as shown in Equation 6.
Equation 6
Vk Inp
Isat = ×
Rct + Rw Ins
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 119
6.1.5 Examples of calculating the saturation current in class PX
Table 49 - Examples of calculating the saturation current in class PX
CT Vk Rct Rw Saturation
Transformati current
on ratio
100 A/1 A 90 V 3.5 Ω 0.4 Ω Isat = 90 / (3,5 +

0,4) / 1 x Inp =
23,08 x Inp
100 A/5 A 60 V 0.13 Ω 0.4 Ω Isat = 60 / (0,13

+ 0,4) / 5 x Inp =
22,6 x Inp
6.1.6 CT requirements for REF protection
Two REF schemes are possible: the Low impedance REF and the High
impedance REF.
The Low impedance REF protection should be used with power networks X/R
only up to 15.
The formula for the CT requirements is
Vk > K * ISEC * (RCT + RB), where
ISEC = 1A or 5A, secondary ratio of the CT
‘K’ depends on X/R and the maximum through-fault current (three-phase fault
current) as defined in Table 50.
Table 50 - K factor
K value Fault current (xIn)
<=7 <=10 <=15
X/R <= 10 45 60 70
X/R <= 15 55 70 80
X/R > 15 Not applicable; use the High Z REF.
For power system with an X/R ratio above 15, or when the above CT
requirements cannot be met, the high impedance REF protection shall be used
instead.
The CT requirements for high impedance REF are given in the Application Note
"P3APS17016EN_(HiZ-REF_87N)".
NOTE: The high impedance REF must use a different winding of the primary
CT than the Transformer Differential.
120 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
6.2 Current transformer requirements for generator and

transformer block differential protection
NOTE: These current transformer (CT) requirements are applicable from
firmware version FW30.204 onward.
The CT requirements are based on the following settings:
Table 51 - CT settings
Parameter Value
dI> pickup (Ibias < 0.5 Ign) 20% of In
Slope1 50%
Ibias for start of slope 2 2 x In
Slope2 150%
dI> 2nd harmonics block limit 10%
For maximum sub-synchronous through fault up to 7 In
P3G CT requirements from firmware 30.204 for generator differential protection

apply.
For maximum sub-synchronous through fault above 7 In
Class PX and class P CTs are recommended.
For maximum sub-synchronous through fault above 7 In and below 9 In, K = 25.
For maximum sub-synchronous through fault above 9 In, K = 30.
CT requirements for class PX
The minimum knee point voltage is Vk = K x Isr x (RCT + 2RL + Rr).
Vk = Minimum current transformer knee-point voltage
Isr = Secondary rated current (1A or 5A)
RCT = Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (Ω)
RL = Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (Ω)
Rr = Resistance of all protective relays sharing the current transformer (Ω)
CT requirements for class P CT (5P10 for example)
The minimum rated burden is SVA > ((K / Kalf) x (RCT + Rba) – RCT) x Isr2
where kalf is the CT accuracy limit factor (i.e. 20 for 5P20, i.e. 10 for 5P10)
Rba = Actual burden = 2RL + Rr (Ω)
NOTE: The sub-synchronous value is ip.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 121
Figure 56 - Fault current
B
C
E F
G D
H IEC 1263/2000
A. Current F. Ip
B. Top envelope G. A
C. d.c. component Id.c. of the short-circuit current H. Bottom envelope
D. 2√2 I’k I. Time
E. 2√2 Ik
6.3 Current transformer requirements for transformer differential

protection
This topic describes the current transformer requirements for transformer
differential protection applicable for star-star and star-delta transformers.
NOTE: These current transformer (CT) requirements are applicable from

firmware version FW30.204 onward.
For accuracy, class PX or class 5P CTs are recommended but TPY or 5PR can
also be used.
The CT requirements are based on the following settings based on the rated
current of the transformer “In”:
Table 52 - CT settings
Parameter Value
dI> pickup (Ibias < 0.5 Ign) 20% of In
Slope1 50%
Ibias for start of slope 2 2 x In
Slope2 150%
dI> 2nd harmonics block limit 10%
The maximum through fault measured by the protection device must be limited to
15 In. Thus, choose the CT ratio carefully to meet this requirement. With a
through fault flowing from both sides, choose the highest one.
Determination of K for star-star transformers
For power network X/R up to 10 and for all the above-listed CT classes, K = 30.
122 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
For power network X/R from 11 to 60:

• For TPX and class P CTs, K = 55
• For TPY and class PR CTs:
◦ For through faults up to 7 In, K = 30
◦ For through faults from 7 In to 15 In, K = 40
Table 53 - Determination of K for star-star transformers
Through fault current (up to)
7 15
X/R up to 10 TPX - PX - 5P 30
TPY - 5PR
X/R up to 60 TPX - PX - 5P 55
TPY - 5PR 30 40
Determination of K for star-delta transformers
For power network X/R up to 10 and for all above CT classes:
• For through fault up to 7 In, K = 30

• For through fault from 7 In to 15 In, K = 33
For power network X/R from 11 to 60,
• For TPX and class P CTs, K = 55

◦ For through fault up to 5 In, K = 55
◦ For through fault from 5 In to 15 In, K = 70
• For TPY and class PR CTs:
◦ For through fault up to 7 In, K = 30
◦ For through fault from 7 In to 15 In, K = 40
Table 54 - Determination of K for star-delta transformers
Through fault current (up to)
5 7 15
X/R up to 10 TPX - PX - 5P 30 33
TPY - 5PR
X/R up to 60 TPX - PX - 5P 55 70
TPY - 5PR 30 40
CT requirements for class PX and TPY
The minimum knee-point voltage is Vk = K x Isr x (RCT + 2RL + Rr).
Vk = Minimum current transformer knee-point voltage
Isr = Secondary rated current (1A or 5A)
RCT = Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (Ω)
RL = Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (Ω)
Rr = Resistance of all protective relays sharing the current transformer (Ω)
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 123
CT requirements for class P or PR CT ( for example 5P10)
The minimum rated burden is SVA > ((K / Kalf) x (RCT + Rba) – RCT) x Isr2
where Kalf is the CT accuracy limit factor (20 for 5P20, 10 for 5P10)
Rba = Actual burden = 2 RL + Rr (Ω)
6.4 Maximum number of protection stages in one application

The relay limits the maximum number of enabled protection stages to about 30.
The exact number depends on the central processing unit's load consumption and
available memory as well as the type of the stages.
The individual protection stage and total load status can be found in the
Protection > Protection stage status setting view in the eSetup Easergy Pro
setting tool.
6.5 General features of protection stages

Setting groups
Setting groups are controlled by using digital inputs, function keys or virtual
inputs, via the front panel or custom logic. When none of the assigned inputs are
active, the setting group is defined by the parameter ‘SetGrp no control state’.
When controlled input activates, the corresponding setting group is activated as
well. If the control signal of the setting group is lost, the setting “Keep last” forces
the last active group into use. If multiple inputs are active at the same time, the
active setting group is defined by ‘SetGrp priority’. By using virtual I/O, the active
setting group can be controlled using the local panel display, any communication
protocol or the built-in programmable logic functions. All protection stages have
four setting groups.
124 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 57 - Setting groups view
Example
Any digital input can be used to control setting groups but in this example, DI1,
DI2, DI3 and DI4 are chosen to control setting groups 1 to 4. This setting is done
with the parameter “Set group x DI control” where x refers to the desired setting
group.
Figure 58 - DI1, DI2, DI3, DI4 configured to control Groups 1 to 4 respectively
Use the 'SetGrp common change' parameter to force all protection stages to
group 1, 2, 3 or 4. The control becomes active if there is no local control in the
protection stage. You can activate this parameter using eSetup Easergy Pro.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 125
“SetGrp priority” is used to give a condition to a situation where two or more

digital inputs, controlling setting groups, are active at the same time. SetGrp
priority could have values “1 to 4” or “4 to 1”.
Figure 59 - SetGrp priority setting in the Valid Protection stages view
Assuming that DI2 and DI3 are active at the same time and SetGrp priority is set
to “1 to 4”, setting group 2 becomes active. If SetGrp priority is reversed, that is,
set to “4 to 1”, the setting group 3 becomes active.
Accept zero delay
User can set the delay time to 0 by enabling this selection. For normal operation,
the user can only set the delay time to the minimum value of the setting range.
Protection stage statuses
The status of a protection stage can be one of the followings:
• Ok = ‘-‘
The stage is idle and is measuring the analog quantity for the protection. No
power system fault detected.
• Blocked
The stage is detecting a fault but blocked for some reason.

• Start
The stage is counting the operation delay.

• Trip
The stage has tripped and the fault is still on.
The blocking reason may be an active signal via the block matrix from other
stages, the programmable logic or any digital input. Some stages also have built-
in blocking logic. For more details about the block matrix, see 5.4.2 Blocking
matrix.
Protection stage counters
Each protection stage has start and trip counters that are incremented when the
stage starts or trips. The start and trip counters are reset on relay reboot.
The user can also view and reset the start and trip counters through eSetup
Easergy Pro on Protection > Protection stage status 2, and clear fault logs as
well.
126 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Overcurrent status supervision
The firmware records and shows the last fault current and earth fault current
values. The user can view this through eSetup Easergy Pro on Protection >
Protection stage status 2.
The user can supervise line alarm and fault through the above page; once
overcurrent stage starts, overcurrent alarm (L1,L2,L3) is issued. Earth fault alarm
works for the same mechanism. When the overcurrent stage trips, overcurrent
fault is issued and the corresponding fault is issued at the same time. The user
can also set the reset time for alarms and faults, and as the set time has elapsed,
the alarms and faults are set to zero.
Fault current recording
Firmware provides fault current recording. After one stage trips and releases, it
will record L1~L3 current and residual currents. It also provides a clearing delay
for the fault value, and after the delay has elapsed, it can record new fault values,
otherwise, if new fault current happens during the countdown, the value will not
be recorded.
Forcing start or trip condition for testing purposes
There is a "Forcing flag" parameter which, when activated, allows forcing the
status of any protection stage to be "start" or "trip" for half a second. By using this
forcing feature, current or voltage injection is not necessary to check the output
matrix configuration, to check the wiring from the digital outputs to the circuit
breaker and also to check that communication protocols are correctly transferring
event information to a SCADA system.
After testing, the forcing flag is automatically reset five minutes after the last local
panel push button activity.
The force flag also enables forcing the digital outputs and the optional mA
outputs.
The force flag can be found in the Device/Test > Relays setting view.
Figure 60 - Force flag
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 127
Start and trip signals
Every protection stage has two internal binary output signals: start and trip. The
start signal is issued when a fault has been detected. The trip signal is issued
after the configured operation delay unless the fault disappears before the end of
the delay time.
The hysteresis, as indicated in the protection stage's characteristics data, means

that the signal is regarded as a fault until the signal drops below the start setting
determined by the hysteresis value.
Figure 61 - Behavior of a greater than comparator (for example, the hysteresis

(dead band) in overvoltage stages)
Hysteresis_GT
hysteresis
Start level
> Start
Output matrix
Using the output matrix, you can connect the internal start and trip signals to the
digital outputs and indicators. For more details, see 5.4.1 Output matrix.
Blocking
Any protection function, except for arc flash detection, can be blocked with
internal and external signals using the block matrix (5.4.2 Blocking matrix).
Internal signals are for example logic outputs and start and trip signals from other
stages and external signals are for example digital and virtual inputs.
Some protection stages have also built-in blocking functions. For example under-
frequency protection has built-in under-voltage blocking to avoid tripping when the
voltage is off.
When a protection stage is blocked, it does not start if a fault condition is

detected. If blocking is activated during the operation delay, the delay counting is
frozen until the blocking goes off or the start reason, that is the fault condition,
disappears. If the stage is already tripping, the blocking has no effect.
Dependent time operation
The operate time in the dependent time mode is dependent on the magnitude of
the injected signal. The bigger the signal, the faster the stage issues a trip signal
and vice versa. The tripping time calculation resets if the injected quantity drops
below the start level.
128 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Definite time operation
Figure 62 - Dependent time and definite time operation curves
IDMT DT
t (s)
If (A)
The operate time in the definite time mode is fixed by the Operation delay
setting. The timer starts when the protection stage activates and counts until the
set time has elapsed. After that, the stage issues a trip command. Should the
protection stage reset before the definite time operation has elapsed, then the
stage resets.
By default, the definite time delay cannot be set to zero because the value
contains processing time of the function and operate time of the output contact.
This means that the time indicated in the Definite time setting view is the actual
operate time of the function. Use the Accept zero delay setting in the protection
stage setting view to accept the zero setting for definite time function. In this case,
the minimum operate time of the function must be tested separately.
Overshoot time
Overshoot time is the time the protection device needs to notice that a fault has
been cleared during the operate time delay. This parameter is important when
grading the operate time delay settings between devices.
Figure 63 - Overshoot time

RetardationTime
tFAULT
tRET < 50 ms
DELAY SETTING > tFAULT + tRET
TRIP CONTACTS
If the delay setting would be slightly shorter, an unselective trip might occur (the
dash line pulse).
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 129
For example, when there is a big fault in an outgoing feeder, it might start both the
incoming and outgoing feeder relay. However, the fault must be cleared by the
outgoing feeder relay and the incoming feeder relay must not trip. Although the
operating delay setting of the incoming feeder is more than at the outgoing feeder,
the incoming feeder might still trip if the operate time difference is not big enough.
The difference must be more than the overshoot time of the incoming feeder relay
plus the operate time of the outgoing feeder circuit breaker.
Figure 63 shows an overcurrent fault seen by the incoming feeder when the
outgoing feeder clears the fault. If the operation delay setting would be slightly
shorter or if the fault duration would be slightly longer than in the figure, an
unselective trip might happen (the dashed 40 ms pulse in the figure). In
PowerLogic P3 devices, the overshoot time is less than 50 ms.
Reset time
Figure 64 shows an example of reset time, that is, release delay when the relay is
clearing an overcurrent fault. When the relay’s trip contacts are closed, the circuit
breaker (CB) starts to open. After the CB contacts are open, the fault current still
flows through an arc between the opened contacts. The current is finally cut off
when the arc extinguishes at the next zero crossing of the current. This is the start
moment of the reset delay. After the reset delay the trip contacts and start contact
are opened unless latching is configured. The precise reset time depends on the
fault size; after a big fault, the reset time is longer. The reset time also depends
on the specific protection stage.
The maximum reset time for each stage is specified under the characteristics of
every protection function. For most stages, it is less than 95 ms.
Figure 64 - Reset time
tSET
tCB
tRESET
TRIP CONTACTS
Reset time is the time it takes the trip or start relay contacts to open after the fault
has been cleared.
Hysteresis or dead band
When comparing a measured value against a start value, some amount of

hysteresis is needed to avoid oscillation near equilibrium situation. With zero
hysteresis, any noise in the measured signal or any noise in the measurement
itself would cause unwanted oscillation between fault-on and fault-off situations.
130 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 65 - Example behavior of an over-protection with hysteresis

Hysteresis_GT
hysteresis
Start level
> Start
Figure 66 - Example behavior of an under-protection with hysteresis

Hysteresis_LT
hysteresis
Start level
< Start
Time grading
When a fault occurs, the protection scheme only needs to trip circuit breakers
whose operation is required to isolate the fault. This selective tripping is also
called discrimination or protection coordination and is typically achived by time
grading. Protection systems in successive zones are arranged to operate in times
that are graded through the sequence of equipment so that upon the occurrence
of a fault, although a number of protections devices respond, only those relevant
to the faulty zone complete the tripping function.
The recommended discrimination time between two PowerLogic P3 devices in an

MV network is 170–200 ms. This is based on the following facts:
• Tc: circuit breaker operating time, 60 ms
• Tm: upstream protection overshoot time (retardation time), 50 ms
• δt: time delay tolerance, 25 ms
• m: safety margin, 10 ms
• Δt: discrimination time, 170–200 ms
Figure 67 - Time grading
δt TC m Tm δt
time
Δt
Recorded values of the last eight faults
There is detailed information available on the last eight faults for each protection
stage. The recorded values are specific for the protection stages and can contain
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 131
information like time stamp, fault value, elapsed delay, fault current, fault voltage,
phase angle and setting group.
NOTE: The recorded values are lost if the relay power is switched off.
Squelch limit
Current inputs have a squelch limit (noise filter) at 0.005 x IN. When the
measured signal goes below this threshold level, the signal is forced to zero.
NOTE: If ICALC is used to measure the residual current, the squelch limit for
the ICALC signal is same as for the phase currents. The I0 setting range begins
at the level of phase currents' squelch limit. This can cause instability if the
minimum setting is used with the I0 CALC mode.
6.6 Dependent operate time

The dependent operate time – that is, the inverse definite minimum time (IDMT)
type of operation – is available for several protection functions. The common
principle, formula and graphic representations of the available dependent delay
types are described in this chapter.
Dependent delay means that the operate time depends on the measured real
time process values during a fault. For example, with an overcurrent stage using
dependent delay, a bigger a fault current gives faster operation. The alternative to
dependent delay is definite delay. With definite delay, a preset time is used and
the operate time does not depend on the size of a fault.
Stage-specific dependent delay
Some protection functions have their own specific type of dependent delay.
Details of these dedicated dependent delays are described with the appropriate
protection function.
Operation modes
There are three operation modes to use the dependent time characteristics:
• Standard delays
Using standard delay characteristics by selecting a curve family (IEC, IEEE,

IEEE2, RI) and a delay type (Normal inverse, Very inverse etc). See 6.6.1
Standard dependent delays using IEC, IEEE, IEEE2 and RI curves.
• Standard delay formulae with free parameters
selecting a curve family (IEC, IEEE, IEEE2) and defining one's own
parameters for the selected delay formula. This mode is activated by setting
delay type to ‘Parameters’, and then editing the delay function parameters A –
E. See 6.6.2 Free parameterization using IEC, IEEE and IEEE2 curves.
• Fully programmable dependent delay characteristics
Building the characteristics by setting 16 [current, time] points. The relay

interpolates the values between given points with inverse curve which is
reciprocal of 2nd degree polynomial. The interpolation function is reciprocal of
2nd degree polynomial
132 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
1
T ( I/I ) =
Start f ( I/ I Start )
where
f ( I/ I Start )
is the 2nd degree polynomial.
This mode is activated by setting the curve family to ‘PrgN’'. There is a

maximum of three different programmable curves available at the same time.
Each programmed curve can be used by any number of protection stages.
See 6.6.3 Programmable dependent time curves.
CAUTION
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
When changing the dependent time (inverse curves) operation mode

settings manually through the device HMI, change both the Curve (Curve
delay family) and Type (Delay type) setting.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment

damage.
Dependent time limitation
The maximum dependent time is limited to 600 seconds.
Local panel graph
The relay shows a graph of the currently used dependent delay on the local panel
display. The up and down keys can be used for zooming. Also the delays at 20 x
ISET, 4 x ISET and 2 x ISET are shown.
Dependent time setting error signal
If there are any errors in the dependent delay configuration, the appropriate
protection stage uses the definite time delay.
There is a signal ‘Setting Error’ available in the output matrix that indicates
different situations:
1. Settings are currently changed with eSetup Easergy Pro or local panel.
2. There is temporarily an illegal combination of curve points. For example, if

previous setting was IEC/NI and then curve family is changed to IEEE, this
causes a setting error because there is no NI type available for IEEE curves.
After changing valid delay type for IEEE mode (for example MI), the ‘Setting
Error’ signal releases.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 133
3. There are errors in formula parameters A – E, and the relay is not able to
build the delay curve.
4. There are errors in the programmable curve configuration, and the relay is not
able to interpolate values between the given points.
Limitations
The maximum measured secondary phase current is 50 x IN and the maximum

directly measured earth fault current is 10 x I0N for earth fault overcurrent input.
The full scope of dependent delay curves goes up to 20 times the setting. At a
high setting, the maximum measurement capability limits the scope of dependent
curves according to Table 55.
Table 55 - Maximum measured secondary currents and settings for phase and
earth fault overcurrent inputs
Current input Maximum measured Maximum secondary

secondary current scaled setting enabling
dependent delay times
up to full 20x setting
IL1, IL2, IL3 and I0 Calc 250 A 12.5 A
I01 = 5 A 50 A 2.5 A
I01 = 1 A 10 A 0.5 A
I01 = 0.2 A 2A 0.1 A
Example of limitation
CT = 750 / 5
CT0 = 100 / 1 (cable CT is used for earth fault overcurrent)
The CT0 is connected to a 1 A terminals of input I0.
For overcurrent stage I>, Table 55 gives 12.5 A. Thus, the maximum setting the
for I> stage giving full dependent delay range is 12.5 A / 5 A = 2.5 xIN = 1875
APrimary.
For earth fault stage I0>, Table 55 gives 0.5 A. Thus, the maximum setting for the
I0> stage giving full dependent delay range is 0.5 A / 1 A = 0.5 xI0N = 50 APrimary.
1. Example of limitation
CT0 = 100 / 1 (cable CT is used for earth fault overcurrent)
6.6.1 Standard dependent delays using IEC, IEEE, IEEE2 and RI curves
The available standard dependent delays are divided in four categories called
dependent curve families: IEC, IEEE, IEEE2 and RI. Each category contains a set
of different delay types according to Table 56.
134 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
The dependent time setting error signal activates if the delay category is changed
and the old delay type does not exist in the new category. See 6.6 Dependent
operate time for more details.
Limitations
The minimum definite time delay starts when the measured value is twenty times
the setting, at the latest. However, there are limitations at high setting values due
to the measurement range. See 6.6 Dependent operate time for more details.
Table 56 - Available standard delay families and the available delay types within
each family
Delay type Curve family
DT IEC IEEE IEEE2 RI
DT Definite X
time
NI Normal X X
inverse
VI Very X X X
inverse
EI Extremely X X X
inverse
LTI Long time X X

inverse
LTEI Long time X

extremely
inverse
LTVI Long time X

very
inverse
MI Moderately X X
inverse
STI Short time X

inverse
STEI Short time X

extremely
inverse
RI Old ASEA X
type
RXIDG Old ASEA X

type
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 135
IEC dependent operate time
The operate time depends on the measured value and other parameters
according to Equation 7. Actually this equation can only be used to draw graphs
or when the measured value I is constant during the fault. A modified version is
implemented in the relay for real time usage.
Equation 7
kA
t= B
 I 
  − 1
 I START 
t = Operation delay in seconds
k = User’s multiplier Inv. time coefficient k
I = Measured value
ISTART = Start setting
A, B = Constants parameters according to Table 57.
There are three different dependent delay types according to IEC 60255-3,
Normal inverse (NI), Extremely inverse (EI), Very inverse (VI) and a VI extension.
In addition, there is a de facto standard Long time inverse (LTI).
Table 57 - Constants for IEC dependent delay equation
Parameter
Delay type
A B
NI Normal inverse 0.14 0.02
EI Extremely inverse 80 2
VI Very inverse 13.5 1
LTI Long time inverse 120 1
Example of the delay type "Normal inverse (NI)":
k = 0.50
I = 4 pu (constant current)
IPICKUP = 2 pu
A = 0.14
B = 0.02
136 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Equation 8
0.50 ⋅ 0.14
t= 0.02
= 5.0
4
  −1
2
The operate time in this example is five seconds. The same result can be read
from Figure 68.
Figure 68 - IEC normal inverse delay
IEC NI
B inverseDelayIEC_NI
A. Delay (s) B. I / Iset
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 137
Figure 69 - IEC extremely inverse delay
IEC EI
0.1
0.08
0.04
B inverseDelayIEC_EI
138 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 70 - IEC very inverse delay
IEC VI
B inverseDelayIEC_VI
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 139
Figure 71 - IEC long time inverse delay
IEC LTI
B inverseDelayIEC_LTI
IEEE/ANSI dependent operate time
There are three different delay types according to IEEE Std C37.112-1996 (MI, VI,
EI) and many de facto versions according to Table 58. The IEEE standard defines
dependent delay for both trip and release operations. However, in the PowerLogic
P3 relay only the trip time is dependent according to the standard but the reset
time is constant.
The operate delay depends on the measured value and other parameters
according to Equation 9. Actually, this equation can only be used to draw graphs
implemented in the relay for real-time usage.
Equation 9
 
 
 A 
t=k  C
+ B
  I  − 1 
  I START  
 
k = User’s multiplier
140 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
I = Measured value
A,B,C = Constant parameter according to Table 58
Table 58 - Constants for IEEE/ANSI inverse delay equation
Delay type Parameter
A B C
LTI Long time 0.086 0.185 0.02

inverse
LTVI Long time very 28.55 0.712 2

inverse
LTEI Long time 64.07 0.250 2

extremely
inverse
MI Moderately 0.0515 0.1140 0.02

inverse
VI Very inverse 19.61 0.491 2
EI Extremely 28.2 0.1217 2

inverse
STI Short time 0.16758 0.11858 0.02

inverse
STEI Short time 1.281 0.005 2

extremely
inverse
Example of the delay type "Moderately inverse (MI)":
k = 0.50
I = 4 pu
IPICKUP = 2 pu
A = 0.0515
B = 0.114
C = 0.02
Equation 10
 
 
t = 0.50 ⋅  0.0515
+ 0.1140 = 1.9
  4  0.02 
  −1 
  2  
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 141
The operate time in this example is 1.9 seconds. The same result can be read
from Figure 75.
Figure 72 - ANSI/IEEE long time inverse delay
IEEE LTI
B inverseDelayIEEE1_LTI
142 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 73 - ANSI/IEEE long time very inverse delay
IEEE LTVI
B inverseDelayIEEE1_LTVI
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 143
Figure 74 - ANSI/IEEE long time extremely inverse delay
IEEE LTEI
B inverseDelayIEEE1_LTEI
144 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 75 - ANSI/IEEE moderately inverse delay
IEEE MI
B inverseDelayIEEE1_MI
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 145
Figure 76 - ANSI/IEEE short time inverse delay
IEEE STI
B inverseDelayIEEE1 STI
146 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 77 - ANSI/IEEE short time extremely inverse delay
IEEE STEI
B inverseDelayIEEE1 STEI
IEEE2 dependent operate time
Before the year 1996 and ANSI standard C37.112 microprocessor relays were
using equations approximating the behavior of various induction disc type relays.
A quite popular approximation is Equation 11 which in PowerLogic P3 relays is
called IEEE2. Another name could be IAC because the old General Electric IAC
relays have been modeled using the same equation.
There are four different delay types according to Table 59. The old
electromechanical induction disc relays have dependent delay for both trip and
release operations. However, in PowerLogic P3 relays, only the trip time is
dependent and the reset time is constant.
The operate delay depends on the measured value and other parameters
according to Equation 11. Actually, this equation can only be used to draw graphs
implemented in the relay for real-time usage.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 147
Equation 11
 
 
 B D E 
t = k A + + + 3
 I  2
  − C   I − C   I − C  

  I START   I START 

I
 START
 
 
I = Measured value
ISTART = User’s start setting
A, B, C, D = Constant parameter according to Table 59.
Table 59 - Constants for IEEE2 inverse delay equation
Parameter
Delay type
A B C D E
MI Moderately 0.1735 0.6791 0.8 -0.08 0.1271

inverse
NI Normally 0.0274 2.2614 0.3 -4.1899 9.1272

inverse
VI Very 0.0615 0.7989 0.34 -0.284 4.0505

inverse
EI Extremely 0.0399 0.2294 0.5 3.0094 0.7222

inverse
Example of the delay type "Moderately inverse (MI)":
k = 0.50
I = 4 pu
ISTART = 2 pu
A = 0.1735
B = 0.6791
C = 0.8
D = -0.08
E = 0.127
148 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Equation 12
 
 
0.6791 − 0.08 0.127 
t = 0.5 ⋅ 0.1735 + + + = 0.38
 4  4 
2
 4 
3

  − 0.8   − 0.8   − 0.8  
 2  2  2  
from Figure 78.
Figure 78 - IEEE2 moderately inverse delay
IEEE2 MI
B inverseDelayIEEE2_MI
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 149
Figure 79 - IEEE2 normal inverse delay
IEEE2 NI
B inverseDelayIEEE2_NI
150 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 80 - IEEE2 very inverse delay
IEEE2 VI
B inverseDelayIEEE2_VI
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 151
Figure 81 - IEEE2 extremely inverse delay
IEEE2 EI
B inverseDelayIEEE2_EI
RI and RXIDG type dependent operate time
These two dependent delay types have their origin in old ASEA (nowadays ABB)
earth fault relays.
The operate delay of types RI and RXIDG depends on the measured value and
other parameters according to Equation 13 and Equation 14. Actually, these
equations can only be used to draw graphs or when the measured value I is
constant during the fault. Modified versions are implemented in the relay for real-
time usage.
Equation 13 Equation 14
k I
t RI = t RXIDG = 5.8 − 1.35 ln
0.236 k I START
0.339 −
 I 
 
 I START 
t = Operate delay in seconds
I = Measured value
152 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Example of the delay type RI
k = 0.50
I = 4 pu
ISTART = 2 pu
Equation 15
0.5
t RI = = 2.3
0.236
0.339 −
4
 
2
from Figure 82.
Example of the delay type RXIDG
k = 0.50
I = 4 pu
ISTART = 2 pu
Equation 16
4
t RXIDG = 5.8 − 1.35 ln = 3.9
0.5 ⋅ 2
from Figure 83.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 153
Figure 82 - RI dependent delay
RI
B inverseDelayRI
154 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 83 - RXIDG dependent delay
6.6.2 Free parameterization using IEC, IEEE and IEEE2 curves
This mode is activated by the setting delay type to ‘Parameters’, and then editing
the delay function constants, that is, the parameters A – E. The idea is to use the
standard equations with one’s own constants instead of the standardized
constants as in the previous chapter.
Example of the GE-IAC51 delay type:
k = 0.50
I = 4 pu
ISTART = 2 pu
A = 0.2078
B = 0.8630
C = 0.8000
D = - 0.4180
E = 0.1947
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 155
Equation 17
 
 
 0.8630 − 0.4180 0.1947 
t = 0.5 ⋅ 0.2078 + + + = 0.37
 4  4 
2
 4 
3

  − 0.8   − 0.8   − 0.8  
 2  2  2  
The operate time in this example is 0.37 seconds.
The resulting time/current characteristic of this example matches quite well the
characteristic of the old electromechanical IAC51 induction disc relay.
The dependent time setting error signal actives if interpolation with the given
parameters is not possible. See 6.6 Dependent operate time for more details.
Limitations
The minimum definite time delay starts at the latest when the measured value is
twenty times the setting. However, there are limitations at high setting values due
6.6.3 Programmable dependent time curves
Programming dependent time curves requires eSetup Easergy Pro setting tool
and rebooting the unit.
The [current, time] curve points are programmed using eSetup Easergy Pro PC
program.
The user gives the desired current-time point in the form of a table. The listed
points are used to interpolate all possible current-time values that fall between the
given points.
Interpolation is septically designed to fit curves with inverse time nature. Figure 84
depicts an example of the inverse time curve. Interpolation of non-inverse time
curves is possible, but curve fitting is not as good as with inverse curves.
There are some rules for defining the curve points:

• the configuration must begin from the topmost line
• the line order must be as follows: the smallest current (longest operate time)
on the top and the largest current (shortest operate time) on the bottom
• all unused lines (on the bottom) should be filled with [1.00 0.00s]
• given current-time points are recommended to have inverse time nature.
156 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 84 - Inverse and non-inverse curve
I/Iset I/Iset
Inverse type Non-nverse type
of a curve of a curve
Trip time Trip time
Here is an example configuration of curve points:
Point Current I/ISTART Operate delay
1 1.00 10.00 s
2 2.00 6.50 s
3 5.00 4.00 s
4 10.00 3.00 s
5 20.00 2.00 s
6 40.00 1.00 s
7 1.00 0.00 s
8 1.00 0.00 s
9 1.00 0.00 s
10 1.00 0.00 s
11 1.00 0.00 s
12 1.00 0.00 s
13 1.00 0.00 s
14 1.00 0.00 s
15 1.00 0.00 s
16 1.00 0.00 s
The dependent time setting error signal activates if interpolation with the given
points fails. See 6.6 Dependent operate time for more details.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 157
Limitations
The minimum definite time delay starts at the latest when the measured value is
twenty times the setting. However, there are limitations at high setting values due
Programmable delay curve
This table is an example of the programmable dependent time curve.
I in the curve y in the curve
Point I/ISTART Op time (s) Reciprocal of op

time
1 I1 1.00 10.00 y1 0.1
2 I2 2.00 9.00 y2 0.111111
3 I3 3.00 8.00 y3 0.125
4 4.00 7.00 0.142857
5 5.00 6.00 0.166667
6 6.00 5.00 0.2
7 7.00 4.00 0.25
8 10.00 1.00 1.00
Curve 1 for the first three points, point 1, point 2 and point 3, is like this.
4 * ( I I1
(
x=
I3
y = ax bx 2 y1
Using the first three points, we can then get the coefficients a, b.
158 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
I 3 * ( y21 * I 312 y31 * I 212 (

a=
4 * I 21 * I 31 * I 32
4 a * I 3 * I 31 y31 * I 32
b=
16 * I 312
Note: I21 = I2 - I1,
y21 = y2 - y1
etc.
Thus, we get the formula for curve 1 among the first three points.
All the I/ISTART values between point 1 and point 3 can use this formula to get the
operate time.
In the same way, using point 3, point 4 and point 5, we can get another formula
for curve2 among these three points. In the formula, I3 takes the place of I1, I5
takes the place of I3, etc.
Using point 5, point 6 and point 7, we can get another formula for curve 3 among
these three points.
Like in the table, at last if there is only one point left, to get the curve between
point 7 and point 8, we must use point 6, point 7 and point 8 to get the formula.
But if the user only gives two points, like in the following table, then we get
another point this way.
I in the curve y in the curve
Point I/ISTART Op time (s) Reciprocal of op

time
1 I1 1.00 10.00 y1 0.1
I2 = (I1 + I3) / 2 = 5.5 y2 =(y1 + y3) / 2 =

0.55
2 I3 10.00 1.00 y3 1.0
In the end, there are two special things to clarify:
1. If you define N points in your curve, and when N is even, the curve for the test
point between N-2 and N-1 is defined by N-2, N-1, N, and not by N-3, N-2,
N-1.
2. If the test point current is lower than the first point, the operate time will be
equal to the first point. If the test point current is higher than the last point, the
operate time will be equal to the last point.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 159
6.7 Volts/hertz overexcitation protection Uf> (ANSI 24)
The saturation of any inductive network components like transformers, inductors,

motors and generators depends on the voltage and frequency. The lower the
frequency, the lower is the voltage at which the saturation begins.
The volts/hertz overexcitation protection stage is sensitive to the voltage/

frequency ratio instead of voltage only. Figure 85 shows the difference between
volts/hertz and a standard overvoltage function. The highest of the three line-to-
line voltages is used regardless of the voltage measurement mode (10.8 Voltage
measurement modes). By using line-to-line voltages, any line-to-neutral
overvoltages during earth faults have no effect. (The earth fault protection
functions take care of earth faults.)
The used net frequency is automatically adopted according to the local network
frequency.
Overexcitation protection is needed for generators that are excitated even during
startup and shutdown. If such a generator is connected to a unit transformer, also
the unit transformer needs volts/hertz overexcitation protection. Another
application is sensitive overvoltage protection of modern transformers with no flux
density margin in networks with unstable frequency.
This figure shows the difference between volts/hertz and normal overvoltage
protection. The volts/hertz characteristics on the left depend on the frequency,
while the standard overvoltage function on the right is insensitive to frequency.
The network frequency, 50 Hz or 60 Hz, is automatically adopted by the relay.
Figure 85 - Difference between volts/hertz and normal overvoltage protection
2.0
E 2.0
E 18
0
%
1.8 1.8
1.6 C 1.6 14
0%
140 %
1.4 1.4
1.2 1.2
C 0%
10
A 1.0
100 % A 1.0
0.8 0.8
0.6 0.6
0.4
D 0.4
0.2 0.2
D
30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72
OverVoltFreqChar VoltPerHerz
B B
A. Measured voltage (PU) D. OK area

B. Frequency (Hz ) E. Uf > setting
C. Trip area
Setting groups
There are four setting groups available for each stage.
Characteristics
Table 60 - Volts/hertz over-excitation protection Uf> (24)
Start setting range 100–200%
Operating time 0.3–300.0 s
160 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Start time Typically 200 ms
Reset time < 450 ms
Reset ratio 0.995
Inaccuracy:
- Starting U < 0.5% unit
f < 0.05 Hz
- Operating time at definite time function ±1% or ±150 ms
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 161
6.8 Synchrocheck (ANSI 25)

Description
The relay includes a function that checks the synchronism before giving or
enabling the circuit breaker close command. The function monitors the voltage
amplitude, frequency and phase angle difference between two voltages. Since
there are two stages available, it is possible to monitor three voltages. The
voltages can be busbar and line or busbar and busbar (bus coupler).
Figure 86 - Synchrocheck function
Close
Request
cmd
Side 1 U1= U2 & Sync fail
Side 2 f1 = f2
φ1 = φ2 & & CB close
Register
U1 event
U2 & ≥1 Sync OK
Timeout Settings Sync Voltage Bypass

mode mode
The synchrocheck stage includes two separate synchronism criteria that can be
used separately or combined:
• voltage only
• voltage, frequency, and phase
The voltage check simply compares voltage conditions of the supervised objects.
The supervised object is considered dead (not energized) when the measured
voltage is below the Udead setting limit. Similarly, the supervised object is
considered live (energized) when the measured voltage is above the Ulive setting
limit. Based on the measured voltage conditions and the selected voltage check
criteria, synchronism is declared.
When the network sections to be connected are part of the same network, the
frequency and phase are the same. Therefore, the voltage check criteria is safe to
use without frequency and phase check.
The frequency and phase check compares the voltages, frequency and phase of
the supervised objects. Synchronism is declared if the voltages are above the
Ulive limit and all three difference criteria are within the given limits. This
synchronism check is dynamic by nature, and the object close command is given
at a certain moment of time, depending on the selected mode of operation.
When two networks are running at slightly different frequencies, there is also a
phase difference between these two networks. Because of the different frequency,
the phase angle tends to rotate. The time for one cycle depends on the frequency
difference. The stress for electrical components is lowest when two networks are
connected at zero phase difference.
In the “Sync” mode, the circuit breaker closing is aimed at the moment of zero
phase difference. Therefore, the close command is advanced by the time defined
by the CB close time setting. In the “Async” mode, the circuit breaker closing is
162 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
aimed at the moment when the synchronism conditions are met, that is, when the
phase difference is within the given phase difference limit.
When two network sections to be connected are from different sources or
generators, the voltage criteria alone is not safe, so also frequency and phase
check must be used.
When two networks with different frequencies are to be connected, the request
timeout setting must be long enough to allow the synchronism criteria to be met.
For example, if the frequency difference is 0.1 Hz, the synchronism criteria is met
only once in ten seconds.
The synchrocheck stage starts from an object close command that generates a
request to close the selected circuit breaker (as per CONTROL SETTINGS view)
when the synchronism conditions are met. The synchrocheck stage provides a
"request" signal that is active from the stage start until the synchronism conditions
are met or the request timeout has elapsed. When the synchronism conditions
are not met within the request timeout, a “fail” pulse is generated. The fail pulse
has a fixed length of 200 ms. When the synchronism conditions are met in a
timely manner, the object close command is initiated for the selected object. This
signal is purely internal and not available outside the synchrocheck stage. When
the synchronism conditions are met, the “OK” signal is always active. The
activation of the bypass input bybasses the synchronism check and declares
synchronism at all times.
The request, OK, and fail signals are available in the output matrix.
The synchronized circuit breaker close execution order is shown in Figure 87.
Figure 87 - Synchrocheck execution order
1 2 3
A B C
4 5
A. Synchrocheck stage
B. Object
C. Circuit breaker (physical) as selected in the CB Object 1 or CB Object 2 setting in the
CONTROL SETTINGS view of the synchro-check stage.
NOTE: A synchronisim check is made only if a CB is selected in the

CONTROL SETTING view.
1. Object close command from mimic, digital inputs or communication protocol
2. Synchronism declared
3. Circuit breaker close command
4. Sync fail signal if request timeout elapsed before synchronism conditions met
5. Object fail signal if CB failed to operate
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 163
Figure 88 - Synchrocheck function principle
A B
1
C D
1. Sync request
2. Sync OK
3. Object close command
A. The object close command given (mimic or bus) actually only makes a sync request.
B. The sync request ends when the synchronism conditions are met and CB command is given or
if the request timeout elapsed.
C. If the request timeout elapsed before synchronism conditions are met, sync fail pulse is
generated.
D. Normal object close operation
The synchrocheck function is available when one of the following analog

measurement modules and a suitable measuring mode are in use:
Table 61 - Voltage measuring modes
Voltage measuring mode Number of synchrocheck stages
3LN+LLy 1
3LN+LNy 1
2LL+U0+LLy 1
2LL+U0+LNy 1
LL+U0+LLy+LLz 2
LN+U0+LNy+LNz 2
Connections for synchrocheck
The voltage used for synchrochecking is always line-to-line voltage U12 even
when UL1 is measured. The sychrocheck stage 1 always compares U12 with U12y.
The compared voltages for the stage 2 can be selected (U12/U12y, U12/U12z,
U12y/U12z). See 10.8 Voltage measurement modes.
NOTE: To perform its operation, the synchrocheck stage 2 converts the

voltages LNy and LNz to line-to-line voltage U12. As such, the measured
voltage for LNy and LNz must be U1-N.
NOTE: The wiring of the secondary circuits of voltage transformers to the

relay terminal depends on the selected voltage measuring mode.
See the synchrocheck stage's connection diagrams in 10.8 Voltage measurement

modes.
164 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Characteristics
Table 62 - Synchrocheck function Δf, ΔU, Δφ (25)
Input signal UA – UN
Synchrocheck mode (SMODE) Off; Async; Sync 39) 40) 41)
Voltage check mode (UMODE) DD; DL; LD; DD/DL; DD/LD; DL/LD;
DD/DL/LD 42) 43) 44) 45)
CB closing time 0.04–0.6 s
UDEAD limit setting 10–120% UN
ULIVE limit setting 10–120% UN
Frequency difference 0.01–1.00 Hz
Voltage difference 1–60% UN
Phase angle difference 2°–90°
Request timeout 0.1–600.0 s
Stage operation range 46.0–64.0 Hz
Reset ratio (U) 0.97
Inaccuracy:
- voltage ±3% UN
- frequency ±20 mHz
- phase angle ±2° (when Δf < 0.2 Hz, else ±5°)
- operate time ±1% or ±30 ms

39) Off – Frequency and phase criteria not in use
40) Async – dF, dU and d angle criteria are used. Circuit breaker close is aimed at the moment when
the phase angle is within phase angle difference limit. Slip frequency dF determines how much the
close command needs to be advanced to make the actual connection at the moment when the phase
angle is within the phase angle limit
41) Sync mode – d , d and d angle criteria are used. Circuit breaker close is aimed at the moment
F U
when the phase angle becomes zero. Slip frequency dF determines how much the close command
needs to be advanced to make the actual connection at zero phase angle.
42) The first letter refers to the reference voltage and the second letter to the comparison voltage.
43) D means that the side must be “dead” when closing (dead = The voltage is below the dead voltage
limit setting).
44) L means that the side must be “live” when closing (live = The voltage is higher than the live voltage
limit setting).
45) Example: DL mode for stage 1: The U12 side must be “dead” and the U12y side must be “live”.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 165
6.9 Undervoltage (ANSI 27)

Description
Undervoltage protection is used to detect voltage dips or sense abnormally low

voltages to trip or trigger load shedding or load transfer. The function measures
the three line-to-line voltages, and whenever the smallest of them drops below the
start setting of a particular stage, this stage starts and a start signal is issued. If
the fault situation remains on longer than the operate time delay setting, a trip
signal is issued.
Blocking during voltage transformer fuse failure
As all the protection stages, the undervoltage function can be blocked with any
internal or external signal using the block matrix. For example if the secondary
voltage of one of the measuring transformers disappears because of a fuse failure
(See the voltage transformer supervision function in 7.8 Voltage transformer
supervision (ANSI 60FL)). The blocking signal can also be a signal from the
custom logic (see 5.7 Logic functions).
Low-voltage self blocking
The stages can be blocked with a separate low-limit setting. With this setting, the
particular stage is blocked when the biggest of the three line-to-line voltages
drops below the given limit. The idea is to avoid unwanted tripping when the
voltage is switched off. If the operate time is less than 0.08 s, the blocking level
setting should not be less than 15% for the blocking action to be fast enough. The
self blocking can be disabled by setting the low-voltage block limit equal to zero.
Figure 89 - Example of low-voltage self blocking
A
K K K
I
B
C
J J
H J
D
G
L L F
A. ULLmax = max (U12, U23, U31)

B. Deadband
C. U< setting
D. Block limit
E. U< undervoltage state
F. Time
G. The maximum of the three line-to-line voltages ULLmax is below the block limit. This is not
regarded as an undervoltage situation.
H. The voltage ULLmax is above the block limit but below the start level. This is an undervoltage
situation.
I. The voltage is OK because it is above the start limit.
166 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
J. This is an undervoltage situation.

K. The voltage is OK.
L. The voltage ULLmax is under the block limit and this is not regarded as an undervoltage
situation.
Three independent stages
There are three separately adjustable stages: U<, U<< and U<<<. All these
stages can be configured for the definite time (DT) operation characteristic.
Setting groups
There are four setting groups available for all stages.
Characteristics
Table 63 - Undervoltage U< (27)
Input signal UL1 – UL3
Start value 20–120% UN (step 1%)
Definite time characteristic:
- Operate time 0.0846) – 300.00 s (step 0.02)
Hysteresis (reset ratio) 1.001–1.200 (0.1–20.0%, step 0.1%)
Self-blocking value of the undervoltage 0–80% UN
Release delay 0.06–300.00 s (step 0.02 s)
Reset time < 95 ms
Overshoot time < 50 ms
Reset ratio (Block limit) 0.5 V or 1.03 (3%)
Reset ratio 1.03 (depends on the hysteresis setting)
Inaccuracy:
- Starting ±3% of the set value
- Blocking ±3% of set value or ±0.5 V
- Operate time ±1% or ±30 ms

46) This
is the instantaneous time, that is, the minimum total operate time including the fault detection
time and the operate time of the trip contacts. Use the Accept zero delay setting in the protection
stage setting view in eSetup Easergy Pro to accept the zero operate time setting for the DT function.
Table 64 - Undervoltage U<< (27)
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 167
Reset time < 95 ms
Inaccuracy:

47) This
Table 65 - Undervoltage U<<< (27)

Reset time < 95 ms
Inaccuracy:

48) This
168 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
6.10 Positive sequence undervoltage (ANSI 27P)

This undervoltage function measures the positive sequence of the fundamental
frequency component U1 of the measured voltages (for calculation of U1, see 4.11
Symmetrical components). By using the positive sequence, all three phases are
supervised with one value and if the generator looses the connection to the
network (loss of mains), the undervoltage situation is detected faster than by
using just the lowest of the three line-to-line voltages.
Whenever the positive sequence voltage U1 drops below the start setting of a
particular stage, this stage activates and a start signal is issued. If the fault
situation remains on longer than the time defined in the operate time delay
setting, a trip signal is issued.
Blocking during VT fuse failure
Like all the protection stages, the undervoltage function can be blocked with any
internal or external signal using the block matrix, for example, if the secondary
voltage of one of the measuring transformers disappears because of a fuse failure
(See VT supervision function in 7.8 Voltage transformer supervision (ANSI
60FL)). The blocking signal can also be a signal from the user's logic (see 5.7
Logic functions).
Self-blocking at very low voltage
The stages are blocked when the voltage is below a separate low-voltage
blocking setting. With this setting, LVBlk, both stages are blocked when the
voltage U1 drops below the given limit. The idea is to avoid purposeless alarms
when the generator is not running. The LVBlk setting is common for both stages.
The selfblocking can not be disabled.
Temporary selfblocking at very low currents
Further the start can be delayed by using the setting I<Blk. When the maximum of
the three measured phase currents is less than 1% of the rated generator current,
this delay is enabled. The idea is to avoid purposeless alarms, when the
generator circuit breaker is open and the excitation is switched off. By setting the
delay equal to zero, this feature is disabled.
Initial selfblocking
When the voltage U1 has been below the block limit, the stages are blocked until
the start setting has been reached.
Figure 90 shows an example of low voltage selfblocking.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 169
Figure 90 - Positive sequence undervoltage state and block limit
A
K K K
I
B
C
J H
H J
D
G
L L F
A. ULLmax = max (U12, U23, G. The positive sequence voltage U1 is below the block limit. This is
U31) not regarded as an undervoltage situation.
B. Deadband H. The positive sequence voltage U1 is above the block limit but below
the start level. However, this is not regarded as an undervoltage
situation because the voltage has never been above the start level
since being below the block limit.
C. U< setting I. The voltage is OK because it is above the start limit.
D. Block limit J. This is an undervoltage situation.
E. U< undervoltage state K. The voltage is OK.
F. Time L. The voltage is below the block limit and this is not regarded as an
undervoltage situation.
Two independent stages
There are two separately adjustable stages: U1< and U1<< . Both stages can be
configured for definite time (DT) operate characteristic.
Setting groups
Characteristic
Table 66 - Positive sequence undervoltage stages U1<, U1<< (27P)
Start value 20 – 120% x UN
Definite time function:
- Operate time 0.0849) – 300.00 s
Undervoltage blocking 2–100% x UN (common for both stages)
- Blocking time, when I< 1% x IGN 2–100% x UGN (common for both stages)
0–30 s (common for both stages)
Reset time <95 ms
170 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Reset ratio 1.05
Inaccuracy:
- Starting 1% unit

49) This
is the instantaneous time i.e. the minimum total operational time including the fault detection
time and operate time of the trip contacts.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 171
6.11 Negative sequence overcurrent (ANSI 46)

Description
Negative sequence overcurrent protects against unbalanced phase currents and

single phasing. The protection is based on the negative sequence current. Both
definite time and dependent time characteristics are available. The dependent
delay is based on Equation 18. Only the base frequency components of the
phase currents are used to calculate the negative sequence value I2.
The negative sequence overcurrent protection is based on the negative sequence

of the base frequency phase currents. Both definite time and dependent time
characteristics are available.
Dependent time delay
The dependent time delay is based on the following equation:
Equation 18
K1
T= 2
 
 I 2  − K 22
I 
 TN 
T = Operate time
K1 = Delay multiplier
I2 = Measured and calculated negative sequence phase current of fundamental

frequency
ITN = Rated current of the transformer
K2 = Start setting I2 > in pu. The maximum allowed degree of unbalance.
Example
K1 = 15 s
I2 = 22.9 % = 0.229 x ITN
K2 = 5 % = 0.05 x ITN
15
t= 2
= 300.4
 0.229 
  − 0.05
2
 1 
The operate time in this example is five minutes.
More stages (definite time delay only)
If more than one definite time delay stages are needed for negative sequence
overcurrent protection, the freely programmable stages can be used (6.33
Programmable stages (ANSI 99)).
172 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 91 - Dependent operation delay of negative sequence overcurrent I2 >

(ANSI 46). The longest delay is limited to 1000 seconds (=16min 40s).
CurrentUnbalanceChar
2000
1000
500 K2 = 2 % K 2 = 40 % K 2 = 70 %
200
100 K1 = 50 s
A 50
K2 = 2 % K 2 = 40 % K 2 = 70 %
20
10
5
K1 = 1 s
2
1
0 20 40 60 80 100
B
A. Operate time (s) B. Negative sequence current I2%
Setting groups
There are four setting groups available.
Characteristics
Table 67 - Negative sequence overcurrent I2 > (46) in motor mode I’2>(46)
Input signal IL1 – IL3
Start value 2–70% (step 1%)
- Operate time 1.0–600.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Dependent time characteristic:
- 1 characteristic curve Inv
- Time multiplier 1–50 s (step 1)
- Upper limit for dependent time 1000 s
Reset time < 450 ms
Reset ratio 0.95
Inaccuracy:
- Starting ±1% - unit
NOTE: The stage is operational when all secondary currents are above 250
mA.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 173
6.12 Negative sequence overvoltage protection (ANSI 47)

Description
This protection stage can be used to detect voltage unbalance and phase
reversal situations. It calculates the fundamental frequency value of the negative
sequence component U2 based on the measured voltages (for calculation of U2,
see 4.11 Symmetrical components).
Whenever the negative sequence voltage U2 raises above the user's start setting
of a particular stage, this stage starts, and a start signal is issued. If the fault
situation remains on longer than the user's operate time delay setting, a trip signal
is issued.
Blocking during VT fuse failure
Like all the protection stages, the negative sequence overvoltage can be blocked
with any internal or external signal using the block matrix, for example, if the
secondary voltage of one of the measuring transformers disappears because of a
fuse failure (See VT supervision function in 7.8 Voltage transformer supervision
(ANSI 60FL)).
The blocking signal can also be a signal from the user's logic (see 5.7 Logic
functions).
There are three separately adjustable stages: U2>, U2>>, and U2>>>. Both stages
can be configured for the definite time (DT) operation characteristic.
Setting groups
There are four settings groups available for all stages. Switching between setting
groups can be controlled by digital inputs, virtual inputs (mimic display,
communication, logic) and manually.
Characteristics
Table 68 - Negative sequence overvoltage protection U2> (47)
Start value: U2>, U2>>, U2>>> 2–120%
Operate time 0.08–300 s
Reset ratio 0.95
Inaccuracy:
174 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
6.13 Thermal overload (ANSI 49 RMS)

Description
The thermal overload function protects the transformer against excessive

temperatures.
Thermal model
The temperature is calculated using RMS values of phase currents and a thermal
model according IEC60255-149. The RMS values are calculated using harmonic
components up to the 15th.
Trip time:
I2 − I
2
t = τ ⋅ ln 2 P2
I −a
Alarm (alarm 60% = 0.6):
a = k ⋅ kΘ ⋅ I TN ⋅ alarm
Trip:
a = k ⋅ kΘ ⋅ I TN
Reset time:
2
IP
t = τ ⋅ Cτ ⋅ ln
a − I2
2
Trip release:
a = 0.95 × k × I TN
Start release (alarm 60% = 0.6):
a = 0.95 × k × I TN × alarm
T = Operate time
= Thermal time constant tau (setting value). Unit: minute
ln = Natural logarithm function
I =Measured RMS phase current (the max. value of three phase currents)
k = Overload factor (Maximum continuous current), i.e. service factor (setting

value).
kΘ = Ambient temperature factor (permitted current due to tamb).
Ip = Preload current, I P = θ × k × I TN (If temperature rise is 120% -> θ = 1.2). This

parameter is the memory of the algorithm and corresponds to the actual
temperature rise.
ITN = The rated current of the transformer
Cτ = Relay cooling time constant (setting value)
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 175
Time constant for cooling situation
If the transformer's fan is stopped, the cooling will be slower than with an active
fan. Therefore there is a coefficient Cτ for thermal constant available to be used
as cooling time constant, when current is less than 0.3 x ITN.
Heat capacitance, service factor and ambient temperature
The trip level is determined by the maximum allowed continuous current IMAX
corresponding to the 100% temperature rise ΘTRIP for example the heat
capacitance of the transformer. IMAX depends of the given service factor k and
ambient temperature ΘAMB and settings IMAX40 and IMAX70 according the following
equation.
I MAX = k ⋅ k Θ ⋅ I TN
The value of ambient temperature compensation factor kΘ depends on the

ambient temperature ΘAMB and settings IMAX40 and IMAX70. See Figure 92.
Ambient temperature is not in use when kΘ = 1. This is true when
• IMAX40 is 1.0
• Samb is “n/a” (no ambient temperature sensor)
• ΘAMB is +40 °C.
Figure 92 - Ambient temperature correction of the overload stage T>
k
1.2
IMAX40
1.0
0.8 IMAX70
0.6
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 (°C)
AMB
50 68 86 104 122 140 158 176 (°F)
Example of the thermal model behavior
Figure 92 shows an example of the thermal model behavior. In this example, =

30 minutes, k = 1.06 and kΘ = 1 and the current has been zero for a long time
and thus the initial temperature rise is 0%. At time = 50 minutes, the current
changes to 0.85 x ITN and the temperature rise starts to approach value
(0.85/1.06)2 = 64% according to the time constant. At time = 300 min, the
temperature is nearly stable, and the current increases to 5% over the maximum
defined by the rated current and the service factor k. The temperature rise starts
to approach value 110%. At about 340 minutes, the temperature rise is 100% and
a trip follows.
176 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Initial temperature rise after restart
When the relay is switched on, an initial temperature rise of 70% is used.
Depending on the actual current, the calculated temperature rise then starts to
approach the final value.
Alarm function
The thermal overload stage is provided with a separately settable alarm function.
When the alarm limit is reached, the stage activates its start signal.
Figure 93 - Example of the thermal model behavior

thermbeh
Temperature rise
Θoverload
Θmax
Θalarm
Reset ratio=95%
Θp
Settings:
τ = 30 minutes
k = 1.06
Θalarm = 90%
Alarm
Trip
I/IN 1.6 min

IMAX = k*IN IOVERLOAD = 1.05*IMAX
45 min
IP = 0.85*IN
Time
100 min 200 min 300 min 400 min 500 min
Setting groups
This stage has one setting group.
Characteristics
Table 69 - Thermal overload (49T)

Maximum continuous current 0.1–2.40 x ITN
Alarm setting range 60–99% (step 1%)
Time constant τ 2–180 min (step 1)
Cooling time coefficient 1.0–10.0 x τ (step 0.1)
Max. overload at +40°C 70–120 %ITN (step 1)
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 177
Max. overload at +70°C 50–100 %ITN (step 1)
Ambient temperature -55 – 125°C (step 1°)
Reset ratio (Start & trip) 0.95
Operate time inaccuracy Relative inaccuracy ±5% or absolute

inaccuracy 1 s of the theoretical value
178 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
6.14 Breaker failure (ANSI 50BF)

Description
The circuit breaker failure protection stage (CBFP) can be used to operate any
upstream circuit breaker (CB) if the programmed output matrix signals, selected
to control the main breaker, have not disappeared within a given time after the
initial command. The supervised output contact is defined by the “Monitored Trip
Relay” setting. An alternative output contact of the relay must be used for this
backup control selected in the Output matrix setting view.
The CBFP operation is based on the supervision of the signal to the selected
output contact and the time. The following output matrix signals, when
programmed into use, start the CBFP function:
• protection functions
• control functions
• supporting functions
• GOOSE signals (through communication)
If the signal is longer than the CBFP stage’s operate time, the stage activates
another output contact defined in the Output matrix setting view. The output
contact remains activated until the signal resets. The CBFP stage supervises all
the signals assigned to the same selected output contact.
In Figure 94, both the trip and CBFP start signals activate simultaneously (left
picture). If T> trip fails to control the CB through T1, the CBFP activates T3 after
the breaker failure operate time.
Figure 94 - Trip and CBFP start signals in the Output matrix view
NOTE: For the CBFP, always select the ”Connected” crossing symbol in the
Output matrix setting view.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 179
Characteristics
Table 70 - Breaker failure (50BF)
Relay to be supervised T1–T4 (depending on the order code)
Inaccuracy:
- Operate time ±20 ms
180 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
6.15 Breaker failure 1 and 2 (ANSI 50BF)

PowerLogic P3 has two identical Breaker failure 1 (ANSI 50BF) and Breaker
failure 2 (ANSI 50BF) stages.
Description
Power system protection should always have some sort of backup protection
available. Backup protection is intended to operate when a power system fault is
not cleared or an abnormal condition is not detected in the required time because
of a failure or the inability of the primary protection to operate or failure of the
appropriate circuit breakers to trip. Backup protection may be local or remote.
Circuit breaker failure protection (CBFP) is part of the local backup protection.
CBFP provides a backup trip signal to an upstream circuit breaker (CB) when the
CB nearest to fault fails to clear fault current. The CB may fail to operate for
several reasons, for example burnt open coil or a flashover in the CB.
Figure 95 - CBFP implementation
A. CBFP trip C. Re-trip

B. Normal trip
Two separate stages are provided to enable re-trip and CBFP trip commands.
The first stage can be used to give re-trip command (for example to control
second/backup open coil of the main CB) while the second stage can give
dedicated CBFP trip command to an upstream circuit breaker. Select the required
outputs for re-trip and CBFP trip through the output matrix.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 181
Block diagram
Figure 96 - Breaker failure 2 operation
A I
IL1
IL2 Imax > &
& J
IL3
I0 > & ≥ t K
B
C & & J
D
&
E
F G H
A. Condition 1 G. Delay setting

B. Condition 2 H. Enable events setting
C. Condition 3 I. Start
D. Condition 4 J. Event register
E. Block K. Trip
F. Zero-current setting
CBFP operation
The CBFP function can be enabled and disabled with the Enable for BF2
selection. The CBFP function activates when any of the selected start signals
becomes and stays active.
The CBFP operation can be temporarily blocked by the stage block signal from
the block matrix. When the stage is blocked by the block signal, the stage timer
stops but it does not reset. The stage timer continues its operation when the block
signal is disabled. When the block signal is active, the stage output signals are
disabled.
The CBFP stage provides the following events:

• start on
• start off
• trip on
• trip off
Events can be activated via the Enable events setting view.
Condition selectors
The CBFP function has four condition selectors that can be used separately or all
together to activate and reset the CBFP function.
The four condition selectors are almost identical. The only difference is that
condition selectors 1 and 2 are for all protection functions that benefit from zero-
current detection for resetting the CBFP as described in section Zero-current
detector, and selectors 3 and 4 are for all the protection functions that do not
benefit from zero-current detection for CBFP.
182 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Condition selector 4 can be used to support selectors 1, 2 and 3. For example, if

there are too many stages to be monitored in condition set 1, condition selector 4
can be used to monitor the output contacts. Monitoring digital inputs is also
possible if the backup protection is based on external current relay, for example.
The only CBFP reset criteria for condition set 4 are the monitored input and
output signals.
The monitoring conditions are enabled by default. It can be enabled or disabled

by setting the Enable monitoring parameter to control the monitoring status.
For monitoring condition 1~3, user can set 6 protection stages at most for each
monitoring condition. Once the stages monitored trips, 50BF-1/2 starts
immediately to check the CB and current status.
For monitoring condition 4, user can set 3 monitoring outputs and inputs for
monitoring needs. 50BF-1/2 can also be reset by these signals.
The user can reset the 50BF-1/2 by CB status if the CB parameter is set for all
conditions. 50BF-1/2 can also be reset by monitored stage for condition 1~3. Zero
current criteria can be used to reset condition 1 while zero EF current criteria can
be used to reset condition 2.
Figure 97 - Start signal and reset condition setting view for Condition 1
Separate zero-current detection with dedicated start settings exists for phase
overcurrent and earth fault overcurrent signals. Zero-current detection is
independent of the protection stages.
The condition criteria, available signals and reset conditions are listed in Table 71.
NOTE: The start signal can be selected for each condition in advance from
the pull-down menu even if the concerned stage is not enabled. For the CBFP
activation, the concerned stage must be enabled from the protection stage
menu and the stage has to start to activate the CBFP start signal.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 183
Table 71 - CBFP condition selectors
Criteria Start signal Reset condition
Condition 1 I>, I>>, I>>>, Iv>, I2>, dI>, Reset by CB status: DI1 –
dI>>, Iφ>, Iφ>>, Iφ>>>, DIx (1, F1, F2, VI1-20,
Iφ>>>>, T>, If2>, X<, X<<, VO1–20, GOOSE_NI1–64,
I’>, I’>>, If5, SOTF POC1–16, Obj1-8Op
Monitored stage: On/Off

Condition 2 Io>, Io>>, Io>>>, Io>>>>,
Io>>>>>, Ioφ>, Ioφ>>, Zero-current detection:
Ioφ>>>, dIo>, dIo>> On/Off
Condition 3 Uof3<, U>, U>>, U>>>, U<, Reset by CB status: DI1 –

U<<, U<<<, U1<, U1<<, DIx (1, F1, F2, VI1-20,
Uo>, Uo>>, P<, P<<, Q<, VO1–20, GOOSE_NI1–64,
Z<, Z<<, Pgr1-8, f<, f<<, fx, POC1–16, Obj1-8Op
fxx, df/dt, Uf>, Pslip
Monitored stage: On/Off
Condition 4 Outputs: A1, T1-Tx (1
Inputs: DI1 – DIx (1, F1, F2,

VI1-20, VO1 – 20,
GOOSE_NI1 – 64, POC1 –
16
Arc sensor 3- 10, ArcStg1-8,

I>int, Io>int
In addition to the selection of the start signal, the CBFP reset condition needs to
be selected.
If no reset conditions are selected, the stage uses Reset by monitored stage as
the reset condition. This prevents a situation where the stage never releases.
The reset condition Reset by CB status is useful if the current is already zero
when the CB is opened (for example unloaded CB).
When more than one selection criteria are selected, AND condition is used, for
example “zero current detection” AND “object open”. See Figure 96 for details.
Stage timer
The operate delay timer is started by a signal activated by the monitored stages
(condition selectors). The operate time delay is a settable parameter. When the
given time delay has elapsed, the stage provides a trip signal through the output
matrix and the event codes.
The timer delay can be set between 0.04 s and 10.00 s.
Zero-current detector
The zero-current detector is an undercurrent condition to reset the CBFP function

when all phase currents are below the start (pick-up) setting value. This separate
undercurrent condition is needed to properly detect successful CB operation. For
example, in a CB failure condition where one or more CB poles are partly
conducting when the CB is open, the fault current can be small enough to reset
the primary protection stage (for example overcurrent stage), in which case the
CBFP does not operate. When a separate undercurrent limit is used, CBFP reset
184 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
can be performed only when the fault current really is zero or near zero instead of
relying on the protection stage reset.
Figure 98 - Zero-current detector setting view
The setting range of the zero-current detector is always associated with the CT
nominal value, even in case of motor and transformer protection. The setting
range minimum depends on the relay accuracy. Instead of zero, a small minimum
value can be accepted. See Table 72.
CBFP coordination
The CBFP delay setting has to be coordinated according to the CB operation time
and the reset time of protection stages monitored by the CBFP function as
described in Figure 99.
Figure 99 - CBFP coordination
B
C E F
D G
A
H I
A. Fault occurrence F. Protection stage reset time + safety margin

B. Normal fault clearing time G. CBFP trip
C. Protection delay H. CBFP stage operate delay (CB operate time + protection stage
reset time + safety margin)
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 185
D. CBFP stage start I. CB operate time

E. CB operate time J. Total fault clearing time in case of failed CB operation but
successful CBFP operation
Characteristics
Table 72 - Breaker failure (ANSI 50BF)
Zero-current detection:
- Phase overcurrent 0.05–0.2 x In
- Earth fault overcurrent 0.005–20 x p.u.
- Operate time 0.04–10 s
Inaccuracy:
- Operate time ±20 ms
186 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
6.16 Switch-on-to-fault (ANSI 50HS)

Description
The switch-on-to-fault (SOTF) protection function offers fast protection when the
circuit breaker (CB) is closed manually against a faulty line. Overcurrent-based
protection does not clear the fault until the intended time delay has elapsed.
SOTF gives a trip signal without additional time delay if the CB is closed and a
fault is detected after closing the CB.
Figure 100 - Switch-on-to-fault function operates when the CB has detected open
and the fault current reaches start setting value
E
A
G
B
C
F
D
A. Start setting
B. Maximum of IL1, IL2, IL3
C. Low limit 0.02 x IN
D. SOTF trip
E. Switch-on-to-fault does not activate if the CB has not been in open position before the fault.
Open CB detection is noticed from the highest phase current value which has to be under a fixed
low-limit threshold (0.02 x IN). Opening of the CB can be detected also with digital inputs (Dead
line detection input = DI1 – DIx, VI1 – VIx). The default detection input is based on the current
threshold, so the dead line detection input parameter has value “–“.
F. Dead line detection delay defines how long the CB has to be open so that the SOTF function is
active. If the set time delay is not fulfilled and the highest phase current value (maximum of IL1, IL2,
IL3) rises over the start setting, the SOTF does not operate.
G.If the highest phase current value of IL1, IL2, IL3 goes successfully under the low limit and rises to
a value between the low limit and the start value, then if the highest phase current value rises over
the start setting value before the set SOTF active after CB closure time delay has elapsed, the
SOTF trips. If this time delay is exceeded, the SOTF does not trip even if the start setting value is
exceeded.
Setting groups
Characteristics
Table 73 - Switch-on-to-fault SOTF (50HS)
Current input IL or I’L
Start value 1.00–15.00 x IN (step 0.01)
Dead line detection delay 0.00–60.00 s (step 0.01)
SOTF active after CB closure 0.10–60.00 s (step 0.01)
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 187
Operate time < 30 ms (When IM/ISET ratio > 1.5)
Reset time < 95 ms
Reset ratio 0.97
Inaccuracy ±3% of the set value or 5 mA secondary
188 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
6.17 Phase overcurrent (ANSI 50/51)

Description
Phase overcurrent protection is used against short-circuit faults and heavy

overloads.
The overcurrent function measures the fundamental frequency component of the

phase currents. The protection is sensitive to the highest of the three phase
currents. Whenever this value exceeds the user's start setting of a particular
stage, this stage starts and a start signal is issued. If the fault situation remains on
longer than the operation delay setting, a trip signal is issued.
For the fastest operation delay (30 ms), the sample based operating quantity is
used for stage start instead of fundamental frequency component. Sample based
value allows faster stage start, resulting faster trip time. The sample based
operating quantity is more sensitive for the transient DC component that the
fundamental frequency component.
Block diagram
Figure 101 - Block diagram of the three-phase overcurrent stage I>
3vlsblock
Im1
Im2 MAX > ts tr
& H
Im3
& I
A t
>1 J
& I
B C D E F G
A. Block F. Multiplier
B. Setting I>s G. Enable events
C. Delay H. Start
D. Definite / dependent time I. Register event
E. Dependent time characteristics J. Trip
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 189
Figure 102 - Block diagram of the three-phase overcurrent stage I>> and I>>>
3vIssblock
Im1
Im2 MAX > & E
Im3 ts tr
& F
A
t
G
& F
B C D
A. Block E. Start
B. Setting I>>s F. Register event
C. Delay G. Trip
D. Enable events
There are three separately adjustable overcurrent stages: I>, I>> and I>>>. The
first stage I> can be configured for definite time (DT) or dependent operate time
(IDMT) characteristic. The stages I>> and I>>> have definite time operation
characteristic. By using the definite delay type and setting the delay to its
minimum, an instantaneous (ANSI 50) operation is obtained.
Figure 101 shows a functional block diagram of the I> overcurrent stage with
definite time and dependent time operate time. Figure 102 shows a functional
block diagram of the I>> and I>>> overcurrent stages with definite time operation
delay.
Dependent operate time
Dependent operate time means that the operate time depends on the amount the
measured current exceeds the start setting. The bigger the fault current is, the
faster is the operation. The dependent time delay types are described in 6.6
Dependent operate time. The relay shows the currently used dependent operate
time curve graph on the local panel display.
The maximum measured secondary current is 50 x IN. This limits the scope of
dependent curves with high start settings. See 6.6 Dependent operate time for
more information.
Include harmonics setting
The I> and I>> (50/51) overcurrent protection stages have a setting parameter to
include harmonics. When this setting is activated, the overcurrent stage
190 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
calculates the sum of the base frequency and all measured harmonics. This
feature is used to determine the signal's true root mean square value to detect the
signal's real heating factor. The operate time is 5 ms more when harmonics are
included in the measurement. Activate the "Include harmonics" setting if the
overcurrent protection is used for thermal protection and the content of the
harmonics is known to exist in the power system.
Cold load and inrush current handling
See 7.3 Cold load start and magnetizing inrush.
Setting groups
Characteristics
Table 74 - Phase overcurrent stage I> (50/51)
Start value 0.05–5.00 x ITN (step 0.01)
Definite time function: DT50)
IDMT function:
- Delay curve family (DT), IEC, IEEE, RI Prg
- Curve type EI, VI, NI, LTI, MI…, depends on the
- Inv. time coefficient k family51)
- RI curve 0.025–20.0
0.025–20.0
Start time 40 ms at 2 * Is pick-up value
Reset time < 95 ms
Reset ratio 0.97
Transient overreach, any τ < 10%
Inaccuracy:
- Starting ±3% of the set value or 0.005 In52)
- Operate time at definite time function ±1% or ±25 ms
- Operate time at IDMT function ±5% or at least ±25ms

50) This is the instantaneous time, that is, the minimum total operate time including the fault detection
51) EI = Extremely Inverse, NI = Normal Inverse, VI = Very Inverse, LTI = Long Time Inverse, MI=
Moderately Inverse
52) In equals to rated primary current of the current transformer or rated primary current of LPCT
sensor.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 191
Table 75 - Phase overcurrent stage I>> (50/51)
Start value 0.10 – 20.00 x ITN (step 0.01)
- Operate time 0.04 – 1800.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Reset time < 95 ms
Reset ratio 0.97
Transient overreach, any τ < 10%
Inaccuracy:
±3% of the set value or 0.005 In54)
- Starting
±1% or ±25 ms
- operate time
sensor.
Table 76 - Phase overcurrent stage I>>> (50/51)
Start value 0.10–40.00 x ITN (step 0.01)
Instant operate time:
IM / ISET ratio > 1.5 <30 ms
IM / ISET ratio 1.03 – 1.5 < 50 ms
Reset time < 95 ms
192 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Reset ratio 0.97
Inaccuracy:
- Operate time DT (IM/ISET ratio > 1.5) ±1% or ±15 ms
- Operate time DT (IM/ISET ratio 1.03 – 1.5) ±1% or ±25 ms

sensor.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 193
6.18 Earth fault overcurrent (ANSI 50N/51N)

Description
The purpose of the nondirectional earth fault overcurrent protection is to detect

earth faults in low-impedance earthed networks. In high-impedance earthed
networks, compensated networks and isolated networks, nondirectional earth
fault overcurrent can be used as backup protection.
The nondirectional earth fault overcurrent function is sensitive to the fundamental

frequency component of the earth fault overcurrent 3I0. The attenuation of the
third harmonic is more than 60 dB. Whenever this fundamental value exceeds the
start setting of a particular stage, this stage starts and a start signal is issued. If
the fault situation remains on longer than the operate time delay setting, a trip
signal is issued.
Block diagram
Figure 103 - Block diagram of the earth fault stage overcurrent I0>
i0s1
A > & I
ts tr
& J
B t
>1 K
& J
C D E F G H
A. I0 G. Multiplier
B. Block H. Enable events
C. Setting I0>s I. Start
D. Delay J. Register event
E. Definite / inverse time K. Trip
F. Inverse time characteristics
194 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 104 - Block diagram of the earth fault stages overcurrent I0>>, I0>>>,
I0>>>>
I0ssblock
A > ts tr
& F
& G
B
t
H
& G
C D E
A. I0 E. Enable events
B. Block F. Start
C. Setting I0>>s G. Register event
D. Delay H. Trip
Input signal selection
Each stage can be connected to supervise any of the following inputs and signals:
• Input I01 for all networks other than solidly earthed.
• Calculated signal I0 Calc for solidly and low-impedance earthed networks.. I0
Calc = IL1 + IL2 + IL3.
Four or six independent nondirectional earth fault overcurrent stages
There are four separately adjustable earth fault overcurrent stages: I0>, I0>>,
I0>>>, and I0>>>>. The first stage I0> can be configured for definite time (DT) or
dependent time operation characteristic (IDMT). The other stages have definite
time operation characteristic. By using the definite delay type and setting the
delay to its minimum, an instantaneous (ANSI 50N) operation is obtained.
Using the directional earth fault overcurrent stages (6.25 Directional earth fault
overcurrent (ANSI 67N)) in nondirectional mode, three more stages with
dependent operate time delay are available for nondirectional earth fault
The maximum measured secondary earth fault overcurrent is 10 x I0N and the
maximum measured phase current is 50 x IN. This limits the scope of dependent
curves with high start settings.
Setting groups
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 195
Characteristics
Table 77 - Earth fault overcurrent I0> (50N/51N)
Input signal I01, I02
I0 Calc = (IL1 + IL2 + IL3)
Start value 0.005–8.00 pu (when I01 or I 02 ) (step

0.001)
0.005–20.0 pu (when I0 Calc)
- Operate time 0.0457) –300.00 s (step 0.01 s)
IDMT function:
- Curve type EI, VI, NI, LTI, MI..., depends on the
0.025–20.0, except
0.50–20.0 for RXIDG, IEEE and IEEE2
Reset time < 95 ms
Reset ratio 0.95
Inaccuracy:
- Starting (Peak mode) ±5% of the set value or ±2% of the rated
value (Sine wave <65 Hz)
- Operate time at IDMT function ±5% or at least ±25 ms 57)
Moderately Inverse
sensor.
Table 78 - Earth fault overcurrent I0>>, I0>>>, I0>>>>, I0>>>>> (50N/51N)
Input signal I01, I02
I0 Calc = (IL1 + IL2 + IL3)
Start value 0.01–8.00 pu (When I01 or I02) (step 0.01)
0.005–20.0 pu (When I0 Calc) (step 0.01)
- Operate time 0.04 60) – 300.00 s (step 0.01 s)
196 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Start time Typically 45 ms (I0>>, I0>>>, I0>>>>)
30 ms at 2 * Is pick-up value (I0>>>>>)
Reset time <95 ms
Reset ratio 0.95
Inaccuracy:
- Starting (Peak mode) ±5% of the set value or ±2% of the rated
value (Sine wave <65 Hz)
sensor.
6.18.1 Earth fault faulty phase detection algorithm
The earth fault overcurrent stage (ANSI 50N/51N) and directional earth fault
overcurrent stage (ANSI 67N) have an inbuilt detection algorithm to detect a faulty
phase. This algorithm is meant to be used in radial-operated distribution
networks. The faulty phase detection can be used in solidly-earthed, impedance-
earthed or resonant-earthed networks.
Operation
The faulty phase detection starts from the earth fault stage trip. At the moment of
stage start, the phase currents measured prior to start are registered and stored
as prior-to-fault currents. At the moment of trip, phase currents are registered
again. Finally, faulty phase detection algorithm is performed by comparing prior-
to-fault currents to fault currents. The algorithm also uses positive sequence
current and negative sequence current to detect faulty phase.
The detection algorithm can be enabled and disabled by selecting or unselecting

a checkbox in the protection stage settings. Correct network earthing
configuration must be selected in the stage settings, too. In the earth fault
overcurrent stage settings, you can select between RES and CAP network
earthing configuration. This selection has no effect on the protection itself, only on
the faulty phase detection. In the directional earth fault overcurrent stage settings,
the detection algorithm uses the same network earthing type as selected for
protection. RES is used for solidly-earthed, impedance-earthed and resonant-
earthed networks. CAP is only used for isolated networks.
The detected faulty phase is registered in the protection stage fault log (and also
in the event list and alarm screen). Faulty phase is also indicated by a line alarm
and line fault signals in the output matrix.
Possible detections of faulty phases are L1-N, L2-N, L3-N, L1-L2-N, L1-L3-N, L2-
L3-N, L1-L2-L3-N, and REV. If the relay protection coordination is incorrect, REV
indication is given in case of a relay sympathetic trip to a reverse fault.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 197
6.19 Capacitor bank unbalance (ANSI 51C)

NOTE: Configure the capacitor bank unbalance protection through the earth
fault overcurrent stages I0>>> and I0>>>>.
Description
The relay enables capacitor, filter and reactor bank protection with its five current
measurement inputs. The fifth input is typically useful for unbalance current
measurement of a double-wye connected unearthed bank.
The relay enables capacitor, filter and reactor bank protection with its five current
measurement inputs. The fifth input is typically useful for unbalance current
measurement of a double-wye connected ungrounded bank.
The unbalance protection is highly sensitive to internal faults of a bank because of

the sophisticated natural unbalance compensation. The location method enables
easy maintenance monitoring for a bank.
This protection scheme is specially used in double-wye-connected capacitor

banks. The unbalance current is measured with a dedicated current transformer
(like 5A/5A) between two starpoints of the bank.
As the capacitor elements are not identical and have acceptable tolerances, there
is a natural unbalance current between the starpoints of the capacitor banks. This
natural unbalance current can be compensated to tune the protection sensitive
against real faults inside the capacitor banks.
Figure 105 - Typical capacitor bank protection application with PowerLogic P3

relays
P3x3x_Capbank
8/E/1:1
IL1 5A
8/E/1:2
8/E/1:3
IL2 5A
8/E/1:4
8/E/1:5
IL3 5A
8/E/1:6
8/E/1:7 I01 5A
8/E/1:8
I01 1A
8/E/1:9
8/E/1:10 I02 1A
8/E/1:11
I02 0,2A
8/E/1:12
255
Compensation method
The method of unbalance protection is to compensate for the natural unbalance

current. The compensation is triggered manually when commissioning. The
phasors of the unbalance current and one phase current are then recorded. This
is because one polarizing measurement is needed. When the phasor of the
unbalance current is always related to IL1, the frequency changes or deviations
have no effect on the protection. After the recording, the measured unbalance
current corresponds to the zero-level and therefore, the setting of the stage can
be very sensitive.
198 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Compensation and location
The most sophisticated method is to use the compensation method described

above with an add-on feature that locates the branch of each faulty element (the
broken fuse).
This feature is implemented to the stage I0>>>>, while the other stage I0>>> can
still function as normal unbalance protection stage with the compensation
method. Normally, the I0>>>> could be set as an alarming stage while stage I0>>>
trips the circuit breaker.
The stage I 0>>>> should be set based on the calculated unbalance current
change of one faulty element. You can calculate this using the following formula:
Equation 19
U L− N U L− N
−
(2 ⋅ π ⋅ f ⋅ C1 ) −1
(2 ⋅ π ⋅ f ⋅ C2 ) −1
3I 0 =
3
C1 = Capacitor unit capacitance (μF)
C2 = Capacitor unit capacitance, after one element fails (μF)

However, the setting must be 10% smaller than the calculated value, since there
are some tolerances in the primary equipment as well as in the relay
measurement circuit. Then, the time setting of I0>>>> is not used for tripping
purposes. The time setting specifies, how long the relay must wait until it is
certain that there is a faulty element in the bank. After this time has elapsed, the
stage I0>>>> makes a new compensation automatically, and the measured
unbalance current for this stage is now zero. Note, the automatic compensation
does not affect the measured unbalance current of stage I0>>>.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 199
Figure 106 - Natural unbalance compensation and a single capacitor fault
90
3I0
A
180 0
B
270
A. The natural unbalance is compensated for.

B. When the I0 current increases above the set start value (normally 90% of a single capacitor
unit) according to the angle ratio between I0 and IL1, it is decided in which branch and phase the
fault occurred. The fault is memorised and compensation is completed automatically. After the set
amount of faults, the stage trips.
If there is an element failure in the bank, the algorithm checks the phase angle of
the unbalance current related to the phase angle of the phase current IL1. Based
on this angle, the algorithm can increase the corresponding faulty elements
counter (there are six counters).
Figure 107 - How a failure in different branches of the bank affects the I0
measurement
Easergy P3 H I
G C
A B
F D
E
A. Branch 1 F. Phase 2 fault in branch 1

B. Branch 2 G. Phase 1 fault in branch 2
C. IL1 as reference H. Phase 3 fault in branch 1
D. Phase 1 fault in branch 1 I. Phase 2 fault in branch 2
E. Phase 3 fault in branch 2
You can set for the stage I0>>>> the allowed number of faulty elements. For
example, if set to three elements, the fourth fault element will issue the trip signal.
The fault location is used with internal fused capacitor and filter banks. There is
no need to use it with fuseless or external fused capacitor and filter banks, nor
with the reactor banks.
200 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Application example
An application example is presented below. Each capacitor unit has 12 elements

in parallel and four elements in series.
Figure 108 - 131.43 μF Y-Y connected capacitor bank with internal fuses
12kV A
I B
I0
A. 12 in parallel B. Four in series
Characteristics
Table 79 - Capacitor bank unbalance I0>>> and I0>>>> (51C)
Start value 0.01‑20.0 pu (step 0.01)
Operate time 0.04‑300 s (step 0.01)
Reset time <95 ms
Reset ratio 0.95
Inaccuracy:
- Starting ±2% of the set value or ±0.3% of the rated

value
- Operate time
±1% or ±25 ms
6.19.1 Taking unbalance protection into use
1. To enable the capacitor bank protection:

– in eSetup Easergy Pro, in the Protection > I0>>>> Unbalance setting
view, select Location for Compensation mode.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 201
Figure 109 - Enabling unbalance protection
– via the PowerLogic P3 device's front panel: go to the I0>>>> menu, scroll
right to 1 SET 50N/51N, and select Location for CMode.
2. To save the natural unbalance:
– in eSetup Easergy Pro, in the Protection > I0>>>> Unbalance setting

view, select Get for Save unbalance current.
Figure 110 - Saving the unbalance current
– via the device's front panel: go to the I0>>>> menu, scroll right to SET2
50N/51N, and select Get for SaveBal.
NOTE: CMode has to be selected as Location before proceeding to

this step.
3. Set the start value for both branches.

Total capacitance of the bank is 131.43 μF. In each phase, there are three
capacitor units (1+2), so the capacitance of one unit is 43.81 μF. Failure of
one element inside the capacitor unit makes the total capacitance decrease to
41.92 μF (Ohm’s law). This value is important when calculating the start
value.
Equation 20
U L− N U L− N
−
(2 ⋅ π ⋅ f ⋅ C1 ) −1
(2 ⋅ π ⋅ f ⋅ C 2 ) −1
3I 0 =
3
6928 6928
−
(2 ⋅ π ⋅ 50 ⋅ 43.81 ⋅ 10 −6 ) −1 (2 ⋅ π ⋅ 50 ⋅ 43.81 ⋅ 10 −6 ) −1
3I 0 =
3
3I 0 = 1.37 A
Failure of one element inside the bank on the left branch causes
approximately 1.37 ampere unbalance current at the star point. On the right
branch, there are two capacitor units in parallel, and therefore, a failure of one
202 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
element causes only 0.69 ampere unbalance. A different start value for each
branch is necessary. Set the start value to 80% of the calculated value.
4. Test the operation of the unbalance protection.
Figure 111 - Testing the operation of the unbalance protection
0.80
0.60
0.40
0.20
0.00
A. Phase 2 fault in branch 2 C. Set operation delay

B. IL1 as reference
Conduct testing by injecting current to channels IL1 and I01 of the device. In
the example above, 0.69 A primary current is injected to the I01 channel. I01 is
leading the phase current IL1 by 60 degrees. This means the fault has to be
on the right branch and in phase 2. Compensation happens automatically
after the set operate time until the allowed total amount of failed units is
exceeded (Max. allowed faults). In this application, the fourth failed element
would cause the stage to trip.
NOTE: If branch 1 faults occur in branch 2, change the polarity of the I0

input. Clear the location counters when the commissioning of the relay
has been completed.
5. Clear the location counters by clicking the Clear button.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 203
Figure 112 - Clearing location counters
204 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
6.20 Overvoltage (ANSI 59)

Description
Overvoltage protection is used to detect too high system voltages or to check that
there is sufficient voltage to authorize a source transfer.
The overvoltage function measures the fundamental frequency component of the

line-to-line voltages regardless of the voltage measurement mode (see 10.8
Voltage measurement modes). By using line-to-line voltages any line-to-neutral
over-voltages during earth faults have no effect. (The earth fault protection
functions take care of earth faults.) Whenever any of these three line-to-line
voltages exceeds the start setting of a particular stage, this stage starts and a
start signal is issued. If the fault situation remains on longer than the operate time
delay setting, a trip signal is issued.
In solidly earthed, four-wire networks with loads between phase and neutral
voltages, overvoltage protection may be needed for line-to-neutral voltages, too.
In such applications, the programmable stages can be used. 6.33 Programmable
stages (ANSI 99).
There are three separately adjustable stages: U>, U>> and U>>>. All the stages
can be configured for the definite time (DT) operation characteristic.
Configurable release delay
The U> stage has a settable reset delay that enables detecting intermittent faults.
This means that the time counter of the protection function does not reset
immediately after the fault is cleared, but resets after the release delay has
elapsed. If the fault appears again before the release delay time has elapsed, the
delay counter continues from the previous value. This means that the function
eventually trips if faults are occurring often enough.
Configurable hysteresis
The dead band is 3% by default. This means that an overvoltage fault is regarded
as a fault until the voltage drops below 97% of the start setting. In a sensitive
alarm application, a smaller hysteresis is needed. For example, if the start setting
is about only 2% above the normal voltage level, the hysteresis must be less than
2%. Otherwise, the stage does not release after fault.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 205
Block diagram
Figure 113 - Block diagram of the three-phase overvoltage stages U>, U>> and
U>>>
3vus
Um1
Um2 MAX > & G
Um3 ts tr
& H
A
t
I
& H
B C D E F
A. Blocking F. Enable events

B. Setting U>s G. Start
C. Hysteresis H. Event register
D. Release delay I. Trip
E. Delay
Setting groups
Characteristics
Table 80 - Overvoltage stage U> (59)
- operate time 0.0862)– 300.00 s (step 0.02)
Hysteresis 0.99–0.800 (0.1 – 20.0%, step 0.1%)
Release delay 0.06–300.00 s (step 0.02)
Reset time < 95 ms
206 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Inaccuracy:

62) This
Table 81 - Overvoltage stage U>> (59)
The measurement range is up to 160 V.

This limit is the maximum usable setting
when rated VT secondary is more than 100
V.
Hysteresis 0.99–0.800 (0.1–20.0%, step 0.1%)
Reset time < 95 ms
Inaccuracy:
63) This
Table 82 - Overvoltage stage U>>> (59)
The measurement range is up to 160 V.

This limit is the maximum usable setting
when rated VT secondary is more than 100
V.
Hysteresis 0.99–0.800 (0.1–20.0%, step 0.1%)
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 207
Reset time < 95 ms
Inaccuracy:

64) This
208 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
6.21 Neutral voltage displacement (ANSI 59N)

Description
The neutral voltage displacement protection is used as unselective backup for

earth faults and also for selective earth fault protections for motors having a unit
transformer between the motor and the busbar.
This function is sensitive to the fundamental frequency component of the neutral

voltage displacement voltage. The attenuation of the third harmonic is more than
60 dB. This is essential because third harmonics exist between the neutral point
and earth also when there is no earth fault.
Whenever the measured value exceeds the start setting of a particular stage, this
stage starts and a start signal is issued. If the fault situation remains on longer
than the operate time delay setting, a trip signal is issued.
Measuring the neutral displacement voltage
The neutral displacement voltage is either measured with three voltage

transformers (for example broken delta connection), one voltage transformer
between the motor's neutral point and earth or calculated from the measured
phase-to-neutral voltages according to the selected voltage measurement mode
(see 10.8 Voltage measurement modes):
• When the voltage measurement mode is 3LN: the neutral displacement

voltage is calculated from the line-to-line voltages and therefore a separate
neutral displacement voltage transformer is not needed. The setting values
are relative to the configured voltage transformer (VT) voltage/√3
• When the voltage measurement mode contains "+U0": The neutral
displacement voltage is measured with voltage transformer(s) for example
using a broken delta connection. The setting values are relative to the VT0
secondary voltage defined in configuration.
• Connect the U0 signal according to the connection diagram to achieve correct
polarization.
Two independent stages
There are two separately adjustable stages: U0> and U0>>. Both stages can be
configured for the definite time (DT) operation characteristic.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 209
Block diagram
Figure 114 - Block diagram of the neutral voltage displacement stages U0>, U0>>
U0sblock
A > ts tr
& G
& H
B
t
I
& H
C D E F
A. U0 F. Enable events
B. Blocking G. Start
C. Setting U0>s H. Register event
D. Release delay I. Trip
E. Delay
Setting groups
There are four setting groups available for both stages.
Characteristics
Table 83 - Neutral voltage displacement stage U0> (59N)
Input signal U0
U0 Calc = ( UL1 + UL2 + UL3)
Start value 1–60% U0N (step 1%)
Reset time < 450 ms
Reset ratio 0.97
Inaccuracy:

value
- Starting U0Calc (3LN mode)
±1 V
- Operate time
±1% or ±150 ms
210 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Table 84 - Neutral voltage displacement stage U0>> (59N)
Input signal U0
U0 Calc = ( UL1 + UL2 + UL3)
Start value 1–60% U0N (step 1%)
Reset time <95 ms
Reset ratio 0.97
Inaccuracy:

value
- Starting U0 Calc (3LN mode)
±1 V
- Operate time
±1% or ±30 ms
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 211
6.22 Restricted high-impedance earth fault (ANSI 64REF, 64BEF)

The high-impedance REF/BEF protection function is based on an external
connection of a stabilizing resistor and a voltage limiting varistor connection to the
I0 input of PowerLogic P3 devices. The CT requirement, stabilizing resistor and
voltage limiting varistor calculations are explained in a separate Application Note
(P3APS17016EN).
212 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
6.23 Restricted earth fault (ANSI 64REF)

Description
The restricted earth fault (REF) protection function is used to detect earth faults in
solidly-earthed or impedance-earthed power transformers, earthing transformers
and shunt reactors. REF protection can also be used to protect rotating machines
if the machine’s neutral point is earthed.
A traditional REF protection scheme is based on a high-impedance REF

protection principle. For implementation details, see separate document
“P3APS17016EN Restricted earth fault protection using an I0 input of an Easergy
P3 relay”. Modern REF protection operation is based on a low-impedance
principle that overcomes some drawbacks of the high-impedance REF principle.
NOTE: Use Io3 low-impedance REF protection schemes.
Figure 115 to Figure 118 describe the basic low-impedance REF protection
schemes.
Figure 115 - Restricted earth fault protection of a solidly-earthed transformer
L1 L1
L2 L2
L3 L3
L1 (S2) L3 (S1) L2 (S1) L1 (S1)

L2 (S2)
L3 (S2)
I03 (S2) 64REF

I03 (S1)
Figure 116 - Restricted earth fault protection of a transformer and neutral point
reactor
L1 L1
L2 L2
L3 L3
L1 (S2) L3 (S1) L2 (S1) L1 (S1)

L2 (S2)
L3 (S2)
I03 (S2) 64REF
I03 (S1)
Figure 117 - Restricted earth fault protection of a shunt reactor
L1 L1
L2 L2
L3 L3
L1 (S2) L3 (S1) L2 (S1) L1 (S1)

L2 (S2)
L3 (S2)
I03 (S2) 64REF

I03 (S1)
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 213
Figure 118 - Restricted earth fault protection of a rotating machine
L1
L2
L3
L1 (S2) L3 (S1) L2 (S1) L1 (S1)

L2 (S2)
L3 (S2)
I03 (S2) 64REF

I03 (S1)
The REF protection principle has several advantages. It is very selective because
the protection zone is limited between the current transformers that are used for
the REF protection. Because of its selectivity, the REF protection requires no
additional time delay for protection coordination. Therefore, REF protection is
especially suitable for the protection of transformers and rotating machines
against internal earth faults. Because of the differential protection principle, it is
also very sensitive which makes it suitable for detecting faults located near the
neutral point of transformers and rotating machines.
Restricted earth fault protection principle
The REF protection function is based on the differential protection principle and is
sensitive to the fundamental frequency component of the measured currents.
Figure 119 depicts the differential protection principle applied to REF protection.
The protection zone is determined by the location of current transformers. The

direction of currents in REF protection are defined so that currents entering the
protection zone have positive direction and currents leaving the zone have
negative direction.
Figure 119 - Differential protection principle applied to REF protection
A
C C
I B I
64REF
I0Meas I0Calc = IL1 + IL2 + IL3
A. Protection zone C Positive direction

B Protected object
The function is based on the difference of the current measured at the neutral
point (I0 Meas) and the calculated residual current (I0 Calc). The function calculates
the differential current ID according to Equation 21. So the function is based on
the absolute value of ID that is a sum of the current vectors I0 Meas and I0 Calc.
NOTE: Nominal current of the I0 Meas and I0 Calc are current transformer
ratings.
Equation 21
ID = |I0Meas + I0Calc|
214 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
During healthy conditions, the neutral point current (I0 Meas) is near or equal to
zero and the same is true for the residual current or the calculated sum of the
phase currents I0 Calc = 3I0 =IL1+IL2 +IL3. During healthy conditions, the differential
current ID is also close to zero and the REF protection stage does not start.
Figure 120 depicts through-fault conditions and a fault in the protected zone.
During a through-fault condition, an earth fault current flowing from the faulty
phase to earth returns to the system’s neutral point. Because of the convention of
current directions, the resulting neutral point current (I0 Meas) and calculated
residual current (I0 Calc) are flowing in opposite directions resulting in zero or very
small differential current ID according to Equation 21.
When a fault occurs inside the protection zone, the neutral point current flowing
into the protection zone has a positive current direction according to the current
direction convention. Depending on the network conditions, an additional fault
current may or may not flow into the zone along the line. This additional fault
current manifests itself as a residual current. Additional fault currents flowing into
the protection zone have a positive current direction, too. In other words, the
neutral point current and residual current are in a phase which results in a high
differential current ID according to Equation 21.
Figure 120 - Through-fault condition (left) and earth fault in protected zone (right)
L1 L1 L1 L1
L2 L2 L2 L2
L3 L3 L3 L3
I0Calc = IL1 + IL2 + IL3 I0Calc = IL1 + IL2 + IL3
I0Meas I0Meas
Id ≈ 0 Id > 0
During a through-fault or short-circuit fault outside the protection zone, the current
transformers may be exposed to very high currents. These high fault currents
may lead to different saturation of the phase current transformers resulting in an
erroneous residual current. To ensure correct operation of the protection stage, a
stabilization method is provided. Protection stage stabilisation is based on the
calculated bias current IB and programmable operating characteristics. The bias
current is calculated according to Equation 22.
Equation 22
|IL1|+|IL2|+|IL3|
IB =
3
This bias current stabilization method is used in the dI0> stage. The dI0>> stage
does not consider the stabilization current IB and is purely based on the
differential current ID. Both the differential current ID and stabilization current IB
are current transformer ratings.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 215
Figure 121 - Restricted earth fault protection operating characteristics
N
I K
L
D
J
M
E H
F G
A. ID/ IN H. IB / IN
B. 2 x IN I. Single-end-feed limit
C. IN J. ISTART
D. 50% IN K. Maximum setting
E. 5% IN L. Slope 1
F. IN M. Minimum setting
G. 3 x IN N. Slope 2
Additional stabilization can be activated by selecting the directional blocking

feature. When directional blocking is used, the trip command is issued only when
the measured neutral current and calculated residual current are less than ±88°
apart. Normal second harmonic blocking and cold-load blocking can be used to
block the stage via the blocking matrix.
Figure 122 - Block diagram of REF protection stage
A
B
C I & J
D
>
& K
E F G H
A. Block G. Δ I> setting

B. IN3 H. Enable events
C. INCalc I. Diff & bias calculation
D. I’NCalc J. Trip
216 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
E. Reverse blocking K. Register event

F. INCalc / I’NCalc selection
Characteristics
Table 85 - Restricted earth fault overcurrent (64REF)
dIo> dIo>>
Input signals - -
- Measured earth fault I03 I03

overcurrent input
- -
- Calculated earth fault
I0 Calc or I’0 Calc I0 Calc or I’0 Calc
overcurrent source
Start value - -
- dIo> 5–50 % of IN 5–50 % of In
Ibias for start of slope 1 0.5 x IN -
Slope 1 5–100 % -
Ibias for start of slope 2 1–3 x IN -
Slope 2 100–200 % -
Directional blocking On/off -
Operate time (ID > 1.2 x < 60 ms -

ISET)
Operate time (ID > 3.5 x < 50 ms < 50 ms

ISET)
Reset time < 95 ms < 95 ms
Reset ratio 0.95 0.95
Inaccuracy of starting ±3% of set value or 0.02 x In ±3 % of the set value or ±0.5
when currents are < 200 mA % of the rated value
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 217
6.24 Directional phase overcurrent (ANSI 67)

Description
The directional phase overcurrent protection can be used for directional short-
circuit protection. Typical applications are:
• Short-circuit protection of two parallel cables or overhead lines in a radial

network.
• Short-circuit protection of a looped network with single feeding point.
• Short-circuit protection of a two-way feeder, which usually supplies loads but
is used in special cases as an incoming feeder.
• Directional earth-fault overcurrent protection in low-impedance earthed
networks. In this case, the relay is recommended to connect for line-to-neutral
(3LN) voltage measurement instead of line-to-line (2LL+U0) voltage
measurement. In low-impedance earthed network, residual voltage U0 may be
too low for reliable measurement. See 10.8 Voltage measurement modes.
NOTE: For networks where the maximum possible earth-fault current is lower
than the overcurrent setting value, use the directional earth-fault (67N) stages.
The directional phase overcurrent function measures the fundamental frequency

component of the phase current. The protection is sensitive to the highest three-
phase current. Whenever this value exceeds the configured start setting and, if
the polarization quantity is within the configured sector setting of a particular
stage, a start signal is issued. If the fault remains on longer than the time defined
by the operation delay setting, a trip signal is issued.
For line-to-line and three-phase faults, the fault direction is determined with
positive-sequence polarization using the angles between the positive sequences
of currents and voltages.
For line-to-neutral faults, the fault direction is determined with cross-polarization

using fault-phase current and a healthy line-to-line voltage.
For details on power direction, see 4.10 Power and current direction.
Voltage memory
An adjustable 0.2...3.2 s cyclic buffer that stores the line-to-line or phase-to-earth

voltages is used as the voltage memory. The stored phase angle information is
used as direction reference if all the line-to-line voltages drop below 1% during a
fault. The voltage memory can be adjusted by setting the Angle memory
duration parameter in the Scalings setting view in eSetup Easergy Pro.
218 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Block diagrams
Figure 123 - Block diagram of directional phase overcurrent stage Iϕ > and Iϕ >>
3vlsblock_Idir>_Idir>>
K
U1 U1
I1 I1
Im1
Im2 MAX > ts tr
& H
Im3
& I
A t
>1 J
& I
B C D E F G
A. Block G. Enable events

B. Setting I>s H. Start
C. Delay I. Register event
D. Definite / dependent time J. Trip
E. Dependent time characteristics K. Directional discrimination by U1/I1 angle
F. Multiplier
Figure 124 - Block diagram of directional phase overcurrent stage Iϕ >>> and Iϕ
>>>>
3vlsblock_Idir>>>_Idir>>>>
K
U1 U1
I1 I1
Im1
Im2 MAX > & H
Im3 ts tr
& I
A
t
J
& I
B C G
A. Block H. Start
B. Setting I>>>s I. Register event
C. Delay J. Trip
G. Enable events K. Directional discrimination by U1/I1 angle
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 219
Operation
The directional phase overcurrent uses positive-sequence polarization methods

for faults that do not involve earth, that is, line-to-line faults and three-phase
faults. For faults that involve earth, the cross-polarization method is used.
The function has two conditions as shown in the block diagram. One is the current
threshold and the other is the fault direction or fault angle. If both conditions are
true, the stage starts and trips after the set trip delay. Whenever the highest three-
phase current exceeds the set value, there is an overcurrent condition.
The directional condition of the fault is different depending on whether earth is

involved in the fault or not.
For faults that do not involve earth, the fault direction or fault angle is determined
as an angle between the positive sequences of current and voltage. The angle
reference for the positive-sequence current is the positive-sequence voltage that
is rotated by the base-angle setting (also called relay characteristics angle). The
actual trip area is ± 88° from the base-angle setting. If the positive-sequence
current vector falls into the trip area, there is a directional condition.
The magnitude of the positive-sequence current has no impact on the overcurrent

condition or the directional condition.
If the current threshold and directional conditions are true, the stage starts and
trips after the set trip delay.
For faults that involve earth, the fault direction or fault angle is determined as an
angle between the healthy line-to-line voltage and the faulted phase current. The
angle reference for the faulted phase current is opposite to the healthy line-to-line
voltage that is rotated by the base-angle setting plus 90° to the positive direction.
The actual trip area is ± 88° from the base angle setting plus 90°. If the fault
current vector falls into the trip area, there is a directional condition. If both
conditions are true, the stage starts and trips after the set trip delay. If the current
threshold and directional conditions are true, the stage starts and trips after the
set trip delay.
A typical characteristic for the directional phase overcurrent protection for line-to-
line faults is shown in Figure 125. The base angle setting is -30°. The stage starts
if the maximum of the three-phase currents exceeds the current threshold and if
the tip of the positive-sequence current phasor gets into the grey area.
220 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 125 - Example of the directional phase overcurrent protection area for line-
to-line fault
+90°
Reverse Forward
+88°
0°
U1
-88°
Angle offset setting= -30° (RCA)
-90° ldir_angle1
A typical characteristic for the directional phase overcurrent protection for line-to-
earth faults is shown in Figure 126. The base angle setting is -30°. The stage
starts if the maximum of the three-phase currents exceeds the current threshold
and if the tip of the fault current phasor gets into the grey area.
Figure 126 - Example of the directional phase overcurrent protection area for line-
to-earth fault , RCA internally rotated +90o CCW during earth fault
+90°
+60°
Forward
+88°
-88°
0°
U1
Angle offset setting= -30° (RCA)
Reverse
-90° ldir_angle2
Three modes are available:

• directional
• non-directional
• directional + backup
In the non-directional mode, the stage acts like an ordinary overcurrent 50/51
stage.
The directional + backup mode works like the directional mode, but it has non-
directional backup protection that is used if a close-up fault forces all voltages to
about zero. After the angle memory hold time, the direction would be lost.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 221
The directional + backup mode is required when the operate time is set longer
than the voltage memory setting or no other non-directional backup protection is
used.
In Figure 127, the grey area is the trip area.
Figure 127 - Difference between directional and non-directional mode
+90° +90°
-ind. +cap. -ind. +cap.
2°
DIRECTIONAL NON-DIRECTIONAL
SET SET
VALUE 0° VALUE 0°
-res. +res. -res. +res.
BASE ANGLE= 0°
TRIP AREA TRIP AREA
-cap. +ind. -cap. +ind.
-90° -90°
An example of the bidirectional operation characteristic is shown in Figure 128.

The stage on the right side in this example is stage Iφ> and on the left side Iφ>>.
The base angle setting of Iφ> is 0° and the base angle of Iφ>> is set to -180°.
Figure 128 - Bidirectional application with two stages Iφ> and Iφ>>
+90°
-ind. +cap.
4°
Iφ>> TRIP AREA
SET SET
VALUE VALUE 0°
-res. +res.
BASE ANGLE= 0°
BASE ANGLE= -180°
Iφ> TRIP AREA
-cap. +ind.
-90° ldir_modeBiDir 15%
When any of the three-phase currents exceeds the setting value and, in
directional mode, the phase angle including the base angle is within the active
±88° wide sector, the stage starts and issues a start signal. If this fault remains on
longer than the time defined by the delay setting, a trip signal is issued.
Four independent stages
There are four separately adjustable stages available: Iφ>, Iφ>>, Iφ>>> and
Iφ>>>>.
222 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Stages Iφ> and Iφ>> can be configured for definite time (DT) or dependent time
characteristic. See 6.6 Dependent operate time for details on the available
dependent delays.
Stages Iφ>>> and Iφ>>>> have definite time operation delay. The relay shows a
scaleable graph of the configured delay on the local panel display.
The maximum measured secondary current is 50 x IN. This limits the scope of
dependent curves with high start settings. See 6.6 Dependent operate time for
more information.
Cold load and inrush current handling
See 7.3 Cold load start and magnetizing inrush.
Setting groups
Characteristics
Table 86 - Directional phase overcurrent Iφ>, Iφ>> (67)
Characteristic Value
UL1 – UL3
Start value 0.10...4.00 xIN or x IMOT (step 0.01)
Mode Directional/Directional+BackUp
Minimum voltage for the direction solving 2 VSECONDARY
Base angle setting range -180°...+179°
Operate angle ±88°
- Operate time 0.04...300.00 s (step 0.01)
IDMT function:
- Curve type EI, VI, NI, LTI, MI…depends on the
0.025...20.0, except
0.50...20.0 for RXIDG, IEEE and IEEE2
Reset time <95 ms
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 223
Overshoot time <50 ms
Reset ratio 0.95
Reset ratio (angle) 2°
Transient overreach, any τ <10%
Angle memory duration 0.2...3.2 s
Inaccuracy:
- Starting (rated value IN= 1...5 A) ±3% of the set value or ±0.5% of the rated
value
- Angle
±2° U>5 V
±30° U = 0.1...5.0 V
- Operate time at DT function ±1% or ±25 ms
- Operate time at IDMT function ±5% or at least ±30 ms65)
Moderately Inverse
Table 87 - Directional phase overcurrent Iφ>>>, Iφ>>>> (67)
UL1 – UL3
Start value 0.10...20.00 x IMODE (step 0.01)
Mode Directional/Directional+BackUp
Minimum voltage for the direction solving 2 VSECONDARY
Base angle setting range -180°...+179°
- Operate time 0.04...300.00 s (step 0.01)
Reset time <95 ms
Overshoot time <50 ms
Reset ratio 0.95
224 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Transient overreach, any τ <10%
Angle memory duration 0.2...3.2 s
Inaccuracy:
- Starting (rated value IN= 1...5 A) ±3% of the set value or ±0.5% of the rated
value
- Angle
±2° U>5 V
±30° U = 0.1...5.0 V
- Operate time at DT function ±1% or ±25 ms
67) This
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 225
6.25 Directional earth fault overcurrent (ANSI 67N)

Description
The directional earth fault overcurrent is used in networks or motors where a

selective and sensitive earth fault protection is needed and in applications with
varying network structure and length.
The earth fault protection is adapted for various network earth systems.
The function is sensitive to the fundamental frequency component of the earth

fault overcurrent and neutral voltage displacement voltage and the phase angle
between them. The attenuation of the third harmonic is more than 60 dB.
Whenever the size of I0 and U0 and the phase angle between I0 and U0 fulfils the
start criteria, the stage starts and a start signal is issued. If the fault situation
remains on longer than the operate time delay setting, a trip signal is issued.
Polarization
The neutral displacement voltage, used for polarization, is measured by

energizing input U0, that is, the angle reference for I0. Connect the U0 signal
according to the connection diagram. Alternatively, the U0 can be calculated from
the line-to-line voltages internally depending on the selected voltage
measurement mode (see 10.8 Voltage measurement modes):
• 3LN/LLY, 3LN/LNY and 3LN/U0: the zero sequence voltage is calculated from
the line-to-line voltages and therefore any separate zero sequence voltage
transformers are not needed. The setting values are relative to the configured
voltage transformer (VT) voltage/√3.
• 3LN+U0, 2LL+U0, 2LL+U0+LLy, 2LL+U0+LNy, LL+U0+LLy+LLz, and LN
+U0+LNy+LNz: the neutral voltage displacement voltage is measured with
voltage transformer(s) for example using a broken delta connection. The
setting values are relative to the VT0 secondary voltage defined in the
configuration.
• 3LN: the zero sequence voltage is calculated from the line-to-line voltages
and therefore any separate zero sequence voltage transformers are not
needed. The setting values are relative to the configured voltage transformer
(VT) voltage/√3.
• 3LN+U0 and 2LL+U0: the zero sequence voltage is measured with voltage
transformer(s) for example using a broken delta connection. The setting
values are relative to the VT0 secondary voltage defined in configuration.
Modes for different network types
The available modes are:

• ResCap
This mode consists of two sub modes, Res and Cap. A digital signal can be
used to dynamically switch between these two submodes. When the digital
input is active (DI = 1), Cap mode is in use and when the digital input is
inactive (DI = 0), Res mode is in use. This feature can be used with
compensated networks when the Petersen coil is temporarily switched off.
◦ Res
The stage is sensitive to the resistive component of the selected I0 signal.

This mode is used with compensated networks (resonant earthing) and
226 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
networks earthed with a high resistance. Compensation is usually

done with a Petersen coil between the neutral point of the main
transformer and earth. In this context, high resistance means that the fault
current is limited to be less than the rated phase current. The trip area is a
half plane as drawn in Figure 131. The base angle is usually set to zero
degrees.
◦ Cap
The stage is sensitive to the capacitive component of the selected I0

signal. This mode is used with unearthed networks. The trip area is a
half plane as drawn in Figure 131. The base angle is usually set to zero
degrees.
• Sector
This mode is used with networks earthed with a small resistance. In this
context, "small" means that a fault current may be more than the rated phase
currents. The trip area has a shape of a sector as drawn in Figure 132. The
base angle is usually set to zero degrees or slightly on the lagging inductive
side (negative angle).
• Undir
This mode makes the stage equal to the undirectional stage I0>. The phase
angle and U0 amplitude setting are discarded. Only the amplitude of the
selected I0 input is supervised.
Input signal selection
Each stage can be connected to supervise any of the following inputs and signals:

• Calculated signal I0 Calc for solidly and low-impedance earthed networks. I0
Calc = IL1 + IL2 + IL3 = 3I0.
Intermittent earth fault detection
Short earth faults make the protection start but does not cause a trip. A short fault
means one cycle or more. For shorter than 1 ms transient type of intermittent
earth faults in compensated networks, there is a dedicated stage I0INT> 67NI.
When starting happens often enough, such intermittent faults can be cleared
using the intermittent time setting.
When a new start happens within the set intermittent time, the operation delay
counter is not cleared between adjacent faults and finally the stage trips.
Five independent stages
There are five separately adjustable stages: I0φ>, I0φ>>, I0φ>>>, I0φ>>>>, and
I0φ>>>>>.All the stages can be configured for definite time delay (DT) or
dependent time delay operate time.
Accomplished dependent delays are available for all stages I0φ>, I0φ>>, I0φ>>>,
I0φ>>>>, and I0φ>>>>>.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 227
The relay shows a scalable graph of the configured delay on the local panel
display.
The maximum measured secondary earth fault overcurrent is 10 x I0N and the
maximum measured phase current is 50 x IN. This limits the scope of dependent
curves with high start settings.
Block diagram
Figure 130 - Block diagram of the directional earth fault overcurrent stages I0φ>,
I0φ>>, I0φ>>>, I0φ>>>>, and I0φ>>>>>
I0fiisblock
A I0sinφ
I0cosφ
> & I
& J
B
C K
> t
& J
D E F G H
A. I0 G. Delay
B. Block H. Enable events
C. U0 I. Start
D. Choose I0cosφ (Res) / I0sinφ (Cap) J. Register event
E. Setting Iφ > s K. Trip
F. Setting I0 > s
Figure 131 - Operation characteristics of the directional earth fault protection in

Res and Cap mode
IoDir_ResCap
+90º
CAP
Iosin φ
I0φ>
I0
RES
φ
0º
Iocos φ -U0
I0φ>
Res mode can be used with compensated networks. Cap mode is used with unearthed networks.
228 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 132 - Operation characteristics examples of the directional earth fault

stages in the sector mode
+90º +90º
Angle offset = -15º +55º Angle offset = +32º
Sector = ±70º Sector = ±120º
I0
TRIP AREA +152º +32º
I0φ> 120º
70º 0º 0º
-U0 120º -U0
70º I0φ>
-15º
I0
TRIP AREA
-85º -88º
IoDir_SectorAdj
The drawn I0 phasor is inside the trip area. The angle offset and half sector size are user’s
parameters.
Setting groups
Characteristics
Table 88 - Directional earth fault overcurrent I0φ>, I0φ>> (67N)
Input signal I0, U0
I0 Calc = ( IL1 + IL2 + IL3)
Start value I0φ> 0.001–20.00 x I0N (up to 8.00 for inputs

other than I0 Calc)
Start value I0φ>> 0.01–20.00 x I0N (up to 8.00 for inputs other
than I0 Calc)
Start voltage 1–100% U0N (step 0.1%)
Mode Non-directional/Sector/ResCap
Base angle setting range -180°–179°
- Operate time 0.1068) – 300.00 s (step 0.02 s)
IDMT function:
0.025–20.0, except
0.50–20.0 for RI, IEEE and IEEE2
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 229
Reset time < 95 ms
Reset ratio 0.95
Inaccuracy:
- Starting U0 & I0 (rated value In= 1–5A) ±3% of the set value or ±0.3% of the rated
value
- Starting U0 & I0 (Peak Mode when, rated ±5% of the set value or ±2% of the rated
value I0n= 1–10A) value (Sine wave <65 Hz)
- Starting U0 & I0 (I0 Calc) ±3% of the set value or ±0.5% of the rated
value
- Angle ±2° when U> 1V and I0> 5% of I0N or > 50

mA
else ±20°

Moderately Inverse
Table 89 - Directional earth fault overcurrent I0φ>>>, I0φ>>>>, and I0φ>>>>>(67N)
Input signal I0, U0
I0 Calc = ( IL1 + IL2 + IL3)
Start value 0.005–20.00 x I0N (up to 8.00 for inputs

other than I0 Calc)
Start voltage 1–100% U0N (step 1%)
Mode Non-directional/Sector/ResCap
Base angle setting range -180° – 179°
Operation angle ±88°
- Operate time 0.1070)– 300.00 s (step 0.02 s)
230 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
IDMT function:
0.05–20.0, except
0.50–20.0 for RI, IEEE and IEEE2
Reset time < 95 ms
Reset ratio 0.95
Inaccuracy:
- Starting U0 & I0 (rated value In= 1 – 5A) ±3% of the set value or ±0.3% of the rated
value
- Starting U0 & I0 (Peak Mode when, rated ±5% of the set value or ±2% of the rated
value I0n= 1 – 10A) value (Sine wave <65 Hz)
- Starting U0 & I0 (I0 Calc) ±3% of the set value or ±0.5% of the rated
value
- Angle ±2° when U> 1V and I0> 5% of I0N or > 50

mA
else ±20°

Moderately Inverse
6.25.1 Earth fault faulty phase detection algorithm
The earth fault overcurrent stage (ANSI 50N/51N) and directional earth fault
overcurrent stage (ANSI 67N) have an inbuilt detection algorithm to detect a faulty
phase. This algorithm is meant to be used in radial-operated distribution
networks. The faulty phase detection can be used in solidly-earthed, impedance-
earthed or resonant-earthed networks.
Operation
The faulty phase detection starts from the earth fault stage trip. At the moment of
stage start, the phase currents measured prior to start are registered and stored
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 231
as prior-to-fault currents. At the moment of trip, phase currents are registered

again. Finally, faulty phase detection algorithm is performed by comparing prior-
to-fault currents to fault currents. The algorithm also uses positive sequence
current and negative sequence current to detect faulty phase.
The detection algorithm can be enabled and disabled by selecting or unselecting

a checkbox in the protection stage settings. Correct network earthing
configuration must be selected in the stage settings, too. In the earth fault
overcurrent stage settings, you can select between RES and CAP network
earthing configuration. This selection has no effect on the protection itself, only on
the faulty phase detection. In the directional earth fault overcurrent stage settings,
the detection algorithm uses the same network earthing type as selected for
protection. RES is used for solidly-earthed, impedance-earthed and resonant-
earthed networks. CAP is only used for isolated networks.
The detected faulty phase is registered in the protection stage fault log (and also
in the event list and alarm screen). Faulty phase is also indicated by a line alarm
and line fault signals in the output matrix.
Possible detections of faulty phases are L1-N, L2-N, L3-N, L1-L2-N, L1-L3-N, L2-
L3-N, L1-L2-L3-N, and REV. If the relay protection coordination is incorrect, REV
indication is given in case of a relay sympathetic trip to a reverse fault.
232 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
6.26 Magnetizing inrush detection (ANSI 68F2)

Description
This stage can be used to block other stages and to indicate possible primary
faults in the power distribution network. The ratio between the second harmonic
component and the fundamental frequency component is measured on all the
phase currents. When the ratio in any phase exceeds the setting value, the stage
gives a start signal. After a settable delay, the stage gives a trip signal.
The start and trip signals can be used for blocking the other stages.
The trip delay is irrelevant if only the start signal is used for blocking.
The trip delay of the stages to be blocked must be more than 60 ms to ensure a
proper blocking.
Block diagram
Figure 133 - Block diagram of the magnetizing inrush dection stage
2ndHarm
Im1
Im2 MAX > & E
Im3 ts tr
& F
A
t
G
& F
B C D
A. Block E. Start
B. Setting 2nd harmonics F. Register event
C. Delay G. Trip
D. Enable events
Characteristics
Table 90 - Magnetizing inrush detection (68F2)
Settings:
- Start value 10–100 % (step 1%)
Inaccuracy:
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 233
NOTE: The amplitude of second harmonic content has to be at least 2% of

the nominal of CT. If the nominal current is 5 A, the 100 Hz component needs
to exceed 100 mA.
234 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
6.27 Fifth harmonic detection (ANSI 68H5)

Description
Overexcitation of a transformer creates odd harmonics. The fifth harmonic

detection stage can be used detect overexcitation. This stage can also be used to
block some other stages.
The ratio between the fifth harmonic component and the fundamental frequency
component is measured on all the phase currents. When the ratio in any phase
exceeds the setting value, the stage activates a start signal. After a settable delay,
the stage operates and activates a trip signal.
The trip delay of the stages to be blocked must be more than 60 ms to ensure a
proper blocking.
Characteristics
Table 91 - Fifth harmonic detection (68H5)
Settings:
- Setting range over exicitation 10–100% (step 1%)
Inaccuracy:
- Starting ±2%- unit
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 235
6.28 Overfrequency and underfrequency (ANSI 81)

Description
Frequency protection is used for load sharing, loss of power system detection and
as a backup protection for overspeeding.
The frequency function measures the frequency from the two first voltage inputs.
At least one of these two inputs must have a voltage connected to be able to
measure the frequency. Whenever the frequency crosses the start setting of a
particular stage, this stage starts, and a start signal is issued. If the fault remains
on longer than the operating delay setting, a trip signal is issued. For situations
where no voltage is present, an adapted frequency is used.
Protection mode for f>< and f>><< stages
These two stages can be configured either for overfrequency or for

underfrequency.
Undervoltage self-blocking of underfrequency stages
The underfrequency stages are blocked when the biggest of the three line-to-line
voltages is below the low-voltage block limit setting. With this common setting,
LVBlk, all stages in underfrequency mode are blocked when the voltage drops
below the given limit. The idea is to avoid purposeless alarms when the voltage is
off.
Initial self-blocking of underfrequency stages
When the biggest of the three line-to-line voltages has been below the block limit,
the underfrequency stages are blocked until the start setting has been reached.
Five independent frequency stages
There are five separately adjustable frequency stages: f><, f>><<, f<, f<<, f<<<.
The two first stages can be configured for either overfrequency or underfrequency
usage. So totally five underfrequency stages can be in use simultaneously. Using
the programmable stages even more can be implemented (chapter 6.33
Programmable stages (ANSI 99)). All the stages have definite operate time delay
(DT).
Setting groups
Characteristics
Table 92 - Overfrequency and underfrequency f><, f>><< (81O/81U)
Frequency measuring area 16.0–75.0 Hz
Current and voltage meas. range 45.0–65.0 Hz
Frequency stage setting range 40.0–70.0 Hz (step 0.01)
236 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Low-voltage blocking 10–100% UN
-Operate time 0.0872) – 300.0 s (step 0.02 s)
Start time (overfrequency) < 100 ms
Start time (underfrequency) < 80 ms (slope change)
Reset time <120 ms
Reset ratio (LV block) Instant (no hysteresis)
Inaccuracy:
- Starting ±20 mHz
- Starting (LV block) 3% of the set value or ±0.5 V

72) This
NOTE: If the relay restarts for some reason, there is no trip even if the
frequency is below the set limit during the start-up (Start and trip is blocked).
To cancel this block, frequency has to rise above the set limit.
Table 93 - Underfrequency f<, f<<, f<<< (81L)
Frequency measuring area 16.0–75.0 Hz
Current and voltage meas. range 45.0–65.0 Hz
Frequency stage setting range 40.0–64.0 Hz
Low-voltage blocking 10–100% UN
- operate time 0.0873) – 300.0 s (step 0.02 s)
Undervoltage blocking 2–100 %
Start time < 80 ms (slope change)
Reset time < 120 ms
Reset ratio 1.002
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 237
Reset ratio (LV block) Instant (no hysteresis)
Inaccuracy:
- Starting ±20 mHz
- starting (LV block) 3% of the set value or ±0.5 V

73) This
238 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
6.29 Rate of change of frequency (ANSI 81R)

Description
The rate of change of frequency (ROCOF or df/dt) function is used for fast load
shedding, to speed up operate time in overfrequency and underfrequency
situations. For example, a centralized dedicated load shedding relay can be
omitted and replaced with distributed load shedding, if all outgoing feeders are
equipped with PowerLogic P3 relays.
NOTE: Use ROCOF for load shedding only.
Frequency behavior during load switching
Load switching and fault situations may generate change in frequency. A load
drop may increase the frequency and increasing load may decrease the
frequency, at least for a while. The frequency may also oscillate after the initial
change. After a while, the control system of any local generator may drive the
frequency back to the original value. However, in case of a heavy short-circuit
fault or if the new load exceeds the generating capacity, the average frequency
keeps on decreasing.
Figure 134 - An example of definite time df/dt operate time. At 0.6 s, which is the
delay setting, the average slope exceeds the setting 0.5 Hz/s and a trip signal is
generated.
FREQUENCY ROCOF1_v3
(Hz)
Settings:
df/dt = 0.5 Hz/s
1. t = 0.60 s
0
Hz 0.5
/s Hz tMin = 0.60 s
/s
0.7
2.0
5 Hz
H
/s TIME
z/s
(s)
START
TRIP
ROCOF implementation
The ROCOF function is sensitive to the absolute average value of the time
derivate of the measured frequency |df/dt|. Whenever the measured frequency
slope |df/dt| exceeds the setting value for 80 ms time, the ROCOF stage starts
and issues a start signal after an additional 60 ms delay. If the average |df/dt|,
since the start moment, still exceeds the setting, when the operation delay has
elapsed, a trip signal is issued. In this definite time mode the second delay
parameter "minimum delay, tMIN" must be equal to the operation delay parameter
"t".
If the frequency is stable for about 80 ms and the time t has already elapsed
without a trip, the stage resets.
ROCOF and overfrequency and underfrequency stages
One difference between the overfrequency and underfrequency and the df/dt
function is the speed. Often a df/dt function can predict an overfrequency or
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 239
underfrequency situation and is thus faster than a simple overfrequency or

underfrequency function. However, in most cases, standard overfrequency and
underfrequency stages must be used together with ROCOF to ensure tripping
also if the frequency drift is slower than the slope setting of ROCOF.
Definite operate time characteristics
Figure 134 shows an example where the df/dt start value is 0.5 Hz/s and the
delay settings are t = 0.60 s and tMIN = 0.60 s. Equal times t = tMIN gives a definite
time delay characteristic. Although the frequency slope fluctuates, the stage does
not release but continues to calculate the average slope since the initial start. At
the defined operate time, t = 0.6 s, the average slope is 0.75 Hz/s. This exceeds
the setting, and the stage trips.
At slope settings less than 0.7 Hz/s, the fastest possible operate time is limited
according to the Figure 135.
Figure 135 - At very sensitive slope settings the fastest possible operate time is
limited.
ROCOF5_v3
Fastest possible operation time setting (s)
Slope setting df/dt (Hz/s)
Dependent operate time characteristics
By setting the second delay parameter tMIN smaller than the operate time delay t,
a dependent type of operate time characteristic is achieved.
Figure 137 shows one example, where the frequency behavior is the same as in
the first figure, but the tMIN setting is 0.15 s instead of being equal to t. The
operate time depends on the measured average slope according to the following
equation:
Equation 23
s SET ⋅ t SET
t TRIP =
s
tTRIP = Resulting operate time (seconds).
sSET = df/dt i.e. slope setting (hertz/seconds).
240 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
tSET = Operate time setting t (seconds).
s = Measured average frequency slope (hertz/seconds).
The minimum operate time is always limited by the setting parameter tMIN. In the
example, the fastest operate time, 0.15 s, is achieved when the slope is 2 Hz/s or
more. The leftmost curve in Figure 136 shows the dependent characteristics with
the same settings as in Figure 137.
Figure 136 - Three examples of possible dependent df/dt operate time

characteristics. The slope and operation delay settings define the knee points on
the left. A common setting for tMin has been used in these three examples. This
minimum delay parameter defines the knee point positions on the right.
Slope and delay settings

0.5 Hz/s 1 Hz/s 1.5 Hz/s
ROCOF6_v3
Operation time (s)
Setting for minimum delay

tMin= 0.15 s
Measured slope |df/dt| (Hz/s)
Figure 137 - An example of dependent df/dt operate time. The time to trip will be
0.3 s, although the setting is 0.6 s, because the average slope 1 Hz/s is steeper
than the setting value 0.5 Hz/s.
FREQUENCY ROCOF3_v3
(Hz)
50.0 Settings:
df/dt = 0.5 Hz/s
t = 0.60 s
1.
0
0.5 tMin = 0.15s

H
Hz
z/
/s
s
0.7
2.0
5 Hz
Hz/
/s TIME
49.7
s
(s)
0.00 0.15 0.30 0.45 0.60
START
TRIP
Settings groups
There are four setting groups available.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 241
Characteristics
Table 94 - Rate of change of frequency df/dt> (81R)
Start setting df/dt 0.2–10.0 Hz/s (step 0.1 Hz/s)
Definite time delay (t> and tMin> are equal):
- Operate time t> 0.1474) – 10.00 s (step 0.02 s)
Dependent time delay (t> is more than

tMin>):
0.1474) – 10.00 s (step 0.02 s)
- Minimum operate time tMin>
Reset time 150 ms
Reset ratio 1
Inaccuracy:
- Starting 10% of set value or ±0.1 Hz/s
- Operate time(overshoot ≥ 0.2 Hz/s) ±35 ms, when area is 0.2 – 1.0 Hz/s
74) This
NOTE: ROCOF stage is using the same low voltage blocking limit as the
frequency stages.
242 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
6.30 Lockout (ANSI 86)

Description
The lockout feature, also called latching, can be programmed for outputs in the
Output matrix setting view. Any protection stage start or trip, digital input, logic
output, alarm and GOOSE signal connected to the following outputs can be
latched when required:
• output contacts T1 – T7, A1

• LEDs on the front panel
• virtual outputs VO1- VO20
Figure 138 - The lockout programmed for LED A and I>> trip signals
In Figure 138, the latched signal is identified with a dot and circle in the matrix
signal line crossing.
The lockout can be released through the display or via the eSetup Easergy Pro.
See Chapter 4 Control functions.
Storing latch states
In the General > Release latches setting view, select the Store latch state
setting to configure latched states of relay outputs, virtual outputs, binary outputs
(BO) and high-speed outputs (HSO) to be stored. If some of these outputs are
latched and in “on” state, and the device is restarted, their status is set back to
“on” after restart.
Figure 139 - Store latch setting view
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 243
In the LED configuration setting view, you can configure the latched states of
LEDs to be stored after a restart. In this example, storing has been configured for
LED A (green).
Figure 140 - LED configuration example
NOTE: To use the Store setting, Latch must also be selected.
244 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
6.31 Differential overcurrent protection (ANSI 87T)

Description
The differential overcurrent protection comprises of two separately adjustable

stages: stage ΔI> and stage ΔI>>.
The differential protection is based on the winding currents' difference between IL

and I’L side. In transformer applications, the current calculation depends on
transformer connection group. For example, in a Yy0 connection, the measured
currents are also winding currents, see Figure 141.
Figure 141 - Winding currents in connection group Yy0
A D
B E
C F
G H I J K L
A. IL1 winding G. IL1

B. IL2 winding H.IL2
C. IL2 winding I. IL3
D. I’L1 winding J. I’L3
E. I’L2 winding K. I’L2
F. I’L3 winding L. I’L1
In the second example, if the transformer IL side is connected to open delta for
example Dy11, then the winding currents are calculated on the delta side (IL
side), see Figure 142.
Figure 142 - Winding currents in connection group Dy11
A D
B E
C F
G H I J K L
A. IL1 winding G. IL1

B. IL2 winding H.IL2
C. IL2 winding I. IL3
D. I’L1 winding J. I’L3
E. I’L2 winding K. I’L2
F. I’L3 winding L. I’L1
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 245
Equation 24 - Winding current calculation in delta side, Dy11 connection
(
IL1W = IL1 − IL 2 )
3
(
IL 2W = IL 2 − IL 3 )
3
(
IL 3W = IL 3 − IL1 )
3
Equation 25 - Winding currents in star side, Dy11 connection
I ' L1W = I ' L1

I ' L 2W = I ' L 2
I ' L 3W = I ' L 3
Equation 26 - Bias current
IW + I ' W
Ib =
2
Equation 27 - Differential current
I d = IW + I ' W
Bias current calculation is only used in protection stage ΔI>. Bias current
describes the average current flow in the transformer. Bias and differential
currents are calculated individually for each phase.
If the transformer is earthed, for example having the connection group Dyn11,
then zero current must be compensated before differential and bias current
calculation. Zero current compensation can be selected individually for the IL and
I’L side.
Table 95 describes the connection group and zero current compensation for
different connection groups. If the protection area is only generator, then the
connection group setting is always Yy0, see Table 95. Also the settings of Un and
U’n are set to be the same, for example generator nominal voltage.
246 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Table 95 - Zero-current compensation in transformer applications
Transformator Relay setting
Connection ConnGrp Io cmps I'o cmps

group
YNy0 Yy0 ON OFF
YNyn0 Yy0 ON ON
Yy0 Yy0 OFF OFF
Yyn0 Yy0 OFF ON
YNy6 Yy6 ON OFF
YNyn6 Yy6 ON ON
Yy6 Yy6 OFF OFF
Yyn6 Yy6 OFF ON
Yd1 Yd1 OFF OFF
YNd1 Yd1 ON OFF
Yd5 Yd5 OFF OFF
YNd5 Yd5 ON OFF
Yd7 Yd7 OFF OFF
YNd7 Yd7 ON OFF
Yd11 Yd11 OFF OFF
YNd11 Yd11 ON OFF
Dy1 Dy1 OFF OFF
Dyn1 Dy1 OFF ON
Dy5 Dy5 OFF OFF
Dyn5 Dy5 OFF ON
Dy7 Dy7 OFF OFF
Dyn7 Dy7 OFF ON
Dy11 Dy11 OFF OFF
Dyn11 Dy11 OFF ON
NOTE: Connect the high-voltage side currents to IL terminals.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 247
Table 96 - Zero-current compensation in generator applications
Genarator only Relay setting
ConnGrp Io cmps I'o cmps
No earthing Yy0 OFF OFF
Figure 143 - Block diagram of the differential overcurrent stage ΔI>
difflslohko
IL1
IL2 H I M >1 & N
IL3
I'L1
I'L2 H J M
I'L3
& O
K M
L >
>
A B C D E F G
A. Conngrp setting I. I0 compensation

B. I0 cmps J. I’0 compensation
C. I’0 cmps K. 2nd harmonics / Fund
D. 5th harmonics setting L. 5th harmonics / Fund
E. 2nd harmonics setting M. Diff & bias calculation
F. Δ I> setting N. Trip
G. Enable events O. Register event
H. Y/D
The stage ΔI> can be configured to operate as shown in Figure 144. This dual
slope characteristic allows more differential current at higher currents before
tripping.
248 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 144 - Example of differential overcurrent characteristics
A
M
B
N
K
J L
0.5
C 0.1
H
D E F G
A. ID/ITN H. IBIAS
B. Minimum trip area I. Maximum setting
C. ISTART J. Slope 1
D. 0.5 x IN / IBIAS1 K. Slope 2
E. IN L. Minimum setting
F. IBIAS2 M. Default setting
G. 3 x IN N. Setting area
Table 97 - Settings
Parameter Value Default
IStart 5...50% IN 0.25
Slope 1 5...100% 50%
IBIAS2 1.00...3.00 x IN 2.00
Slope 2 100...200% 150%
Inrush blocking
The dI> stage includes the 2nd harmonic detection for inrush blocking. The dI>>
stage does not include the inrush blocking.
The 2nd harmonic current is calculated from the differential current. The harmonic
ratio of If2/If1 is used. As the harmonic ratio exceeds the set value, the differential
stage is blocked from tripping.
The harmonic ratio is calculated separately for all three phases. The inrush
blocking uses the cross blocking principle.
When the harmonic ratio in any phase exceeds the set threshold, all phase
elements are blocked at once.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 249
Overflux blocking
When overfluxing occurs, the transformer core becomes partially saturated and
the resultant magnetizing current waveforms increase in magnitude and become
harmonically distorted. Such waveforms have a significant fifth harmonic content
which is used as a means of identifying the abnormal operating condition.
When this function is enabled, a settable fifth harmonic blocking threshold is

provided to initiate overflux blocking. A typical threshold setting is 35%.
This blocking can be set to be either phase selective or cross blocking operation.
In the latter, all three phase differential elements are blocked, if an overflux
condition is determined in at least one phase.
Current transformer supervision
The current transformer supervision (CTS) feature is used to detect a failure of

one or more of the phase current inputs to the relay. Failure of a phase current
transformer (CT) or an open circuit of the interconnecting wiring can result in
incorrect operation of any current-operated element. Additionally, interruption in
the current circuit generates dangerous CT secondary voltages.
Figure 145 - Current transformer supervision settings
The differential CTS method uses the ratio between positive and negative
sequence currents at both sides of the protected transformer to determine a CT
failure. This algorithm is inbuilt in the dI> stage. When this ratio is small (zero),
one of the following four conditions is present:
• The system is unloaded – both I2 and I1 are zero.

• The system is loaded but balanced – I2 is zero.
• The system has a three-phase fault – I2 is zero.
• There is a three-phase CT failure – unlikely to happen.
When the ratio is non-zero, one of the following two conditions is present:
• The system has an asymmetric fault – both I2 and I1 are non-zero.

• There is a 1 or 2 phase CT fault – both I2 and I1 are non-zero.
The I2 to I1 ratio is calculated at both sides of the protected transformer. With this
information, we can assume that:
• If the ratio is non-zero at both sides, there is a real fault in the network and the
CTS should not operate.
• If the ratio is non-zero only at one side, there is a change of CT failure and the
CTS should operate.
250 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Another criterion for CTS is to check whether the differential system is loaded or
not. For this purpose, the positive sequence current I1 is checked at both sides of
the protected transformer.
If load current is detected only at one side, it is assumed that there is an internal
fault condition and CTS is prevented from operating, but if load current is detected
at both line ends, CTS operation is permitted.
Another criterion for CTS is to check whether the differential system is loaded or
not. For this purpose, the positive sequence current I1 is checked at both ends. If
load current is detected only at one end, it is assumed that there is an internal
fault condition and CTS is prevented from operating, but if load current is detected
at both line ends, CTS operation is permitted.
There are three modes of operation:
• indication mode: CTS alarm is raised but there is no effect on tripping

• restrain mode: an alarm is raised and the differential current percentage
setting value increased by 100 (for example 30 % + 100 % = 130 %). The new
value is theoretically the maximum amount of differential current that a CT
failure can produce in a normal full-load condition.
• block mode: an alarm is raised and differential protection is prevented from
tripping
The differential CTS block mode is not recommended for two reasons:
• If there is a real fault during a CT failure, the differential protection would not
protect the line at all.
• Blocking the protection could slow down the operate time of the differential
protection because of transients in the beginning of the fault on the protected
line.
87-1 inrush enable setting analyzes the 2nd harmonics from the differential
currents. The pickup value for 2nd harmonic is 10% by default, which should be
adjusted by actual case.
Setting groups
Characteristics
Table 98 - Differential overcurrent stage ΔI> (87)
Start value 5–50 % IN
Bias current for start of slope 1 0.50 x IN
Slope 1 5–100 %
Bias current for start of slope 2 1.00–3.00 x IN
Slope 2 100–200 %
Second harmonic blocking 5–30 %, or disable
Fifth harmonic blocking 20–50 %, or disable
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 251
Reset time < 95 ms
Reset ratio 0.95
Inaccuracy:
- Second harmonic blocking ±2% - unit
- Fifth harmonic blocking ±3% - unit
- Starting ±3% of set value or 0.02 x IN when currents

are < 200 mA
- Operate time (ID > 1.2 x ISET) < 60 ms
Table 99 - Differential overcurrent stage ΔI>> (87)
Start value 5.0 – 40.0 x IN
Reset time < 95 ms
Reset ratio 0.95
Inaccuracy:
- Starting ±3% of set value or ±0.5% of rated value
252 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
6.32 Arc flash detection (AFD)
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
Information on this product is offered as a tool for conducting arc flash

hazard analysis. It is intended for use only by qualified persons who are
knowledgeable about power system studies, power distribution equipment,
and equipment installation practices. It is not intended as a substitute for the
engineering judgement and adequate review necessary for such activities.
Failure to follow this instruction will result in death or serious injury.
6.32.1 Arc flash detection, general principle
The arc flash detection contains 8 arc stages that can be used to trip for example
the circuit breakers. Arc stages are activated with overcurrent and light signals (or
light signals alone). The allocation of different current and light signals to arc
stages is defined in arc flash detection matrices: current, light and output matrix.
The matrices are programmed via the arc flash detection menus. Available matrix
signals depend on the order code (see 13.1 Order codes).
The available signal inputs and outputs for arc flash detection depend on the
relay's hardware configuration.
6.32.2 Arc flash detection menus
The arc flash detection menus are located in the main menu under ARC. The
ARC menu can be viewed either on the front panel or by using eSetup Easergy
Pro.
Arc protection
Table 100 - Arc protection parameter group
Item Default Range Description
I>int. start setting 1.00 xln 0.50–8.00 x ln Phase L1, L2, L3

overcurrent start
level
Io>int. start setting 1.00 xln 0.10–5.00 x ln Residual overcurrent

start level
Install arc sensors - -, Install Installs all connected

sensors
Installation state Ready Installing, Ready Installation state
Link Arc selfdiag to On On, Off Links Arc protection

SF relay selfsupervision
signal to SF relay
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 253
Stage Enabled On or Off On, Off Enables the arc

protection stage
Trip delay [ms] 0 0–255 Trip delay for the arc

protection stage
Min. hold time 2 2–255 Minimum trip pulse

[10ms] length for the arc
protection stage
(Overshoot time
<35ms)
Loop Sensor’s 737 100–900 Sensitivity setting for

sensitivity fibre loop sensor
WARNING
Do not use the arc stage delay for primary trip. The delay and arc stage are
designed for the circuit breaker's backup system only.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury,
or equipment damage.
Arc matrix – current
In the Arc matrix – current setting view, the available current signals (left
column) are linked to the appropriate arc stages (1–8).
Figure 146 - Example view of Arc matrix – current
254 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Table 101 - Arc matrix – current parameter group
I>int. - On, Off Phase L1, L2, L3

internal overcurrent
signal
Io>int. - On, Off Residual overcurrent

signal
GOOSE NI - On, Off Goose network input
Virtual output 1 – 6 - On, Off Virtual output
Arc stage 1 – 8 - On, Off Arc protection stage

1–8
Arc matrix – light
In the Arc matrix – light setting view, the available arc light signals (left column)
are linked to the appropriate arc stages (1–8).
Figure 147 - Example view of Arc matrix – light
Table 102 - Arc matrix – light parameter group
Arc_matrix_light - On, Off Internal arc flash

sensor 1–10
GOOSE NI - On, Off Goose network input
Virtual output 1 – 6 - On, Off Virtual output
Arc stage 1 – 8 - On, Off Arc protection stage

1–8
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 255
Arc matrix – output
Figure 148 - Example view of Arc matrix – output
NOTE: The arc output matrix must be configured in the Arc matrix - output
setting view instead of the Output matrix view.
In the Arc matrix – output setting view, the used Arc stages (1–8) are connected
to the required outputs. A possible latched function per output is also determined
in this view. The available outputs depend on the order code.
The matrix connection done in the Arc matrix – output view also becomes
visible in the output matrix.
Table 103 - Arc matrix – output parameter group
Latched - On, Off Output latch
Arc stage 1–8 - On, Off Arc protection stage

1–8
T1–4 - On, Off Trip digital output 1–

4
A1 - On, Off Signal alarm relay 1
MATRIX correlation principle
When determining the activating conditions for a certain arc stage, a logical AND
operator is made between the outputs from the arc light matrix and arc current
matrix.
If an arc stage has selections in only one of the matrixes, the stage operates on a
light-only or on current-only principle.
256 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 149 - Matrix correlation principle with the logical AND operator
A
& C
B
A. Arc matrix – light C. Arc matrix – output

B. Arc matrix – current
Arc event enabling
Figure 150 - Example view of Arc event enabling
Table 104 - Arc event enabling parameter group
I>int. On On, Off Internal I overcurrent

signal
Io>int. On On, Off Internal Io

overcurrent signal
Arc sensor 1 – 2 On On, Off Arc flash sensor 1–2
Arc stage 1 – 8 On On, Off Arc protection stage

1–8
‘Act On’ event On On, Off Event enabling
‘Act Off’’ event On On, Off Event enabling
6.32.3 Binary inputs and outputs
Information from the arc protection function can be transmitted and/or received
through binary inputs (BI) and outputs (BO). The rated voltage of these signals is
30 V dc when active. The input signal has to be 18–250 V dc to be activated.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 257
Binary inputs
The binary inputs (BI) can be used to get the light indication from another IED to
build selective arc protection systems. BI is a dry input for a 18–250 V dc signal.
The connection of BI signals is configured in the matrices of the arc flash
protection function.
Binary output
The binary outputs (BO) can be used to give the light indication signal or any
other signal or signals to another IED’s binary input to build selective arc
protection systems. BO is an internally driven (wetted) 30 Vdc signal. The
connection of BO signals is configured in the matrices of the arc flash protection
function.
6.32.4 Binary input and binary output self-supervision
Binary signal lines connected between the PowerLogic P3 Advanced devices are
supervised for short circuit or broken connection. Binary output sends a short
pulse to the line and binary input receives this pulse but filters it away. Therefore,
this test pulse is not seen as activation of binary input. If the pulse disappears, the
relay will issue an alarm of lost binary signal connection.
Binary input and output self-supervision is supported for optical BIO (C-card on
slot number 2) and for copper BIO (B-card on slot number 2).
Fiber-optic BIO signaling is straightforward as it is a point to point connection

without possibility to connect several inputs and outputs together. By using copper
BIO, it is possible to connect multiple binary outputs from multiple relays to the
same binary input point when all relays will send binary output signal to one or
multiple binary inputs. When multiple binary outputs are connected to the same
connection point, only one binary output is allowed to have the test pulse enabled.
NOTE: One binary output can be connected to maximum of 4 binary inputs. If

one binary output supplies more than maximum four binary output, a line
amplifier (part number) must be used to support output current of the
binary output.
The binary output test pulses can be enabled and disabled in the BINARY
OUTPUT menu view.
258 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 151 - Binary outputs
To activate BIO self-supervision, the self-supervision pulse must be introduced for

the binary input during commissioning. Only then BIO self-supervision is
functional. This is done in the BINARY INPUTS menu view by activating Install
Binary Inputs operation.
Figure 152 - Binary inputs
6.32.5 Configuration example of arc flash detection
Installing the arc flash sensors and I/O units
1. Go to Protection > Arc protection.
2. Under Settings, click the Install arc sensors drop-down list and select
Install.
3. Wait until the Installation state shows Ready. The communication between
the system components is created.
4. The installed sensors and units can be viewed at the bottom of the Arc
protection group view.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 259
Figure 153 - Installed arc sensors
On the eSetup Easergy Pro group list, select Arc protection.
5. Click the Arc Stages 1, 2, and select Stage 1 and 2 'On'.

6. Click the Trip delay[ms] value, set it to for example '0' and press Enter.
7. Click the DI block value, set it to for example '-' and press Enter.
Configuring the current start values
The General > Scaling setting view contains the primary and secondary values
of the CT. However, the Arc protection menu calculates the primary value only
after the I start setting value is given.
For example:
1. Go to General > Scaling.
2. Click the CT primary value, set it to for example 1200 A, and press Enter.
3. Click the CT secondary value, set it to for example 5 A, and press Enter.
4. On the eSetup Easergy Pro group list, select Protection > Arc protection.
5. Define the I start setting value for the relay.
6. Define the Io start setting in a similar manner.
Figure 154 - Example of setting the current transformer scaling values
Figure 155 - Example of defining the I start setting value
Configuring the current matrix
Define the current signals that are received in the arc flash detection system’s
relay. Connect currents to Arc stages in the matrix.
260 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
For example:
The arc flash fault current is measured from the incoming feeder, and the current
signal is linked to Arc stage 1 in the current matrix.
1. Go to Matrix > Arc matrix - Current
2. In the matrix, select the connection point of Arc stage 1 and I>int.
3. On the Communication menu, select Write Changed Settings To Device.
Figure 156 - Configuring the current matrix – an example
Configuring the light matrix
Define what light sensor signals are received in the detection system. Connect
the light signals to the arc stages in the matrix.
For example:
1. Go to Matrix > Arc matrix - Light.

2. In the matrix, select the connection point of Arc sensor 1 and Arc stage 2.
3. Select the connection point of Arc sensor 2 and Arc stage 2.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 261
Figure 157 - Configuring the light arc matrix
Configuring the output matrix
Define the trip relays that the current and light signals affect.
For example:
1. Go to Matrix > Arc matrix - Output.
2. In the matrix, select the connection point of Arc stage 1 and T1.
3. Select the connection points of Latched and T1 and T9.
4. Select the connection point of Arc stage 2 and T9.
NOTE: It is recommended to use latched outputs for the trip outputs.
Arc output matrix includes only outputs which are directly controlled by FPGA.
Figure 158 - Configuring the output matrix - an example
Configuring the arc events
Define which arc events are written to the event list in this application.
262 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
For example:
1. Go to Logs > Event enabling - Arc.

2. In the matrix, enable both ‘Act On’ event and ‘Act Off’’ event for Arc sensor
1, Arc stage 1, and Arc stage 2.
Figure 159 - Configuring the arc events – an example
6.32.6 Arc flash detection characteristics
The operation of the arc detection depends on the setting value of the I> int and
I01> int current limits.
The arc current limits cannot be set, unless the relay is provided with the optional
arc protection card.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 263
Table 105 - Arc flash detection characteristics
Start current:
Phase currents 0.50–8.00 x IN (step 0.01)
Residual current 0.10–5.00 x IN (step 0.01)
Operate time
High break trip relays (T1, T9–T12)
- Light only ≤9 ms
- 4 x Iset and light ≤9 ms
Trip relays (T2, T3 and T4)
Semiconductor outputs (HSO1 – HSO2)
- Arc stage delay 0 – 255 ms
Inaccuracy:
Current ±5% of the set value
Delayed operation time +≤10 ms of the set value
264 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
6.33 Programmable stages (ANSI 99)

Description
For special applications, you can build your own protection stages by selecting
the supervised signal and the comparison mode.
The following parameters are available:
• Priority: Protection task execution cycle. If operate times less than 80

milliseconds are needed, select 10 ms. For operate times under one second,
20 ms is recommended. For longer operation times and THD signals, 100 ms
is recommended.
• Time-base for input value A: ”Instant” is the latest available value of the
measurement. The other ones are average values of the measurement during
the given time. The average values are calculated for different purposes all
the time, for example, the 200 ms value is used to update the local display.
NOTE: Pay attention to selecting these timing values. For example,

having a short operate time but 1 minute time base does not necessarily
give the expected result. Using long time bases gives the possibility to use
a filtered value to avoid unnecessary operations.
• Coupling A: The selected supervised signal in “>” and “<” mode. The
available signals are shown in the table below.
• Coupling B: The selected supervised signal in "Diff" and "AbsDiff" mode. This
selection becomes available once "Diff" or "AbsDiff" is chosen for Coupling A.
• Compare condition: Compare mode. ‘>’ for over or ‘<’ for under comparison,
“Diff” and “AbsDiff” for comparing Coupling A and Coupling B.
• AbsDiff | d |: Coupling A – coupling B. The stage activates if the difference is
greater than the start setting.
• Diff d: Coupling A – coupling B. The stage activates if the sign is positive and
the difference greater than the start setting.
• Start: Limit of the stage. The available setting range and the unit depend on
the selected signal.
• Operation delay: Definite time operation delay
• Hysteresis: Dead band (hysteresis). For more information, see 6.5 General
features of protection stages.
• No Compare limit for mode < : Only used with compare mode under (‘<’).
This is the limit to start the comparison. Signal values under NoCmp are not
regarded as fault.
Table 106 - Available signals to be supervised by the programmable stages
IL1, IL2, IL3 Phase currents (RMS values)
U12, U23, U31 Line-to-line voltages
I0 Earth fault overcurrent
UL1, UL2, UL3 Line-to-neutral voltages
U0 Neutral displacement voltage
f Frequency
P Active power
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 265
Q Reactive power
S Apparent power
Cos Phi Cosine φ
I0 Calc Phasor sum IL1 + IL2 + IL3
I1 Positive sequence current
I2 Negative sequence current
I2/I1 Relative negative sequence current
I2/In Negative sequence current in pu
U1 Positive sequence overvoltage
U2 Negative sequence overvoltage
U2/U1 Relative negative sequence voltage
IL Average (IL1 + IL2 + IL3) / 3
Tan Phi Tangent φ [= tan(arccosφ)]
PRMS Active power RMS value
QRMS Reactive power RMS value
SRMS Apparent power RMS value
THDIL1 Total harmonic distortion of IL1
THDUA Total harmonic distortion of input UA
THDUB Total harmonic distortion of input UB
THDUC Total harmonic distortion of input UC
fy Frequency behind circuit breaker
fz Frequency behind 2nd circuit breaker
IL1RMS IL1 RMS for average sampling
ILmin, ILmax Minimum and maximum of phase currents
266 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
ULNmin, ULNmax Minimum and maximum of line-to-neutral

voltages
VAI1, VAI2, VAI3, VAI4, VAI5 Virtual analog inputs 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (GOOSE)
Signals available depending on slot 8 options.
Eight independent stages
The relay has eight independent programmable stages. Each programmable

stage can be enabled or disabled to fit the intended application.
Setting groups
There are four settings groups available.
See 6.5 General features of protection stages for more details.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 267
Transformer protection relay 7 Supporting functions
7 Supporting functions
7.1 Event log

Event log is a buffer of event codes and time stamps including date and time. For
example, each start-on, start-off, trip-on or trip-off of any protection stage has a
unique event number code. Such a code and the corresponding time stamp is
called an event.
As an example, a typical event of programmable stage trip event is shown in

Table 107.
Table 107 - Example of Pgr1 stage trip on event and its visibility in local panel and
communication protocols
EVENT Description Local panel Communication

protocols
Code: 01E02 Channel 1, event 2 Yes Yes
Prg1 trip on Event text Yes No
2.7 x In Fault value Yes No
2007-01-31 Date Yes Yes
08:35:13.413 Time Yes Yes
Events are the major data for a SCADA system. SCADA systems are reading
events using any of the available communication protocols. The Event log can
also be scanned using the front panel or eSetup Easergy Pro. With eSetup
Easergy Pro, the events can be stored to a file especially if the relay is not
connected to any SCADA system.
Only the latest event can be read when using communication protocols or eSetup
Easergy Pro. Every reading increments the internal read pointer to the event
buffer. (In case of communication interruptions, the latest event can be reread any
number of times using another parameter.) On the local panel, scanning the event
buffer back and forth is possible.
Event enabling/masking
An uninteresting event can be masked, which prevents it to be written in the event

buffer. By default, there is room for 200 latest events in the buffer. The event
buffer size can be modified from 50 to 2000. The existing events are lost if the
event buffer size is changed.
You can make this modification in the Local panel conf setting view.
An indication screen (popup screen) can also be enabled in the same menu in
eSetup Easergy Pro. The oldest event is overwritten when a new event occurs.
The shown resolution of a time stamp is one millisecond, but the actual resolution
depends on the particular function creating the event. For example, most
protection stages create events with 5 ms, 10 ms or 20 ms resolution. The
268 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
7 Supporting functions Transformer protection relay
absolute accuracy of all time stamps depends on the relay's time synchronization.
See 7.4 System clock and synchronization for system clock synchronizing.
Event buffer overflow
The normal procedure is to poll events from the relay all the time. If this is not
done, the event buffer could reach its limits. In that case, the oldest event is
deleted and the newest displayed with OVF (overflow) code on the front panel.
Table 108 - Setting parameters for events
Parameter Value Description Note
Count Number of events
ClrEv - Clear event buffer Set
Clear
Order Old-New Order of the event Set

buffer for local
New-Old
display
FVScal Scaling of event fault Set

value
PU Per unit scaling
Pri Primary scaling
Display On Indication dispaly is Set

enabled
Alarms Off
No indication display
Sync Controls event time

format
On Event time shown

normally if relay is
Off
synchronized
Event time is shown

in brakets if relay is
not synchronized
FORMAT OF EVENTS ON THE LOCAL DISPLAY
Code: CHENN CH = event channel, NN=event code

(channel number is not shown in case
channel is zero)
Event description Event channel and code in plain text
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 269
Parameter Value Description Note
yyyy-mm-dd Date
(for available date formats, see 7.4 System

clock and synchronization)
hh:mm:ss.nnn Time
7.2 Disturbance recording

The disturbance recorder (DR) can be used to record all the measured signals,
that is, currents, voltage and the status information of digital inputs (DI) and digital
outputs (DO). If the sample rate is slower than 1/10 ms, also the calculated
signals like active power, power factor, negative sequence overcurrent and so on
can be recorded. For a complete list of signals, see Table 109.
The digital inputs also include the arc protection signals.
The available recording channels depend on the voltage measurement mode, too.
If a channel is added for recording and the added signal is not available because
of the used settings, the signal is automatically rejected from the recording
channel list.
NOTE: When protection stages are enabled or disabled or the recorder

signals or recording time changed, the disturbance recordings are deleted
from the relay's memory. Therefore, before activating or deactivating stages,
store the recordings on your PC.
Triggering the recording
The recording can be triggered by any start or trip signal from any protection
stage, by a digital input, logic output or GOOSE signals. The triggering signal is
selected in the output matrix (vertical signal DR). The recording can also be
triggered manually. All recordings are time-stamped.
Reading recordings
The recordings can be uploaded with eSetup Easergy Pro program. The
recording is in COMTRADE format. This also means that other programs can be
used to view and analyse the recordings made by the relay.
Number of channels
A maximum of 24 records can be stored. Up to 12 channels per record can be

stored. Both the digital inputs and the digital outputs (including all inputs and
outputs) use one channel out of the total of 12.
270 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 160 - Recorder channels
Parameters
Table 109 - Disturbance recording parameters
Mode Behavior in memory full situation: Set75)
Saturated No more recordings are accepted
Overflow The oldest recording is overwritten
SR Sample rate Set
32/cycle Waveform
16/cycle Waveform
8/cycle Waveform
1/10ms One cycle value76)
1/20ms One cycle value 77)
1/200ms Average
1/1s Average
1/5s Average
1/10s Average
1/15s Average
1/30s Average
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 271
1/1min Average
Time s Recording length Set
PreTrig % Amount of recording data before the trig moment Set
MaxLen s Maximum time setting.
This value depends on the sample rate, number and type

of the selected channels and the configured recording
length.
ReadyRec Readable recordings
Status Status of recording
- Not active
Run Waiting a triggering
Trig Recording
FULL Memory is full in saturated mode
ManTrig -, Trig Manual triggering Set
ReadyRec n/m n = Available recordings / m = maximum number of

recordings
The value of 'm' depends on the sample rate, number and

type of the selected channels and the configured
recording length.
76) This is the fundamental frequency rms value of one cycle updated every 10 ms.
77) This is the fundamental frequency rms value of one cycle updated every 20 ms.
Table 110 - Disturbance recording parameters
Parameter Value Unit Description Average Wave-

form
ClrCh -, Clear Remove all channels
AddCh Add one channel. The maximum number of

channels used simultaneously is 12.
IL1, IL2, IL3 Phase current X X
I’L1, I’L2, I’L3 Phase current (lV side) X X
U12, U23, Line-to-line voltage X X

U31
UL1, UL2, Phase-to-neutral voltage X X

UL3
272 P3T/EN/M/30-208A

form
U0 (pu) Neutral displacement voltage in pu unit X X
f Frequency X X
P, Q, S Active, reactive, apparent power X
P.F. Power factor X
CosPhi cosφ X
I0 Calc Phasor sum Io = (IL1+IL2+IL3)/3 in primary unit X
I1 Positive sequence current X
I2 Negative sequence current X
I2/I1 Relative current unbalance X
I2/IN Negative sequence overcurrent [x IN] X
IL Average (IL1 + IL2 + IL3) / 3 X
DI Digital inputs: DI1–20, F1, F2, BIOin, VI1-4, Arc1, X X

Arc2
DI_2 Digital inputs: DI21–40 X X
DI_3 Virtual inputs: VI5–20, A1–A5, VO1–VO6 X X
DO Digital outputs: T1–15 X X
DO_2 Rest of the outputs X X
DO_3 Virtual outputs, VO7–VO20 X X
TanPhi tanφ X
THDIL1, Total harmonic distortion of IL1, IL2 or IL3 X

THDIL2,
THDIL3
Prms Active power rms value X
Qrms Reactive power rms value X
Srms Apparent power rms value X
fy Frequency behind circuit breaker X
fz Frequency behind 2nd circuit breaker X
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 273

form
IL1RMS, IL1, IL2, IL3 RMS for average sampling X

IL2MRS,
IL3RMS
Arc 78) Arc protection signals X
Starts Protection stage start signals X X
Trips Protection stage trip signals X X
Uo(pri) Neutral displacement voltage in primary unit X X
I0(pu) Measured earth fault overcurrent in pu unit X X
IoCalcPU Phasor sum Io = (IL1+IL2+IL3)/3 in pu unit X

78) Arc events are polled in every 5 ms.
Signal available depending on the slot 8 options.
NOTE: The selection of signals depends on the relay type, the used voltage
connection and the scaling mode.
NOTE: For waveform, IoCalc (Primary or Pu) can be added only if IL1, IL2
and IL3 are already on the DR channel list. Uo (Primary or Pu) can be added
only if UL1, UL2 and UL3 are already on the DR channel list or Uo is
measured directly from samples (the voltage measurement mode contains
Uo).
Characteristics
Table 111 - Disturbance recording
Mode of recording Saturated / Overflow
Sample rate: -
- Waveform recording 32/cycle, 16/cycle, 8/cycle
- Trend curve recording 10, 20, 200 ms
1, 5, 10, 15, 30 s
1 min
Recording time (one record) 0.1 s–12 000 min (According recorder
setting)
Pre-trigger rate 0–100%
Number of selected channels 0–12
File format IEEE Std C37.111-1999
The recording time and the number of records depend on the time setting and the
number of selected channels.
274 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
7.2.1 Configuring the disturbance recorder
NOTE: The DR configuration can only be edited when connected to the

device via eSetup Easergy Pro
1. To select the channels and sample rate for the disturbance recorder:
a. In eSetup Easergy Pro, go to General > Disturbance recorder.
b. Click the recorder channels you want to add.
c. Click the Sample rate drop-down list, and select the desired rate.
2. To download the disturbance recorder file, select Tools > Download

disturbance records.
NOTE: The default (pre-configured) settings for DR are:

◦ all analog inputs supported by the device
◦ DI, DO
◦ Sampling rate: 32 s/c
◦ Recording length: 1 s'
◦ Output matrix: connection in every trip line to DR
Figure 161 - Configuring the disturbance recorder
3. To write the setting to the device, on the eSetup Easergy Pro toolbar, select
Write settings > Write all settings.
NOTE: To save the relay's configuration information for later use, also
save the eSetup Easergy Pro setting file on the PC. Use WaweWin or
another customer preferred tool to analyze disturbance recorder file.
4. To save the setting file on your PC:
a. On the eSetup Easergy Pro toolbar, click the Save icon. The Save a file
window opens.
b. Browse to the folder where you want to save the file. Type a descriptive
file name, and click Save.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 275
NOTE: By default, the setting file *.epz is saved in the eSetup

Easergy Pro folder.
7.3 Cold load start and magnetizing inrush

Cold load start
A situation is regarded as cold load when all the three phase currents have been
below a given idle value and then at least one of the currents exceeds a given
start level within 80 ms. In such a case, the cold load detection signal is activated
for the time set as Maximum time or until the measured signal returns below the
value set as Pickup current. This signal is available for the output matrix and
blocking matrix. Using virtual outputs of the output matrix setting group control is
possible.
Application for cold load detection
Right after closing a circuit breaker, a given amount of overload can be allowed
for a given limited time to take care of concurrent thermostat-controlled loads. The
cold load start function does this, for example, by selecting a more coarse setting
group for overcurrent stages. It is also possible to use the cold load detection
signal to block any set of protection stages for a given time.
Magnetizing inrush detection
Magnetizing inrush detection is quite similar to the cold load detection but it also
includes a condition for second harmonic content of the currents. When all phase
currents have been below a given idle value and then at least one of them
exceeds a given start level within 80 ms and the second harmonic ratio to
fundamental frequency, If2/If1, of at least one phase exceeds the given setting, the
inrush detection signal is activated. This signal is available for the output matrix
and blocking matrix. Using virtual outputs of the output matrix setting group
control is possible.
By setting the second harmonic start parameter for If2/If1 to zero, the inrush signal
will behave equally with the cold load start signal.
Application for inrush current detection
The inrush current of transformers usually exceeds the start setting of sensitive
overcurrent stages and contains a lot of even harmonics. Right after closing a
circuit breaker, the start and tripping of sensitive overcurrent stages can be
avoided by selecting a more coarse setting group for the appropriate overcurrent
stage with an inrush detect signal. It is also possible to use the detection signal to
block any set of protection stages for a given time.
276 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
NOTE: Inrush detection is based on the fundamental component calculation

which requires a full cycle of data for analyzing the harmonic content.
Therefore, when using the inrush blocking function, the cold load start starting
conditions are used for activating the inrush blocking when the current rise is
noticed. If a significant ratio of second harmonic components is found in the
signal after the first cycle, the blocking is continued. Otherwise, the second-
harmonic-based blocking signal is released. Inrush blocking is recommended
to be used on time-delayed overcurrent stages while the non-blocked instant
overcurrent stage is set to 20% higher than the expected inrush current. By
this scheme, a fast reaction time in short circuit faults during the energization
can be achieved while time-delayed stages are blocked by the inrush function.
Figure 162 - Functionality of cold load / inrush current feature
A C D
Pick-up
Idle
Cold load
A. No activation because the current has not been under the set IDLE current.
B. Current dropped under the IDLE current level but now it stays between the IDLE current and the
start current for over 80 ms.
C. No activation because the phase two lasted longer than 80 ms.
D. The cold load activation will last until maximum time setting has elapsed or current drops below
the cold load pickup setting level, which ever takes place first.
Characteristics
Table 112 - Magnetizing inrush detection
Cold load settings:
- Current input IL or I’L
- Idle current 0.01–0.50 x IN
- Start current 0.30–10.00 x IN
- Maximum time 0.0179) – 300.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Inrush settings:
- Start for 2nd harmonic 0–99%

79) This
7.4 System clock and synchronization

Description
The relay's internal clock is used to time-stamp events and disturbance

recordings.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 277
The system clock should be externally synchronised to get comparable event time
stamps for all the relays in the system.
The synchronizing is based on the difference of the internal time and the
synchronizing message or pulse. This deviation is filtered and the internal time is
corrected softly towards a zero deviation.
Time zone offsets
Time zone offset (or bias) can be provided to adjust the relay's local time. The
offset can be set as a Positive (+) or Negative (-) value within a range of -15.00 to
+15.00 hours and a resolution of 0.01/h. Basically, resolution by a quarter of an
hour is enough.
Daylight saving time (DST)
The relay provides automatic daylight saving adjustments when configured. A

daylight saving time (summer time) adjustment can be configured separately and
in addition to a time zone offset.
Figure 163 - System clock view
Daylight time standards vary widely throughout the world. Traditional daylight/
summer time is configured as one (1) hour positive bias. The new US/Canada
DST standard, adopted in the spring of 2007 is one (1) hour positive bias, starting
at 2:00am on the second Sunday in March, and ending at 2:00am on the first
Sunday in November. In the European Union, daylight change times are defined
relative to the UTC time of day instead of local time of day (as in U.S.) European
customers, carefully check the local country rules for DST.
The daylight saving rules are by default UTC +2:00 (24-hour clock):
278 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
• Daylight saving time start: Last Sunday of March at 03.00

• Daylight saving time end: Last Sunday of October at 04.00
Figure 164 - DST end and begin rules
To ensure proper hands-free year-around operation, automatic daylight time

adjustments must be configured using the “Enable DST” and not with the time
zone offset option.
Adapting the auto-adjust function
During tens of hours of synchronizing, the relay learns its average deviation and
starts to make small corrections by itself. The target is that when the next
synchronizing message is received, the deviation is already near zero.
Parameters "AAIntv" and "AvDrft" show the adapted correction time interval of this
±1 ms auto-adjust function.
Time drift correction without external sync
If any external synchronizing source is not available and the system clock has a
known steady drift, it is possible to roughly correct the clock deviation by editing
the parameters "AAIntv" and "AvDrft". The following equation can be used if the
previous "AAIntv" value has been zero.
604.8
AAIntv =
DriftInOneWeek
If the auto-adjust interval "AAIntv" has not been zero, but further trimming is still
needed, the following equation can be used to calculate a new auto-adjust
interval.
1
AAIntvNEW =
1 DriftInOneWeek
+
AAIntvPREVIOUS 604.8
The term DriftInOneWeek/604.8 may be replaced with the relative drift multiplied
by 1000 if some other period than one week has been used. For example, if the
drift has been 37 seconds in 14 days, the relative drift is 37*1000/(14*24*3600) =
0.0306 ms/s.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 279
Example 1
If there has been no external sync and the relay's clock is leading sixty-one
seconds a week and the parameter AAIntv has been zero, the parameters are set
as
AvDrft = Lead
604.8
AAIntv = = 9.9 s
61
With these parameter values, the system clock corrects itself with –1 ms every
9.9 seconds which equals –61.091 s/week.
Example 2
If there is no external sync and the relay's clock has been lagging five seconds in
nine days and the AAIntv has been 9.9 s, leading, then the parameters are set as
1
AAIntv NEW = = 10.6
1 5000
−
9.9 9 ⋅ 24 ⋅ 3600
AvDrft = Lead
When the internal time is roughly correct – the deviation is less than four seconds
– no synchronizing or auto-adjust turns the clock backwards. Instead, if the clock
is leading, it is softly slowed down to maintain causality.
Table 113 - System clock parameters
Date Current date Set
Time Current time Set
Style Date format Set
y-d-m Year-Month-Day
d.m.y Day.Month.Year
m/d/y Month/Day/Year
80)
SyncDI Possible values The digital input
depends on the used for clock
types of I/O synchronization.
cards
- DI not used for

synchronizing
Minute pulse
input
280 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
TZone -15.00 – UTC time zone Set

+15.00 81) for SNTP
synchronization.
Note: This is a
decimal number.
For example for
state of Nepal
the time zone
5:45 is given as
5.75
DST No; Yes Daylight saving Set

time for SNTP
SySrc Clock
synchronization
source
Internal No sync
recognized
since 200s
DI Digital input
SNTP Protocol sync
SpaBus Protocol sync
ModBus Protocol sync
ModBus TCP Protocol sync
ProfibusDP Protocol sync
IEC101 Protocol sync
IEC103 Protocol sync
DNP3 Protocol sync
IRIG-B003 IRIG timecode

B00382)
MsgCnt 0 – 65535, The number of

received
0 – etc.
synchronization
messages or
pulses
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 281
Dev ±32767 ms Latest time

deviation
between the
system clock
and the
received
synchronization
SyOS ±10000.000 s synchronization Set

correction for
any constant
deviation in the
synchronizing
source
AAIntv ±1000 s Adapted auto- Set83)

adjust interval
for 1 ms
correction
AvDrft Lead; Lag Adapted Set 83)

average clock
drift sign
FilDev ±125 ms Filtered

synchronization
deviation
80) Set the DI delay to its minimum and the polarity such that the leading edge is the synchronizing
edge.
81) A range of -11 h – +12 h would cover the whole earth but because the International Date Line does
not follow the 180° meridian, a more wide range is needed.

82) Relay needs to be equipped with suitable hardware option module to receive IRIG-B clock
synchronization signal. (13.2 Accessories).

83) If external synchronization is used, this parameter is set automatically.
Set = An editable parameter (password needed).
Synchronization with DI
The clock can be synchronized by reading minute pulses from digital inputs,
virtual inputs or virtual outputs. The sync source is selected with the SyncDI
setting. When a rising edge is detected from the selected input, the system clock
is adjusted to the nearest minute. The length of the digital input pulse should be at
least 50 ms. The delay of the selected digital input should be set to zero.
Synchronization correction
If the sync source has a known offset delay, it can be compensated with the
SyOS setting. This is useful for compensating hardware delays or transfer delays
of communication protocols. A positive value compensates a lagging external
sync and communication delays. A negative value compensates any leading
offset of the external synch source.
282 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Sync source
When the relay receives new sync message, the sync source display is updated.
If no new sync messages are received within the next 1.5 minutes, the relay
switches over to internal sync mode.
Sync source: IRIG-B
IRIG standard time formats B003 and B004 are supported with a dedicated
communication option (See 13.2 Accessories).
IRIG-B input clock signal voltage level is TLL. The input clock signal originated in
the GPS receiver must be taken to multiple relays trough an IRIG-B distribution
module. This module acts as a centralized unit for a point-to-multiple point
connection.
NOTE: Daisy chain connection of IRIG-B signal inputs in multiple relays must
be avoided.
Figure 165 - PowerLogic P3 relays with IRIG-B synchronization capability
B
C
P3U P3x3x
A. Antenna C. IRIG-B signal from clock

B. GPS clock D. IRIG-B distribution module
The recommended cable must be shielded and either of coaxial or twisted pair
type. Its length must not exceed 10 meters.
Deviation
The time deviation means how much the system clock time differs from the sync
source time. The time deviation is calculated after receiving a new sync message.
The filtered deviation means how much the system clock was really adjusted.
Filtering takes care of small deviation in sync messages.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 283
Auto-lag/lead
The relay synchronizes to the sync source, meaning that it starts automatically
leading or lagging to stay in perfect sync with the master. The learning process
takes a few days.
7.5 Voltage sags and swells

Description
The power quality of electrical networks has become increasingly important.

Sophisticated loads (for example computers) require an uninterruptible supply of
“clean” electricity. The PowerLogic P3T32 protection platform provides many
power quality functions that can be used to evaluate and monitor the quality and
alarm on the basis of the quality. One of the most important power quality
functions is voltage sag and swell monitoring.
PowerLogic P3T32 provides separate monitoring logs for sags and swells. The
voltage log is triggered if any voltage input either goes under the sag limit (U<) or
exceeds the swell limit (U>). There are four registers for both sags and swells in
the fault log. Each register contains start time, phase information, duration and
the minimum, average and maximum voltage values of each sag and swell event.
Furthermore, it contains the total number of sags and swells counters as well as
the total number of timers for sags and swells.
The voltage power quality functions are located under the submenu “U”.
Table 114 - Setting parameters of sags and swells monitoring
Parameter Value Unit Default Description
U> 20 – 150 % 110 Setting value of

swell limit
U< 10 – 120 % 90 Setting value of

sag limit
Delay 0.04 – 1.00 s 0.06 Delay for sag

and swell
detection
SagOn On; Off - On Sag on event
SagOff On; Off - On Sag off event
SwelOn On; Off - On Swell on event
SwelOf On; Off - On Swell off event
284 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Table 115 - Recorded values of sags and swells monitoring
Parameter Value Unit Description
Recorded Count - Cumulative sag

values counter
Total - Cumulative sag

time counter
Count - Cumulative
swell counter
Total - Cumulative
swell time
counter
Sag / swell logs Date - Date of the sag/

1–4 swell
Time - Time stamp of

the sag/swell
Type - Voltage inputs

that had the
sag/swell
Time s Duration of the

sag/swell
Min1 % UN Minimum
voltage value
during the sag/
swell in the
input 1
Min2 % UN Minimum
voltage value
during the sag/
swell in the
input 2
Min3 % UN Minimum
voltage value
during the sag/
swell in the
input 3
Ave1 % UN Average voltage

value during the
sag/swell in the
input 1
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 285

value during the
sag/swell in the
input 2

value during the
sag/swell in the
input 3
Max1 % UN Maximum
voltage value
during the sag/
swell in the
input 1
Max2 % UN Maximum
voltage value
during the sag/
swell in the
input 2
Max3 % UN Maximum
voltage value
during the sag/
swell in the
input 3
Characteristics
Table 116 - Voltage sag & swell
Voltage sag limit 10 –120% UN (step 1%)
Voltage swell limit 20 –150% UN (step 1%)
Definite time function: DT
Low voltage blocking 0–50%
Reset time < 60 ms
Reset ration:
- Sag 1.03
- Swell 0.97
286 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Block limit 0.5 V or 1.03 (3%)
Inaccuracy:
- Activation ±0.5 V or 3% of the set value
- Activation (block limit) ±5% of the set value
If one of the line-to-line voltages is below sag limit and above block limit but
another line-to-line voltage drops below block limit, blocking is disabled.
7.6 Voltage interruptions

Description
The relay includes a simple function to detect voltage interruptions. The function
calculates the number of voltage interruptions and the total time of the voltage-off
time within a given calendar period. The period is based on the relay's real-time
clock. The available periods are:
• 8 hours, 00:00–08:00, 08:00–16:00, 16:00–24:00
• one day, 00:00–24:00
• one week, Monday 00:00 – Sunday 24:00
• one month, the first day 00:00 – the last day 24:00
• one year, 1st January 00:00 – 31st December 24:00
After each period, the number of interruptions and the total interruption time are
stored as previous values. The interruption counter and the total time are cleared
for a new period. Previous values are overwritten.
Voltage interruption is based on the value of the positive sequence voltage U1 and
a limit value you can define. Whenever the measured U1 goes below the limit, the
interruption counter is increased, and the total time counter starts increasing.
The shortest recognized interruption time is 40 ms. If the voltage-off time is

shorter, it may be recognized depending on the relative depth of the voltage dip.
If the voltage has been significantly over the limit U1< and then there is a small
and short under-swing, it is not recognized (Figure 166).
Figure 166 - A short voltage interruption which is probably not recognized
U 1<
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 B
A.Voltage U1 B. Time (ms)
On the other hand, if the limit U1< is high and the voltage has been near this limit,
and then there is a short but very deep dip, it is not recognized (Figure 167).
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 287
Figure 167 - A short voltage interrupt that will be recognized
A
U 1<
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
B
A.Voltage U1 B. Time (ms)
Table 117 - Setting parameters of the voltage sag measurement function
U1< 10.0–120.0 % 64 Setting value
Period 8h - Month Length of the

observation
Day
period
Week
Month
Date - - Date
Time - - Time
Table 118 - Measured and recorded values of voltage sag measurement function
Measured value Voltage LOW; - Current voltage

status
OK
U1 % Measured
positive
sequence
voltage
288 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Recorded Count - Number of

values voltage sags
during the
current
observation
period
Prev - Number of
voltage sags
during the
previous
observation
period
Total s Total (summed)

time of voltage
sags during the
current
observation
period
Prev s Total (summed)

time of voltage
sags during the
previous
observation
period
Characteristics
Table 119 - Voltage interruptions
Voltage low limit (U1) 10–120% UN (step 1%)
- Operate time < 60 ms (Fixed)
Reset time < 60 ms
Reset ratio 1.03
Inaccuracy:
- Activation 3% of the set value
7.7 Current transformer supervision (ANSI 60)

Description
The relay supervises the current transformers (CTs) and the external wiring
between the relay terminals and the CTs. This is a safety function as well, since
an open secondary of a CT causes dangerous voltages.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 289
The CT supervision function measures phase currents. If one of the three phase
currents drops below the IMIN< setting while another phase current exceeds the
IMAX> setting, the function issues an alarm after the operation delay has elapsed.
Table 120 - Setting parameters of CT supervision
Imax> 0.0 – 10.0 xIn 2.0 Upper setting

for CT
supervision
current scaled
to primary
value,
calculated by
relay
Imin< 0.0 – 10.0 xIn 0.2 Lower setting

for CT
supervision
current scaled
to primary
value,
calculated by
relay
t> 0.02 – 600.0 s 0.10 Operation delay
CT on On; Off - On CT supervision

on event
CT off On; Off - On CT supervision

off event
Table 121 - Measured and recorded values of CT
Measured value ILmax A Maximum of

phase currents
ILmin A Minimum of
phase currents
Display Imax>, Imin< A Setting values

as primary
values
290 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Recorded Date - Date of CT

values supervision
alarm
Time - Time of CT
supervision
alarm
Imax A Maximum phase

current
Imin A Minimum phase

current
Characteristics
Table 122 - Current transformer supervision
IMAX> setting 0.00 – 10.00 x IN (step 0.01)
IMIN< setting 0.00 – 10.00 x IN (step 0.01)
- Operate time 0.04 – 600.00 s (step 0.02 s)
Reset time < 60 ms
Reset ratio IMAX> 0.97
Reset ratio IMIN< 1.03
Inaccuracy: -
- Activation ±3% of the set value
7.8 Voltage transformer supervision (ANSI 60FL)

Description
The relay supervises the voltage transformers (VTs) and VT wiring between the
relay terminals and the VTs. If there is a fuse in the voltage transformer circuitry,
the blown fuse prevents or distorts the voltage measurement. Therefore, an alarm
should be issued. Furthermore, in some applications, protection functions using
voltage signals should be blocked to avoid false tripping.
The VT supervision function measures three line-to-line voltages and currents.

The negative sequence voltage U2 and the negative sequence current I2 are
calculated. If U2 exceed the U2> setting and at the same time, I2 is less than the
I2< setting, the function issues an alarm after the operation delay has elapsed.
The VT supervision based on negative sequence components is able to detect 1-

phase and 2-phase fuse fault. To detect 3-phase fuse fault, positive sequence
voltage and current are used together with the optional CB position.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 291
When the CB position is selected, the supervision process monitors U1 and I1 and
CB position. If CB is closed and I1 exceed setting value and U1 is lower than 1%
of nominal voltage, VT fuse fail alarm is issued after operational delay has
elapsed. When the CB position is not selected, the supervision process monitors
only U1 and I1 value. If U1 is lower than 1% of nominal voltage and I1 exceeds
setting value, VT fuse fail is issued after operational delay has elapsed.
Table 123 - Setting parameters of VT supervision
U2> 0.0 – 200.0 % Un 34.6 Upper setting

for VT
supervision
I2< 0.0 – 200.0 % In 100.0 Lower setting

for VT
supervision
t> 0.02 – 600.0 s 0.10 Operation delay
VT on On; Off - On VT supervision

on event
VT off On; Off - On VT supervision

off event
I1> 0~200 % In 100 Upper setting

for I1 value
CB for DI1~Obj8Op - - CB object for

monitoring monitoring
Table 124 - Measured and recorded values of VT supervision
Measured U2 %UN Measured

values negative
sequence
voltage
I2 %IN Measured
negative
sequence
current
U1 %Un Measured
positive
sequence
voltage
I1 %In Measured
positive
sequence
current
292 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Recorded Date - Date of VT

values supervision
alarm
Time - Time of VT
supervision
alarm
U2 %UN Recorded
negative
sequence
voltage
I2 %IN Recorded
negative
sequence
current
U1 %Un Recorded
positive
sequence
voltage
I1 %In Recorded
positive
sequence
current
Characteristics
Table 125 - Voltage transformer supervision
U2> setting 0.0 – 200.0% (step 0.1%)
I2< setting 0.0 – 200.0% (step 0.1%)
I1> setting 0.0-200.0%(step 0.1%)
- Operate time 0.04 – 600.00 (step 0.02s)
Reset time < 60 ms
Reset ratio 3% of the start value
Inaccuracy: -
- Activation U2> ±1%-unit
- Activation I2< ±1%-unit
- Activation I1> ±1%-unit
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 293
Figure 168 - Block diagram of 3-phase voltage transformer supervision
U2> l2<
U2 >
AND
l2 < >1 VT fuse fail
U1 <
l1 > AND
CB Closed
U1 < l1 >
7.9 Circuit breaker wear

Description
Circuit breaker (CB) wear is a function that monitors CB wear by calculating how
much wear the CB can sustain. It raises an alarm about the need for CB
maintenance before the condition of the CB becomes critical.
This function records the peak symmetrical current84) from each phase85), and
uses that magnitude as the breaking current for that phase to estimate the
amount of wear on the CB. The function then calculates the estimated number of
cycles or trips remaining before the CB needs to be replaced or serviced.
Permissible cycle diagram
The permissible cycle diagram is usually available in the documentation of the CB

manufacturer. This diagram specifies the permissible number of cycles as a
function of the breaking current, that is, how much wear occurs in the CB when it
trips with a given breaking current. So the maximum number of cycles a CB can
trip with this breaking current is used as the measure of wear.
The condition monitoring function must be configured according to this diagram.

In the configuration, this diagram is called Breaker curve.
84) The used peak current is the magnitude of the fundamental frequency component. This
magnitude does not include a possible DC component.
85) The current is sampled every 10 milliseconds, starting from the moment the monitored trip relay
is asserted and ending when the current of every phase has decreased below one quarter of
the phase’s breaking current or after 500 milliseconds have elapsed, whichever happens first.
294 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 169 - Example permissible cycle diagram
100000
10000
A 1000
100
50
20
10
100 200 500 1000 10000 100000
A. Number of permitted operations B. Breaking current (A)
Up to eight points can be selected from the diagram and entered to the device.
Each point specifies a breaking current and the associated maximum number of
permitted operations. The device assumes there is a straight line between each
two consecutive points in the log-log diagram (that is, uses logarithmic
interpolation between the points), and thus forms an approximation of the
permissible cycle diagram. It should be possible to accurately describe most
permissible cycle diagrams in this way.
The values in the example match the diagram in Figure 169.
Table 126 - An example of circuit breaker wear characteristics
Point Interrupted current (kA) Number of permitted

operations
1 0 (mechanical age) 10000
2 1.25 (rated current) 10000
3 31.0 (maximum breaking 80

current)
4 100 1
5 100 1
6 100 1
7 100 1
8 100 1
Alarm points
Two alarm points can be configured to notify about the approaching need for CB
maintenance.
The number of permissible CB cycles depends on the breaking current that is

interrupted by the CB. Larger currents lead to greater wear on the CB and thus to
fewer operating cycles.86)
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 295
An alarm point specifies a breaking current and an associated number of

permissible cycles. An alarm is raised if the remaining number of permissible
cycles at the given breaking current falls below this limit.
The table in the Operations left setting view shows the number of operation
cycles left before the alarm points are reached. The number of remaining cycles
is tracked for each phase separately, and the alarm is raised when any phase
runs out of cycles.
Figure 170 - Operations left
The first alarm point can be set, for example, to the CB’s nominal current and the
second alarm point to a typical fault current.
When an alarm is raised, a signal is asserted in the output matrix. Also, an event
is created depending on the settings given in the Event enabling setting view.
Logarithmic interpolation
The permitted number of operations for the currents between the defined points is
logarithmically interpolated:
Equation 28
a
C=
In
C = permitted operations
I = interrupted current
a = constant according to Equation 29
n = constant according to Equation 30
Equation 29
a = C k I k2
86) Each cycle causes mechanical wear on the CB. In addition, large enough currents create arcs
inside the CB, which causes erosion of the electrical contacts for each phase. The larger the
current, the greater the erosion, and thus the greater the wear on the CB. A worn CB has fewer
cycles left at any breaking current.
296 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Equation 30
Ck
ln
C k +1
n=
I
ln k +1
Ik
ln = natural logarithm function
Ck, Ck+1 = permitted operations
k = rows 2–7 in Table 126
Ik, Ik+1 = corresponding current
k = rows 2–7 in Table 126
Example of the logarithmic interpolation
Alarm 2 current is set to 6 kA. The maximum number of operations is calculated

as follows.
The current 6 kA lies between points 2 and 3 in the table. That gives value for the
index k. Using
k=2
Ck = 10000
Ck+1 = 80
Ik+1 = 31 kA
Ik = 1.25 kA
and Equation 30 and Equation 29, the device calculates
Equation 31
10000
ln
n= 80 = 1.5038
31000
ln
1250
Equation 32
a = 10000 ⋅ 12501.5038 = 454 ⋅ 10 6
Using Equation 28, the device gets the number of permitted operations for current
6 kA.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 297
Equation 33
454 ⋅ 10 6
C= = 945
60001.5038
Thus, the maximum number of current-breaking operations at 6 kA is 945. This

can be verified with the original CB curve in Figure 169. The figure shows that at
6 kA, the operation count is between 900 and 1000. In this case, a useful alarm
level for the operations left is 50, for example, which is about 5 percent of the
maximum.
Example of operation counter decrementing when the CB breaks a current
Alarm 2 is set to 6 kA. The CB failure protection supervises trip relay T1, and a
trip signal of an overcurrent stage detecting a two-phase fault is connected to this
trip relay T1. The interrupted phase currents are 12.5 kA, 12.5 kA and 1.5 kA. By
what number are Alarm2 counters decremented?
Using Equation 28 and values n and a from the previous example, the device gets
the number of permitted operations at 10 kA.
Equation 34
454 ⋅ 10 6
C10 kA = = 313
125001.5038
At alarm level 2, 6 kA, the corresponding number of operations is calculated

according to:
Equation 35
C AlarmMax
∆=
C
945
∆A = ∆B = =3
313
Thus, Alarm2 counters for phases L1 and L2 are decremented by 3. In phase L1,
the current is less than the alarm limit current 6 kA. For such currents, the
decrement is 1.
Δ L3 = 1
298 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Table 127 - Local panel parameters of the CBWEAR function
CBWEAR STATUS
Operations left
for
Al1L1
- Alarm 1, phase
Al1L2
L1
Al1L3
- Alarm 1, phase
Al2L1 L2
Al2L2 - Alarm 1, phase
Al2L3 L3
- Alarm 2, phase
L1
- Alarm 2, phase
L2
- Alarm 2, phase
L3
Latest trip
Date Time stamp of

the latest trip
time
operation
IL1 A Broken current

of phase L1
IL2 A
Broken current
IL3 A
of phase L2
Broken current
of phase L3
CBWEAR SET
Alarm1
Current 0.00–100.00 kA Alarm1 current Set

level
Cycles 100000–1 Alarm1 limit for Set

operations left
Alarm2
Current 0.00–100.00 kA Alarm2 current Set

level
Cycles 100000–1 Alarm2 limit for Set

operations left
CBWEAR SET2
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 299
Al1On On; Off 'Alarm1 on' Set

event enabling
Al1Off On; Off 'Alarm1 off' Set

event enabling
Al2On On; Off 'Alarm2 on' Set

event enabling
Al2Off On; Off 'Alarm2 off' Set

event enabling
Clear -; Clear Clearing of Set

cycle counters
7.10 Circuit breaker condition monitoring

Description
Circuit breaker (CB) condition monitoring monitors the CB wear with the help of
the cumulative breaking current. It raises an alarm about the need for CB
maintenance before the CB’s condition becomes critical. This function has two
stages.
The approach to calculating the CB condition is different from the approach used
by the CB wear function described in 7.9 Circuit breaker wear. CB condition
monitoring also provides some additional features for integrating the device with
other Schneider Electric products. These functions are based on data analytics
for integration into EcoStruxure Asset Advisor cloud-based offers.
Cumulative breaking current
CB monitoring is activated when the monitored CB opens, and the breaking

current is added to the cumulative breaking current. This sum is calculated for
each phase separately. This way of estimating the wear on the CB is opposite to
the permissible cycles diagram used by the CB wear function. The permissible
cycles diagram describes how much more wear the CB can sustain, and this
approach describes how much wear the CB has accumulated.
To approximate the shape of the permissible cycles diagram, the cumulative

breaking current is also calculated for 5 different bins, so that each bin tracks
breaking currents within a given range (see Figure 171). If a phase's breaking
current is within the range of a given bin, this current is added to the phase’s
cumulative breaking current on that bin.
Each bin also has three counters (one for each phase). Each counter tracks the
number of times the CB has opened and something was added to the
corresponding sum on that bin (see Figure 171).
300 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 171 - Cumulative breaking current
If all cumulative breaking currents for the bins are zero when the value of the CT
primary parameter is changed in the Scaling setting view, the breaking current
ranges for the bins are automatically set to their default values relative to the new
CT primary value. The lower limit for the first bin is set to zero and the upper limit
to two times the CT primary value. There is no upper limit for the fifth bin.
The cumulative breaking currents are tracked with greater precision than what is
visible on the setting tool, that is, there are hidden decimals stored for each sum.
A non-zero sum that is too small to be visible in the setting tool may prevent the
bin ranges from getting their default values when the CT primary value is
changed.
Each breaking current can be added to one bin.
The cumulative breaking currents can be read over the Modbus protocol as
floating-point values (IEEE 754, binary32). These values are represented in two
consecutive holding registers, so that the register in the lower address contains
the MSB 16 bits. To change the sum by writing a floating-point value, the MSB 16
bits must be written first.
The cumulative breaking currents can be cleared by writing value zero to them.
Counters for mechanical operations
This function includes a counter that tracks the number of times the monitored CB
is opened, and a second counter that tracks how many of those operations were
caused by a protection stage trip. This requires that one of the controllable
objects (see 5.6 Controllable objects) has been configured to represent the CB
and this object has been selected in the Monitored object parameter.
Internally, each object has its own open counter and the counter for the monitored
object is shown under Opening counts, Trip counts and Rack-out counter (see
Figure 172). These open counters are incremented even when this function has
been disabled. In contrast, the trip counter is incremented when the monitored
object is opened by a protection stage trip and this function is enabled. Thus, if
you change the monitored object, the open counter value switches to the counter
of the new object, but the trip counter continues from its current value. Both
counters' values can be changed.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 301
Figure 172 - Counters for mechanical operations
The number of times the monitored CB is racked out from the bay is tracked by its
own counter. This requires that a digital input is set up to indicate when the CB is
racked out88). This digital input is selected under Rack-out counter. Each digital
input has its own counter. The same counter is also found in the Digital inputs
setting view.
Operate times logs
This function records the completion times for the eight previous open, close, and
charge operations of the monitored CB. Each operate time is recorded with a
timestamp indicating when the operation was completed. This function also keeps
a cumulative moving average of 20 previous operate times for each of the three
categories.
There are two methods to monitor the CB open/close time. The default selection
is CB DI chg which calculates the delta time of close and open statuses from the
auxiliary contacts and measures the time it takes the main contacts to open/close.
Figure 173 - Selecting the method to monitor CB open/close time
The alternative method, CMD to DO, measures the time from the request to
operate to the auxiliary contact feedback. This method measures the complete
time it takes from a stationary breaker to the auxiliary contacts changing state.
You should select which relay is used to monitor the CB open and which relay is
used to monitor the CB close. The calculation starts from the output control to DI
status change. Normally, the operating time should be within the max time. If it
exceeds the max time, it will reset automatically, and no new item will be updated
in the log.
88) When the CB r is in the bay, this digital input has logical value false, and when the CB is racked
out, this input has logical value true.
302 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 174 - Defining which relays monitor CB open and close
The completion times are recorded even if this function has been disabled,
provided that the monitored object has been selected.
All three logs of completion times can be cleared by the Clear logs command.
Figure 175 - CB opening times
The charging times are recorded in seconds whereas the opening and closing
times are recorded in milliseconds.
The operate times can be read over the Modbus protocol as floating-point values
(IEEE 754, binary32), so that a range of holding registers is used to represent all
operate times of a given category, from the newest to oldest. Each operate time is
represented in two consecutive holding registers, so that the register in the lower
address contains the MSB 16 bits.
Empty or unused cells in the log give value zero.
If an opening time or a closing time is greater than 300 milliseconds, this value is
given as NaN (not-a-number) when it is read as a floating-point value. Similarly,
charging times greater than 60 seconds are given as NaN.
7.11 Energy pulse outputs

Description
The relay can be configured to send a pulse whenever a certain amount of energy
has been imported or exported. The principle is presented in Figure 176. Each
time the energy level reaches the pulse size, a digital output is activated and the
relay is active as long as defined by a pulse duration setting.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 303
Figure 176 - Principle of energy pulses
Configurable:
100 ms − 5 000 ms
Configurable:
10 – 10 000 kWh
kvarh
The relay has four energy pulse outputs. The output channels are:
• active exported energy

• reactive exported energy
• active imported energy
• reactive imported energy
Each channel can be connected to any combination of the digital outputs using
the output matrix. The parameters for the energy pulses can be found in the
ENERGY menu "E" under the submenus E-PULSE SIZES and E-PULSE
DURATION.
Table 128 - Energy pulse output parameters
E-PULSE E+ 10 – 10 000 kWh Pulse size of

SIZES active exported
energy
Eq+ 10 – 10 000 kvarh Pulse size of

reactive
exported energy
E- 10 – 10 000 kWh Pulse size of

active imported
energy
Eq- 10 – 10 000 kvarh Pulse size of

reactive
imported energy
304 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
E-PULSE E+ 100 – 5000 ms Pulse length of

DURATION active exported
energy
Eq+ 100 – 5000 ms Pulse length of

reactive
exported energy
E- 100 – 5000 ms Pulse length of

active imported
energy
Eq- 100 – 5000 ms Pulse length of

reactive
imported energy
Scaling examples
1. The average active exported power is 250 MW.

The peak active exported power is 400 MW.
The pulse size is 250 kWh.
The average pulse frequency is 250/0.250 = 1000 pulses/h.
The peak pulse frequency is 400/0.250 = 1600 pulses/h.
Set pulse length to 3600/1600 - 0.2 = 2.0 s or less.
The lifetime of the mechanical digital output is 50x106/1000 h = 6 a.
This is not a practical scaling example unless a digital output lifetime of about
six years is accepted.
2. The average active exported power is 100 MW.
The peak active exported power is 800 MW.
The pulse size is 400 kWh.
The average pulse frequency is 100/0.400 = 250 pulses/h.
The peak pulse frequency is 800/0.400 = 2000 pulses/h.
3. Average active exported power is 20 MW.
Peak active exported power is 70 MW.
Pulse size is 60 kWh.
The average pulse frequency is 25/0.060 = 416.7 pulses/h.
The peak pulse frequency is 70/0.060 = 1166.7 pulses/h.
4. Average active exported power is 1900 kW.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 305
Peak active exported power is 50 MW.
Pulse size is 10 kWh.
The average pulse frequency is 1900/10 = 190 pulses/h.
The peak pulse frequency is 50000/10 = 5000 pulses/h.
Figure 177 - Application example of wiring the energy pulse outputs to a PLC
having common plus and using an external wetting voltage
+
Easergy P3 PLC
Active exported Pulse counter input 1

energy pulses +E
Reactive exported Pulse counter input 2

energy pulses +Eq
Active imported Pulse counter input 3

energy pulses -E
Reactive imported Pulse counter input 4

energy pulses -Eq
having common minus and using an external wetting voltage
Easergy P3 +
PLC
Active exported
energy pulses +E
Pulse counter input 1
Reactive exported
energy pulses +Eq
Active imported
energy pulses -E
Reactive imported
energy pulses -Eq
306 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
having common minus and an internal wetting voltage.
Easergy P3 PLC
Active exported Pulse counter input 1

energy pulses +E
Reactive exported
energy pulses +Eq Pulse counter input 2
Active imported
energy pulses -E
Reactive imported
energy pulses -Eq Pulse counter input 4
7.12 Active and reactive energy

The PowerLogic P3 protection device measures the following active and reactive
energy values, calculated based on the first three voltages and phase currents
IL1, IL2, and IL3 measured according to the related current flow for an outgoing
feeder:
• E+: the accumulated active energy exported

• E-: the accumulated active energy imported
• Eq+: the accumulated reactive energy exported
• Eq-: the accumulated reactive energy imported
The measurement is based on fundamental values or RMS values. You can

choose it with the Energy calculation mode setting in eSetup Easergy Pro.
Energy sign conversion
Independently of the power direction setting, the energy counter has an additional
setting for sign conversion. Use the Energy sign convention setting to define
positive and negative direction for export and import energy.
• The selection “Export – Positive power” results in positive power to
accumulate the export energy counter, while negative power accumulates the
import energy counter. Similarly, positive reactive power accumulates the
exported reactive energy counter, while negative reactive accumulates the
imported reactive power counter.
• The selection “Export – Negative power” results in negative power to
accumulate the export energy counter, while positive power accumulates the
import energy counter. Similarly, negative power accumulates the exported
reactive power counter, while positive reactive power accumulates the
imported reactive power counter.
Energy counter values available via communication protocols are impacted

according to selection.
Changing the energy sign conversion must reset the energy counter.
When the apparent energy counter reaches 1 TVAh, the active and reactive
energy counters reset to zero. To monitor the energy consumption on a feeder, a
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 307
dedicated energy counter can be set up over a defined time window of between
10 minutes and 24 hours.
Table 129 - Energy calculation settings
Energy calculation mode Fundamental: base frequency used for

energy calculation only
RMS: Base frequency and harmonics are

incorporated in the energy calculation
Energy sign convention Export – positive power: positive power to

accumulate the export energy counter and
negative power to accumulate the import
energy counter
Export – negative power: negative power

to accumulate the export energy counter
and positive power to accumulate the
import energy counter
7.13 Running hour counter

Description
The running hour counter is typically used to monitor the service time of the motor
or appropriate feeder. This function calculates the total active time of the selected
digital input, virtual I/O function button, GOOSE signal, POC signal or output
matrix output signal. The resolution is ten seconds and the data is stored in the
non-volatile memory.
Parameters
Table 130 - Running hour counter parameters
Runh 0...876000 h Total active (Set)89)

time, hours
Note: The label

text "Runh" can
be edited with
eSetup Easergy
Pro.
Runs 0...3599 s Total active (Set)

time, seconds
Starts 0...65535 Activation (Set)

counter
Status Stop Current status

of the selected
Run
digital signal
308 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Started at Date and time of

the last
activation
Stopped at Date and time of

the last
inactivation
89) (Set) = An informative value which can be edited as well.
7.14 Timers
Description
The PowerLogic P3 protection platform includes four settable timers that can be
used together with the user's programmable logic or to control setting groups and
other applications that require actions based on calendar time. Each timer has its
own settings. The selected on-time and off-time is set, after which the activation of
the timer can be set to be as daily or according to the day of the week (See the
setting parameters for details). The timer outputs are available for logic functions
and for the block and output matrix.
Figure 180 - Timer output sequence in different modes
Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday
(not in use)
Daily
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
MTWTF
MTWTFS
SatSun
You can force any timer, which is in use, on or off. The forcing is done by writing a
new status value. No forcing flag is needed as in forcing for example the digital
outputs.
The forced time is valid until the next forcing or until the next reversing timed act
from the timer itself.
The status of each timer is stored in the non-volatile memory when the auxiliary
power is switched off. At startup, the status of each timer is recovered.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 309
Table 131 - Setting parameters of timers
Parameter Value Description
TimerN - Timer status
- Not in use
0 Output is inactive
1 Output is active
On hh:mm:ss Activation time of the timer
Off hh:mm:ss De-activation time of the

timer
Mode For each four timers there

are 12 different modes
available:
- The timer is off and not

running. The output is off i.e.
0 all the time.
Daily The timer switches on and

off once every day.
Monday The timer switches on and

off every Monday.
Tuesday The timer switches on and

off every Tuesday.
Wednesday The timer switches on and

off every Wednesday.
Thursday The timer switches on and

off every Thursday.
Friday The timer switches on and

off every Friday.
Saturday The timer switches on and

off every Saturday.
Sunday The timer switches on and

off every Sunday.
MTWTF The timer switches on and

off every day except
Saturdays and Sundays
310 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Parameter Value Description
MTWTFS The timer switches on and

off every day except
Sundays.
SatSun The timer switches on and

off every Saturday and
Sunday.
7.15 Combined overcurrent status

Description
This function collects faults, fault types and registered fault currents of all enabled
overcurrent stages and shows them in the event log.
The combined overcurrent status can be used as an indication of faults.

Combined o/c indicates the amplitude of the last occurred fault. Also, a separate
indication of the fault type is informed during the start and the trip. Active phases
during the start and the trip are activated in the output matrix. After the fault is
switched off, the active signals release after the set delay “clearing delay“ has
passed. The combined o/c status referes to the following over current stages: I>,
I>>, I>>>, Iφ>, Iφ>>, Iφ>>> and Iφ>>>>.
Table 132 - Line fault parameters
IFltLas Current of the (Set)

latest
overcurrent fault
LINE ALARM
AlrL1 - Start (=alarm)

status for each
AlrL2 0
phase.
AlrL3 1
0 = No start
since alarm
ClrDly
1 = Start is on
OCs - Combined
overcurrent start
0
status.
1
AlrL1 = AlrL2 =
AlrL3 = 0
AlrL1 = 1 or
AlrL2 = 1 or
AlrL3 = 1
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 311
LxAlarm - 'On' Event Set

enabling for
On
AlrL1 – 3
Off
Events are
enabled
Events are
disabled
LxAlarmOff - 'Off' Event Set

enabling for
On
AlrL1...3
Off
Events are
enabled
Events are
disabled
OCAlarm - 'On' Event Set

enabling for
On
combined o/c
Off starts
Events are
enabled
Events are
disabled
OCAlarmOff - 'Off' Event Set

enabling for
On
combined o/c
Off starts
Events are
enabled
Events are
disabled
312 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
IncFltEvnt - Disabling Set

several start
On
and trip events
Off of the same
fault
Several events
are enabled 90)
Several events
of an increasing
fault is
disabled 91)
ClrDly 0 – 65535 s Duration for Set

active alarm
status AlrL1,
Alr2, AlrL3 and
OCs
90) Used with IEC 60870-105-103 communication protocol. The alarm screen shows the latest fault
current if it is the biggest registered fault current, too. Not used with Spabus because Spabus masters
usually do not like to have unpaired On/Off events.
91) Used with SPA-bus protocol because most SPA-bus masters need an off-event for each
corresponding on-event.
LINE FAULT
FltL1 - Fault (=trip)

status for each
FltL2 0
phase.
FltL3 1
0 = No fault
since fault
ClrDly
1 = Fault is on
OCt - Combined
overcurrent trip
0
status.
1
FltL1 = FltL2 =
FltL3 = 0
FltL1 = 1 or
FltL2 = 1 or
FltL3 = 1
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 313
LxTrip - 'On' Event Set

enabling for
On
FltL1 – 3
Off
Events are
enabled
Events are
disabled
LxTripOff - 'Off' Event Set

enabling for
On
FltL1...3
Off
Events are
enabled
Events are
disabled
OCTrip - 'On' Event Set

enabling for
On
combined o/c
Off trips
Events are
enabled
Events are
disabled
OCTripOff - 'Off' Event Set

enabling for
On
combined o/c
Off starts
Events are
enabled
Events are
disabled
314 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
IncFltEvnt - Disabling Set

several events
On
of the same
Off fault
Several events
are enabled 92)
Several events
of an increasing
fault is
disabled 93)
ClrDly 0 – 65535 Duration for Set

active alarm
status FltL1,
Flt2, FltL3 and
OCt
92) Used with IEC 60870-105-103 communication protocol. The alarm screen shows the latest fault
current if it is the biggest registered fault current, too. Not used with Spabus because Spabus masters
usually do not like to have unpaired On/Off events.
93) Used with SPA-bus protocol because most SPA-bus masters need an off-event for each
corresponding on-event.
Figure 181 - Combined o/c status
The fault that can be seen in the Figure 181 was 3.18 times to nominal and it
increased in to a two phase short circuit L1-L2. All signals those are stated as “1”
are also activated in the output matrix. After the fault disappears, the activated
signals release.
The combined overcurrent status can be found from eSetup Easergy Pro through
Protection > Protection stage status 2.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 315
7.16 Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74)

Description
Trip circuit supervision is used to ensure that the wiring from the protective relay
to a circuit breaker (CB) is in order. Even though the trip circuit is unused most of
the time, keeping it in order is important so that the CB can be tripped whenever
the relay detects a fault in the network.
The digital inputs of the relay can be used for trip circuit monitoring.
Also the closing circuit can be supervised using the same principle.
NOTE: Apply trip circuit supervision using a digital input and its programmable
time delay.
NOTE: Change the Digital inputs’ Mode to AC in case trip circuit supervision
is applied to the ac control voltage.
7.16.1 Trip circuit supervision with one digital input
The benefits of this scheme are that only one digital inputs is needed and no extra
wiring from the relay to the circuit breaker (CB) is needed. Also, supervising a 24
Vdc trip circuit is possible.
The drawback is that an external resistor is needed to supervise the trip circuit on
both CB positions. If supervising during the closed position only is enough, the
resistor is not needed.
• The digital input is connected parallel to the trip contacts (see Figure 182).
• The digital input is configured as normal closed (NC).
• The digital input delay is configured to be longer than the maximum fault time
to inhibit any superfluous trip circuit fault alarm when the trip contact is closed.
• The digital input is connected to a relay in the output matrix giving out any trip
circuit alarm.
• The trip relay must be configured as non-latched. Otherwise, a superfluous
trip circuit fault alarm follows after the trip contact operates, and the relay
remains closed because of latching.
• By utilizing an auxiliary contact of the CB for the external resistor, also the
auxiliary contact in the trip circuit can be supervised.
316 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 182 - Trip circuit supervision using a single digital input and an external
resistor R
+VAUX = 24 Vdc ... 240 Vdc
A
comm
C
D
0.5 s
G F
52b 52a
-VAUX
H
CB
R
-VAUX
A. Digital input 1 F. Circuit breaker compartment

B. Trip relay G. Close control
C. Alarm relay for trip circuit failure H. Open coil
D. Trip circuit failure alarm I. Close coil
E. Relay compartment
The circuit-breaker is in the closed position. The supervised circuitry in this CB

position is double-lined. The digital input is in active state when the trip circuit is
complete.
This is applicable to any digital inputs.
NOTE: The need for the external resistor R depends on the application and
circuit breaker manufacturer's specifications.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 317
Figure 183 - Alternative connection without using circuit breaker 52b auxiliary
contacts
+VAUX = 24 Vdc ... 240 Vdc
A
comm
C
D
0.5 s
G F
52a
-VAUX
R
H
CB
-VAUX

Trip circuit supervision using a single digital input and an external resistor R. The
circuit breaker is in the closed position. The supervised circuitry in this CB
position is double-lined. The digital input is in active state when the trip circuit is
complete.
Alternative connection without using circuit breaker 52b auxiliary contacts. This is
applicable for any digital inputs.
318 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 184 - Trip circuit supervision using a single digital input when the circuit
breaker is in open position
+VAUX = 24 Vdc ... 240 Vdc
C
D
0.5 s
G F
52b 52a
-VAUX
H
CB
R
-VAUX

P3T/EN/M/30-208A 319
Figure 185 - Alternative connection without using circuit breaker 52b auxiliary
contacts. Trip circuit supervision using a single digital input, when the circuit
breaker is in open position
+VAUX = 24 Vdc ... 240 Vdc
C
D
0.5 s
G F
52a
-VAUX
R
H
CB
-VAUX

Figure 186 - Example of digital input DI7 configuration for trip circuit supervision
with one digital input
320 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 187 - Example of output matrix configuration for trip circuit supervision with
one digital input
Example of dimensioning the external resistor R
UAUX = 110 Vdc - 20 % + 10%, Auxiliary voltage with tolerance
UDI = 18 Vdc, Threshold voltage of the digital input
IDI = 3 mA, Typical current needed to activate the digital input including a 1 mA
safety margin.
PCOIL = 50 W, Rated power of the open coil of the circuit breaker. If this value is
not known, 0 Ω can be used for the RCOIL.
UMIN = UAUX - 20 % = 88 V
UMAX = UAUX + 10 % = 121 V
RCOIL =U2AUX / PCOIL = 242 Ω.
The external resistance value is calculated using Equation 36:
Equation 36
U MIN − U DI − I DI ⋅ RCoil
R=
I DI
R = (88 – 18 – 0.003 x 242)/0.003 = 23.1 kΩ
In practice, the coil resistance has no effect.
By selecting the next smaller standard size, we get 22 kΩ.
The power rating for the external resistor is estimated using Equation 37 and
Equation 38.
The Equation 37 is for the CB open situation including a 100 % safety margin to
limit the maximum temperature of the resistor:
Equation 37
P = 2 ⋅ I DI
2
⋅R
P = 2 x 0.0032 x 22000 = 0.40 W
Select the next bigger standard size, for example 0.5 W.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 321
When the trip contacts are still closed and the CB is already open, the resistor
has to withstand much higher power (Equation 38) for this short time:
Equation 38
2
U MAX
P=
R
P = 1212 / 22000 = 0.67 W
A 0.5 W resistor is enough for this short time peak power, too. However, if the trip
relay is closed for longer than a few seconds, a 1 W resistor should be used.
7.16.2 Trip circuit supervision with two digital inputs
The benefit of this scheme is that no external resistor is needed.
The drawbacks are that two digital inputs (DIs) and two extra wires from the relay
to the CB compartment are needed. Additionally, the minimum allowed auxiliary
voltage is 48 V dc which is more than twice the threshold voltage of the digital
input because when the CB is in open position, the two digital inputs are in series.
When two DIs are connected in a series, the switching threshold value used with
one DI is too high. Therefore, a lower value must be selected: 24 V if the nominal
operation voltage for DI inputs is 110 V or 110 V if the nominal operation voltage
is 220 V.
• The first digital input is connected parallel to the auxiliary contact of the circuit
breaker's open coil.
• Another auxiliary contact is connected in series with the circuitry of the first
digital input. This makes it possible to supervise also the auxiliary contact in
the trip circuit.
• The second digital input is connected in parallel with the trip contacts.
• Both inputs are configured as normal closed (NC).
• The user’s programmable logic is used to combine the digital input signals
with an AND port. The delay is configured to be longer than the maximum
fault time to inhibit any superfluous trip circuit fault alarm when the trip contact
is closed.
• The output from the logic is connected to a relay in the output matrix giving
out any trip circuit alarm.
In Figure 188, the supervised circuitry in this CB position is double-lined. The

digital input is in active state when the trip circuit is complete. This is applicable
for all digital inputs.
322 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 188 - Trip circuit supervision with two digital inputs and closed CB
+VAUX = 48 Vdc ... 240 Vdc
A
comm
C
D
& 0.5 s
G F
52b 52a
-VAUX
H
CB
-VAUX

In Figure 189, the two digital inputs are in series.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 323
Figure 189 - Trip circuit supervision with two digital inputs and CB in open position
+VAUX = 48 Vdc ... 240 Vdc
A
comm
C
D
& 0.5 s
G F
52b 52a
-VAUX
H
CB
-VAUX

Figure 190 - An example of digital input configuration for trip circuit supervision
with two digital inputs DI1 and DI2
324 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 191 - An example of logic configuration for trip circuit supervision with two
digital inputs DI1 and DI2.
Figure 192 - An example of output matrix configuration for trip circuit supervision
with two digital inputs
7.16.3 Trip circuit supervision with two combined digital inputs
The trip circuit supervision scheme with two digital inputs 52a and 52b can be
implemented as illustrated in Figure 193. No external resistors are needed for this
scheme to function.
Figure 193 - Trip circuit supervision scheme
wire 1
Trip
relay(s) CB open DI1 CB closed DI2 Easergy P3
wire 2a
wire 2b
Circuit breaker
Trip
coil
wire 3
When the trip circuit is OK under normal conditions, the status of inputs is
opposite (0,1) or (1,0). When the trip circuit is not OK (coil, wires, auxiliary contact
state or auxiliary voltage failure), both the logic inputs are in the same state, and
an alarm is issued after a delay. This delay is needed to prevent false signaling
during breaker opening events. The timing is set based on breaker operating time
and trip pulse length.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 325
Table 133 - TCS alarm output depending on the CB and its auxiliary contact
positions, and the possible wiring failure conditions
CB position Conditions CB open DI1 CB closed TCS alarm

DI2
Closed Trip circuit OK Closed Open FALSE
Wire 1 failure94) Open Open TRUE
Wire 2a Open Open TRUE

failure94)
Wire 3 or trip Open Open TRUE

coil failure94)
Open Trip circuit OK Open Closed FALSE
Wire 1 failure94) Open Open TRUE
Wire 2b Open Open TRUE

failure94)
Wire 3 or trip Open Open TRUE

coil failure94)
94) "failure" indicates that one or more of the components are permanently open circuit or short circuit
Figure 194 - Block diagram of trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74)
CB open DI1
T 0
=1 TCS alarm
CB closed DI2
T=2s
P533RKB
326 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
8 Communication and protocols Transformer protection relay
8 Communication and protocols
8.1 Cybersecurity
According to a classic model of information security, the three security goals are:
• confidentiality (prevention of unauthorized disclosure of information)
• integrity (prevention of unauthorized modification of information)
• availability (ensuring that information is always available to authorized users)
These goals may be used as a starting point in designing security solutions for
electric power distribution.
We recommend that:
• Computer systems used to design or operate electric power distribution
systems are designed with the principle of least privilege, in other words, that
users only have those access rights that they need to perform their duties.
• All workstations and servers have an effective antimalware solution, such as a
virus scanner.
• Computer systems are protected with adequate physical security measures to
help to prevent physical tampering of the devices or networks.
NOTICE
• Change all passwords from their default values when taking the protection
device into use.
• Change all passwords regularly.
• Ensure a minimum level of password complexity according to common
password guidelines.

access.
Related topics
2.4 Access to device configuration
8.2 Communication ports

The relay has one fixed communication port: a USB port on the front panel for
connection to eSetup Easergy Pro setting and configuration tool.
Optionally, the relay may have up to to two serial ports, COM 3 and COM 4, for
serial protocols (for example IEC 103) and one Ethernet port for Ethernet-based
communication protocols (for example IEC 61850).
The number of available serial ports depends on the type of the communication
option cards.
Each communication port can be individually enabled or disabled with the

Configurator access level via:
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 327
Transformer protection relay 8 Communication and protocols
• the front panel of the PowerLogic P3 protection device

• eSetup Easergy Pro
• the web HMI
NOTE: By default and when the device comes from the factory, Ethernet
Protocol 1 is enabled and the default protocol is IEC-61850. Also Ethernet
Protocol 2 is enabled and the default protocol is Modbus TCPs.
Figure 195 - Ethernet protocol default setting
328 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 196 - Ethernet, COM 1 and COM 2 ports
NOTE: It is possible to have up to 2 serial communication protocols

simultaneously in the same D9 and Ethernet connector but restriction is that
same protocol can be used only once.
The Protocol configuration setting view contains selection for the protocol, port
settings and message/error/timeout counters. Only serial communication
protocols are valid with RS-232 interface.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 329
Figure 197 - Protocol configuration setting view
Protocol Protocol Set

selection for
COM port
None -
SPA-bus SPA-bus (slave)
ProfibusDP Interface to
Profibus DB
module VPA
3CG (slave)
ModbusSlv Modbus RTU

slave
IEC-103 IEC-60870-5-10
3 (slave)
ExternalIO Modbus RTU

master for
external I/O-
modules
IEC 101 IEC-608670-5-1

01
DNP3 DNP 3.0
330 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
GetSet Communicationi
protocola for
eSetup Easergy
Pro interface
Msg# 0–232 - 1 Message Clr

counter since
the relay has
restarted or
since last
clearing
Errors 0–216 - 1 Protocol Clr

interruption
since the relay
has restarted or
since last
clearing
Tout 0–216 - 1 Timeout Clr

interruption
since the relay
has restarted or
since last
clearing
Display of 1.
speed/DPS
current
communication
parameters.
speed = bit/s
D = number of
data bits
P = parity: none,
even, odd
S = number of
stop bits
Set = An editable parameter (password needed)
Clr = Clearing to zero is possible
1. The communication parameters are set in the protocol specific menus. For the local
port command line interface the parameters are set in configuration menu.
8.2.1 Ethernet port
The Ethernet port is used for Ethernet protocols like IEC61850 and Modbus TCP.
The physical interface is described in 10.6 Connections.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 331
The parameters for the port can be set via the device's front panel or using
eSetup Easergy Pro. Two different protocols can be used simultaneously – both
protocols use the same IP address and MAC address (but different port number).
8.2.2 Disabling the Ethernet communication
NOTICE
• Disable the Ethernet communication in environments where effective

antimalware solutions have not been taken into use.
• For transmitting data over an internal network, segment the network
physically or logically and restrict access using standard controls such as
firewalls and other relevant features supported by your device such as
IPTable allowlisting.
• For transmitting data over an external network, encrypt protocol
transmissions over all external connections using an encrypted tunnel, TLS
wrapper or a similar solution.

access.
NOTE: The device is not capable of transmitting data encrypted using

Ethernet protocols. If other users gain access to your network, transmitted
information can be disclosed or subject to tampering.
1. To disable all Ethernet-based protocols:
a. In eSetup Easergy Pro, go to Communication > Protocol configuration.
b. Under Ethernet, disable the Ethernet port by unselecting the Enable

Ethernet communication checkbox.
332 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 198 - Disabling the Ethernet port
This disables all the Ethernet-based protocols (FTP, HTTP, Telnet, and
Ethernet protocols).
2. To disable FTP, HTTP, Telnet, or Ethernet protocols separately:
a. Under Ethernet, select the Enable Ethernet communication checkbox.
b. Unselect the Enable... checkbox for the servers or protocols you want to
disable.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 333
Figure 199 - Disabling individual Ethernet-based protocols
8.2.3 Disabling remote configuration
Disabling remote configuration is a common practice to improve device security

by preventing unauthorized users from changing the device or configuration
remotely.
To disable remote configuration in general (through GetSet protocol on Telnet port

and also through HTTP using a web browser), you can use the parameter “Lock
334 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Remote Config" available on the Protocol configuration page of eSetup

Easergy Pro and function keys (F1 or F2) or virtual inputs (VI1-VI20). Status of
locking is presented by the value of “Remote Config Locked" parameter (No or
Yes).
Here we use the F1 key as an example to show you how to lock the remote
configuration.
1. Login to eSetup Easergy Pro with Configurator level.
2. Select the Enable HTTP Server checkbox and Enable Telnet checkbox.
3. Select F1 from the Lock Remote Config drop-down list.
Figure 200 - Selecting F1
4. Click Write.
The status of Remote Config Locked is changed from “No” to “Yes”.
Figure 201 - Writing changes
NOTE: Locking or unlocking remote configuration by using function keys

is password protected. Only Configurator level password is required to
change lock value.
Operation principle:
◦ Locking remote configuration when session is open causes connection

drop.
◦ When remote configuration is locked any attempt to connect is rejected.
◦ Locking remote configuration when web browser is used causes that
every next HTTP request will be rejected (page reloading or parameter
setting attempt).
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 335
8.3 Storm protection

Storm protection limits the number of broadcast messages, for example, address
resolution protocol (ARP) messages that are forwarded to the central processing
unit (CPU) or to the protection device’s second Ethernet interface. Storm
protection may be necessary if the Ethernet network contains devices that may
send a big amount of ARP requests when starting up or during the normal
operation. If storm protection is not enabled, the protection devices can be
overloaded with the big number of ARP messages.
The storm protection limit defines how big percentage of the broadcast messages
are forwarded to the CPU.
Storm protection level 0.01% means 15 packets per second in a 100 Mbps
network. Broadcast traffic forwarded to CPU can be limited down to 15% for 100
Mbps. This is based on a theoretical maximum of 100 packets per second that the
CPU can receive and process.
Storm protection can be enabled in the Advanced Ethernet options setting view
with the Storm protection on Port1 and Storm protection on Port2
parameters.
Figure 202 - Storm protection properties
8.4 Parallel Redundancy Protocol

The Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) implemented in PowerLogic P3 devices
is specified in the IEC62439-3 (Clause 4) standard and is available when a dual-
port, 100 Mbps Ethernet interface card is used.
PRP properties:
• Ethernet redundancy method independent of any industrial Ethernet protocol

or topology (tree, ring or mesh)
• seamless switchover and recovery in case of failure (no delay)
• continuous supervision of redundancy for better management of network
devices
• suitable for hot swap - 24 hour/365 day operation in substations
• allows mixing of devices with single and dual network interfaces on the same
local area network (LAN)
• allows HMI devices (laptops, workstations) to be connected to the network
using standard Ethernet adapters
• particularly suited for hard real-time systems such as substation automation,
high-speed drives and transportation
336 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
For additional information, see application note Parallel Redundancy Protocol for
Easergy P3Ux and Easergy P3x3x relays with dual-port 100 Mbps Ethernet
interface (P3/EN ANCOM/A004).
Figure 203 - Redundancy protocol for Ethernet setting view
Figure 204 - Parallel Redundancy Protocol setting view
8.5 Communication protocols

The communication protocols enable the transfer of the following type of data:
• events
• status information
• measurements
• control commands
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 337
• clock synchronization
• some settings through SPA bus, IEC-103, Modbus and IEC-61850 protocols
• disturbance recordings through IEC-103, Modbus and IEC-61850 protocols
This product contains software developed by Viola Systems.
8.5.1 Modbus RTU and Modbus TCP
Modbus RTU and Modbus TCP protocols are often used in power plants and
industrial applications. The difference between these two protocols is the media.
Modbus TCP uses Ethernet and Modbus RTU uses RS-485, optic fibre, or
RS-232.
eSetup Easergy Pro shows a list of all available data items for Modbus. They are
also available as a zip file ("Communication parameter protocol mappings.zip").
The information available via Modbus RTU and Modbus TCP includes:
• status values
• control commands
• measurement values
• events
• protection settings
• disturbance recordings
The Modbus communication is activated via a menu selection with the parameter
"Protocol". See 8.2 Communication ports.
For more information on Modbus configuration, see the document

P3APS18025EN Modbus configuration instructions.
For the Ethernet interface configuration, see 8.2.1 Ethernet port.
8.5.2 Profibus DP
The Profibus DP protocol is widely used in the industry. An external VPA 3CG and
VX072 cables are required.
Device profile "continuous mode"
In this mode, the relay is sending a configured set of data parameters

continuously to the Profibus DP master. The benefit of this mode is the speed and
easy access to the data in the Profibus master. The drawback is the maximum
buffer size of 128 bytes, which limits the number of data items transferred to the
master. Some PLCs have their own limitation for the Profibus buffer size, which
may further limit the number of transferred data items.
Device profile "Request mode"
Using the request mode, it is possible to read all the available data from the
PowerLogic P3 relay and still use only a very short buffer for Profibus data
transfer. The drawback is the slower overall speed of the data transfer and the
need of increased data processing at the Profibus master as every data item must
be separately requested by the master.
338 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
NOTE: In the request mode, it is not possible to read continuously only one
single data item. At least two different data items must be read in turn to get
updated data from the relay.
There is a separate manual for VPA 3CG for the continuous mode and request
mode. The manual is available for downloading on our website.
Available data
eSetup Easergy Pro shows the list of all available data items for both modes. A
separate document "Communication parameter protocol mappings.zip" is also
available.
The Profibus DP communication is activated usually for remote port via a menu
selection with parameter "Protocol". See 8.2 Communication ports.
8.5.3 SPA-bus
The relay has full support for the SPA-bus protocol including reading and writing
the setting values. Also, reading multiple consecutive status data bits,
measurement values or setting values with one message is supported.
Several simultaneous instances of this protocol, using different physical ports, are
possible, but the events can be read by one single instance only.
There is a separate document "Communication parameter protocol mappings.zip"

of SPA-bus data items available.
8.5.4 IEC 60870-5-103 (IEC-103)
The IEC standard 60870-5-103 "Companion standard for the informative interface
of protection equipment" provides a standardized communication interface to a
primary system (master system).
The unbalanced transmission mode of the protocol is used, and the relay
functions as a secondary station (slave) in the communication. Data is transferred
to the primary system using the "data acquisition by polling" principle.
The IEC functionality includes application functions:

• station initialization
• general interrogation
• clock synchronization
• command transmission.
It is also possible to transfer parameter data and disturbance recordings via the
IEC 103 protocol interface.
The following application service data unit (ASDU) types can be used:
• ASDU 1: Time-tagged message
• ASDU 3: Measurands I
• ASDU 5: Identification message
• ASDU 6: Time synchronization
• ASDU 8: Termination of general interrogation
• ASDU 10: Generic data
The relay accepts:
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 339
• ASDU 6: Time synchronization

• ASDU 7: Initiation of general interrogation
• ASDU 10: Generic data
• ASDU 20: General command
• ASDU 21: Generic command
• ASDU 23: Disturbance recorder file transfer
The data in a message frame is identified by:

• type identification
• function type
• information number.
These are fixed for data items in the compatible range of the protocol, for
example, the trip of I> function is identified by:
• type identification = 1
• function type = 160
• information number = 90
"Private range" function types are used for such data items that are not defined by
the standard (for example, the status of the digital inputs and the control of the
objects).
The function type and information number used in private range messages is
configurable. This enables flexible interfacing to different master systems.
For more information on IEC 60870-5-103 in PowerLogic P3 relays, see the "IEC
103 Interoperability List.pdf" and "Communication parameter protocol
mappings.zip" documents.
8.5.5 DNP 3.0
The relay supports communication using the DNP 3.0 protocol. The following
DNP 3.0 data types are supported:
• binary input
• binary input change
• double-bit input
• binary output
• analog input
• counters
For more information, see the “DNP 3.0 Device Profile Document" and
"Communication parameter protocol mappings.zip". DNP 3.0 communication is
activated via menu selection. RS-485 interface is often used but also RS-232 and
fibre optic interfaces are possible.
8.5.6 IEC 60870-5-101 (IEC-101)
The IEC 60870-5-101 standard is derived from the IEC 60870-5 protocol standard
definition. In PowerLogic P3 relays, the IEC 60870-5-101 communication protocol
is available via menu selection. The relay works as a controlled outstation (slave)
unit in unbalanced mode.
The supported application functions include process data transmission, event

transmission, command transmission, general interrogation, clock
340 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
synchronization, transmission of integrated totals, and acquisition of transmission

delay.
For more information on IEC 60870-5-101 in PowerLogic P3 relays, see the
"Communication parameter protocol mappings.zip" document.
8.5.7 IEC 61850
The IEC 61850 protocol is available with the optional communication module. It
can be used to read or write static data from the relay or to receive events and to
receive or send GOOSE messages from or to other relays.
The IEC 61850 server interface includes the following features:
• configurable data model: selection of logical nodes corresponding to active

application functions
• configurable pre-defined data sets
• supported dynamic data sets created by clients
• supported reporting function with buffered and unbuffered report control
blocks
• support for changing selected setting parameters of the protection functions
• sending analogue values over GOOSE
• supported control modes:
◦ direct with normal security
◦ direct with enhanced security
◦ select before operation with normal security
◦ select before operation with enhanced security
• supported horizontal communication with GOOSE: configurable GOOSE
publisher data sets, configurable filters for GOOSE subscriber inputs, GOOSE
inputs available in the application logic matrix
• 32 data points can be published with GOOSE (two goose control blocks with
maximum 16 data points).
• 64 binary data points and five analog data points can be subscribed in
GOOSE (maximum five different MAC addresses).
• The maximum number of clients is eight (the maximum number of BRCBs is
eight and the maximum number or URCBs is eight).
• Both Ed1 and Ed2 are supported and can be selected with a parameter.
NOTE: Configure a maximum of 2 clients for the IEC 61850 application.
For additional information, see separate documents:

• IEC 61850 Edition 2 Certificate for Easergy P3
• Easergy P3 communication protocol parameter mapping
• IEC 61850 configuration instructions
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 341
Figure 205 - IEC 61850 default settings
8.5.8 Ethernet/IP
The relay supports communication using the Ethernet/IP protocol which is a part
of the Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) family. The Ethernet/IP protocol is
available with the optional in-built Ethernet port. The protocol can be used to read
or write data from or to the relay using request / response communication or via
cyclic messages transporting data assigned to assemblies (sets of data).
For more detailed information and parameter lists for Ethernet/IP, refer to a
separate application note “EtherNet/IP configuration instructions.pdf”.
For the complete data model of Ethernet/IP, see the document “DeviceNet and
EtherNetIP data model.pdf” and "Communication parameter protocol
mappings.zip".
8.5.9 HTTP server – Webset
The Webset HTTPS configuration interface provides the option to configure the
relay with a standard web browser such as Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox, or
Google Chrome. The feature is available when the communication option C, D, N
or R is in use.
A subset of the relays's features is available in the Webset interface. The group
list and group view from the relay are provided, and most groups, except the
LOGIC and the MIMIC groups are configurable.
8.5.10 IEC 60870-5-104 (IEC-104)
The IEC 60870-5-104 standard is derived from the IEC 60870-5 protocol standard
definition. It is a combination of the application layer of IEC 60870-5-101 and the
transport functions provided by a TCP/IP protocol stack.
In PowerLogic P3 relays, the IEC 60870-5-104 communication protocol is

available via menu selection on the Ethernet ports. The relay works as a
controlled station (server). The supported application functions include process
data transmission, event transmission, command transmission, general
interrogation, clock- synchronization, and transmission of integrated totals. For
342 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
more information on IEC 60870-5-104 in PowerLogic P3 relays, see the

"Communication parameter protocol mappings" document (P3TDS17005).
8.6 IP filter
PowerLogic P3 devices contain a simple IP filter (IP firewall), which can be used
to filter incoming TCP/IP connections. This filtering applies to all protocols
assigned as Ethernet Protocol 1 and Ethernet Protocol 2, and can be configured
via eSetup Easergy Pro.
Figure 206 - IP firewall setting view
The IP filter works based on configured rules. Incoming IP packets are compared
against the rules, and when a matching rule is found, the packet is handled using
the action specified for the rule. If none of the rules matches the packet, the
default action is taken on the packet. The IP filter records how many times a
packet has matched a rule. The number is shown in the Counter column.
On TCP connections, the rules are mostly applied only when a connection is
opened.
8.6.1 Configuring the IP filter
You can configure up to 10 rules for the IP filter via eSetup Easergy Pro and
enable each rule individually.
1. In eSetup Easergy Pro, go to Communication > Protocol configuration.
2. In the IP firewall setting view, select the Enable IP firewall checkbox to

enable the firewall.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 343
Figure 207 - IP firewall setting view
3. In the IP firewall setting view, create a rule.

a. In the Name column, give the rule a name (maximum 32 characters) that
describes its purpose .
b. In the IP address column, specify an IP address.

The IP address is used to filter the incoming IP packets based on the
(apparent) IP address of the source device. There are four options.
Table 135 - IP address for the IP filter
IP address Description
Any By writing a dash or value zero in this

column, the rule is set to match any
source IP address. The column shows
a dash.
Single IP address If a single IP address (such as

192.168.0.10) is written here, the
packets (or connections) must originate
from this IP address to match the rule.
IP subnet If all IP addresses in a subnet should

match this rule, write the subnet here
using the CIDR notation. For example,
notation 192.168.0.0/24 matches all IP
addresses in the range 192.168.0.0–
192.168.0.255.
IP address range If a range of IP addresses (for

example, 192.168.0.20–192.168.0.30)
is written here, packets from these
addresses match the rule. Both end
points of this range are inclusive.
344 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
NOTE: If the matching range of IP addresses can be expressed using

the CIDR notation, the range is expressed in this format, regardless of
how the range was entered into the configuration. As a result, the
presentation format of the configuration as it is read from the device
might not match the format in which it was entered. This may cause
problems with eSetup Easergy Pro because this tool expects the
presentation format to match exactly. To work around this issue, select
the Reset and read current view command in eSetup Easergy Pro
after writing the configuration. This is required to handle the large
number of different input formats supported.
c. In the Action column, specify an action for the rule.

There are four options.
Table 136 - Actions for IP filter
Action Description
Allow The packet is allowed to continue

normally. This means that the specified
source devices can use the specified
services on the P3 device.
Reject95) The packet is blocked and the remote

peer is informed about this decision.
Drop The packet is blocked without informing

the remote peer.
Cont. The processing of the other rules

continues on this packet normally.
95) Because of the implementation details in the PowerLogic P3 TCP/IP stack, rules that are
given the Reject action sometimes behave as if their action was Drop.
8.6.2 Unexpected packets
The IP filter also can also detect unexpected packets. For example, if a client
attempts to close a connection that does not exist, this is considered an
unexpected packet.
Certain techniques used by hackers produce unexpected packets, but such

packets may also appear on the network if some packets are lost or dropped
because of a malfunctioning network device. Some devices may also have
programming errors or bugs produce unexpected packets in their TCP/IP stack.
The unexpected packets feature attempts to distinguish between these two

sources based on the number of unexpected packets detected within a
configurable “recent period”. If the number of these packets is greater than the
configured limit, the selected alarm signal is triggered.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 345
Figure 208 - Unexpected packets setting view
Table 137 - Parameters for unexpected packages
Counter Counts the number of unexpected packets

detected within the configured recent
period.
Limit The limit after which an alarm is given
Recent period The number of unexpected packets

counted within this period is compared to
the configured limit value
• Default value: 1 minute
• Maximum value: 65535 minutes (45 days)
Alarm Select which CS alarm signal (CS Alarm

1/CS Alarm 2) is activated when the set
limit is exceeded. The alarms can be
assigned to other signals in the output
matrix.
8.6.3 Alarms
Active cybersecurity (CS) alarms can be viewed in the Alarms view. When an
alarm signal has been asserted, it remains active until it is cleared with the Clear
alarms command.
Figure 209 - Alarms
346 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
9 Applications and configuration examples Transformer protection relay
9 Applications and configuration examples

This chapter describes the protection functions in different protection applications.
The relay can be used for line/feeder protection of medium voltage networks with
a grounded, low-resistance grounded, isolated or a compensated neutral point.
The relays have all the required functions to be applied as a backup relay in high-
voltage networks or to a transformer differential relay. In addition, the relay
includes all the required functions to be applied as a motor protection relay for
rotating machines in industrial protection applications.
The relays provide a circuit breaker control function. Additional primary switching
relays (earthing switches and disconnector switches) can also be controlled from
the front panel or the control or SCADA/automation system. A programmable
logic function is also implemented in the relay for various applications, for
example interlockings schemes.
9.1 Arc flash detection
Figure 210 - Typical arc flash detection scheme with integrated arc flash option
card
T1
7
S1
G
A 6
T1
B S2
C S1 S3 S1 S1 S1 S1
T1 T1 T1 T1
D T1
S2 S2 S2 S2 S2
E
S3
1 S3
2 S3
3 S3
4 S3
5
A. Incomer cable zone E. Feeder cable zone

B. Incomer circuit breaker zone F. Light information via hard-wired BIO L> (feeder cable and circuit
breaker)
C. Busbar zone G. Light information via hard-wired BIO L> (incomer busbar and
circuit breaker)
D. Feeder circuit breaker zone
In this application example, the arc flash sensor for zone E is connected to device
1. If the sensor detects a fault and simultaneously, device 1 detects an
overcurrent signal, zone E is isolated by the outgoing feeder breaker.
The arc flash sensor for the second feeder zone E is connected to device 2, and it
operates the same way. The arc flash sensors for zones C and D are connected
to device 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5. If a sensor detects a fault in zone C or D, the light-only
signal is transferred to device 6 which also detects the overcurrent and then trips
the main circuit breaker.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 347
Transformer protection relay 9 Applications and configuration examples
An arc flash fault in zone A or B does not necessarily activate the current
detection in device 6. However, arc flash detection can be achieved by using the
light-only principle. If an arc flash occurs in the cable termination or incomer
circuit breaker in zone A or B, the fault is cleared by an overcurrent signal.
WARNING
Do not route the Binary Input and Output (BIO) line close to the primary
power circuits.

Figure 211 - Arc flash detection application example – fiber
T1
7
S1
E
A 6
T1
B
T1 T1 T1 T1
C T1
D
S1 S1 S1 S1 S1
1 2 3 4 5
A. Incomer cable zone D. Feeder cable zone

B. Busbar zone E. Light information via optical BIO L> (incomer busbar and circuit
breaker)
C. Feeder circuit breaker zone F. Light information via optical BIO L> (feeder cable and circuit
breaker)
The fiber-loop arc flash sensor for zone D is connected to device 1. If the sensor
detects a fault and simultaneously, device 1 detects an overcurrent signal, zone D
is isolated by the outgoing feeder breaker.
For the other feeders, the fiber-loop arc flash sensors monitoring zone D are
connected to the appropriate feeder relays and they operate the same way as
feeder 1.
The fiber loop arc flash sensors for zones C, B and A are connected to device 6.
If a sensor detects a fault in zone C, B or A and simultaneously, device 6 detects
an overcurrent signal, the fault is cleared by the incoming breaker operation.
Device 7 measures the overcurrent and receives light detection signals from
zones A, B, and C. It trips the substation if device 6 is unable to measure the
overcurrent.
348 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
WARNING
Do not route the Binary Input and Output (BIO) line close to the primary
power circuits.

Figure 212 - Arc flash detection application example – fiber connections
A A
B B C
A. L > (BB & CB) via fibre-optic link C. Incomer

B. Feeder
Figure 213 - Arc matrix – light
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 349
Transformer protection relay 9 Applications and configuration examples
Figure 214 - Arc matrix – output
9.2 Using CSH120 and CSH200 with I02 0.2 A / 1 A core balance
CT input
General
The CSH120 and CSH200 core balance CTs are for direct earth fault overcurrent
measurement. The only difference between them is the diameter. Because of their
low-voltage insulation, they can only be used on cables.
These core balance CTs can be connected to the PowerLogic P3 protection

device range when 0.2 A I0 input is used. This needs to be determined when
ordering the protection device (select 0.2 A for the earth fault current input in the
order code).
Settings in the PowerLogic P3 protection device
When CSH120 or CSH200 is connected to an PowerLogic P3 protection device,

to secure correct operation of the protection functions and measurement values,
use the following values in the Scaling setting view:
• I02 CT primary: 470 A
• I02 CT secondary: 1 A
• Nominal I02 input: 0.2 A
Figure 215 - Scalings view for I02 input
Lower scaling values
The device also allows selecting ten times lower scaling values. Set the values to:
• I02 CT primary: 47 A
• I02 CT secondary: 0.1 A
• Nominal I02 input: 0.2 A
The minimum setting for the primary current is then 0.005 x 47 A = 0,235 A.
350 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Measuring specifications
When CSH120 or CSH200 is used with PowerLogic P3 protection devices the

measuring range is 0.2 A–300 A of primary current. The minimum setting for
primary current is 0.005xI0 which in this case means 0.005 x 470 A = 2.35 A of
primary current.
Figure 216 - Earth fault overcurrent setting view
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 351
Transformer protection relay 10 Installation
10 Installation
10.1 Safety in installation

This page contains important safety instructions that must be followed precisely
before attempting to install, repair, service or maintain electrical equipment.
Carefully read and follow the safety instructions described below. Only qualified
personnel, equipped with appropriate individual protection equipment, may work
on or operate the equipment. Qualified personnel are individuals who:
• are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the
equipment and of the system to which it is being connected.
• are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted
safety engineering practices and are authorised to energize and de-energize
equipment and to isolate, ground, and label it.
• are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety
engineering practices.
• are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH BEFORE
PERFORMING ANY INTERVENTION:
• Turn off all power supplying the protection device and the equipment in
which it is installed before working on it.
• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that power
is off.
• Replace all devices, doors, and covers before turning on power to this
equipment.
• Apply appropriate personal protective equipment and follow safe electrical
work practices. See local regulation.
• Do not install this product in ATEX class 0, 1 and 2 areas.
DANGER
HAZARD OF FIRE
Insufficient tightening causes high contact resistance and overheat with

current, in extreme cases, even loose and ineffective connections and fire
hazard. Tighten all the electric connections with specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious

injury.
352 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
10 Installation Transformer protection relay
WARNING
HAZARD OF UNEXPECTED OPERATION
Do not energize the primary circuit before this protection relay is properly
configured.

CAUTION
HAZARD OF FIRE, DAMAGE TO ELECTRONICS OR MALFUNCTION
If you are authorized to withdraw the relay:

• Disconnect the power supply before removing or replacing a module or
the withdrawable part of the protection relay.
• Never touch electronic parts (electrostatic discharge).
• Before replacing the withdrawable part, visually check the cleanliness and
if there are any foreign objects in the case, the withdrawable part and the
connectors.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment

damage.
Protection Class I equipment
Before energizing the equipment it must be grounded using the protective

conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in
the case of plug connected equipment.
The protective conductor (ground) connection must not be removed since the
protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be lost.
When the protective (ground) conductor terminal (PCT) is also used to terminate
cable screens, etc., it is essential that the integrity of the protective (ground)
conductor is checked after the addition or removal of such functional ground
connections. For M4 stud PCTs the integrity of the protective (ground)
connections should be ensured by use of a locknut or similar.
The recommended minimum protective conductor (ground) wire size is 2.5 mm²
(AWG 14) (3.3 mm² (AWG 12) for North America) unless otherwise stated in the
technical data section of the equipment documentation, or otherwise required by
local or country wiring regulations.
The protective conductor (ground) connection must be low-inductance and as

short as possible. All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential.
Connections that are pre-wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded
when binary inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output
relays are connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections
should be connected to the common potential of the grouped connections.
NOTE: Use only copper conductors with minimum 75°C rating.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 353
10.2 Checking the consignment

Check that the unit packaging and the seal are intact at the receipt of the delivery.
Our products leave the factory in closed, sealed packaging. If the transport
packaging is open or the seal is broken, the confidentiality and authenticity of the
information contained in the products cannot be ensured.
10.3 Product identification

Each PowerLogic P3 relay is delivered in a separate package containing:
• PowerLogic P3 protection relay with the necessary terminal connectors

• Production testing certificate
• Quick Start manual
Optional accessories are delivered in separate packages.
To identify a PowerLogic P3 protection relay, see the labels on the package and
on the side of the relay.
Serial number label
Figure 217 - P3x3x Serial number label
1 Un: 100/110V Made in Finland

2 fn: 50/60Hz 12 Mfg Date: 27.7.2017
3 In: 1/5A I
5 I n: 1/5A 13 MAC: 001AD3011FF1
4 Io1n: 5/1A 6 Io2n: 1/0.2A
8 Pmax:
P: 35W 7 Io3n: 1/5A
9 Uaux: 110 240 Vac/dc
Type: 10 P3G32-CGITA-KAFNA-BAAAA
S/N: 11 EB173020002 14 VID: P3G32-001017
1. Rated voltage Un
2. Rated frequency fn
3. Rated phase current In
4. Rated earth fault current I01n
5. Rated phase current I´n *)
6. Rated earth fault current I02n
7. Rated earth fault current I03n96) *)
8. Power consumption Pmax
9. Power supply operating range Uaux
10. Order code
11. Serial number
12. Manufacturing date
13. MAC address for TCP/IP communication
14. Production identification
96) *)Available in P3M32, P3T32 and P3G32 models only
354 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Unit package label
Figure 218 - P3x3x Unit package label
P3F30 A x1
B
Protection relay
Relais de protection
Made in Country
EB20253L0100022
C REL52101
135732
PowerLogic - P3
D P3F30-CGGII-KAENA-BAAAA F
P3F30-009096
E
606481 3571 6 8 3
SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC
CS30323
F-92506 RUEIL MALMAISON CEDEX
A. Product name D. Order code

B. Serial number E. EAN13 bar code
C. Short order code F. Internal product code
10.4 Storage
Store the relay in its original packaging in a closed, sheltered location with the
following ambient conditions:
• ambient temperature: -40 °C to +70 °C (or -40 °F to +158 °F)

• humidity < 90 %.
Check the ambient conditions and the packaging yearly.
10.5 Mounting
DANGER
• Wear your personal protective equipment (PPE) and comply with the safe
electrical work practices. For clothing refer applicable local standards.
• Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should
be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking
the technical characteristics of the device.
• NEVER work alone.
• Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it.
Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding.
• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing relay to ensure that all power
is off.
• Do not open the secondary circuit of a live current transformer.
• Connect the device's protective ground to functional earth according to the
connection diagrams presented in this document.
NOTE: The length of the earthing cable should be as minimal as possible.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 355
CAUTION
HAZARD OF CUTS
• Trim the edges of the cut-out plates to remove any jagged edges.
• Use protective gloves when moving and mounting the device.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury.
Panel mounting
Figure 219 - Panel mounting
mm
225
1 8.86
in 2
erg y c
Pow erL ogi
Eas
c
Pow erL ogi
152
5.98
1.0
0.0-60
4-2
.3 6
T max. 1.2 Nm
3b 3c 10.6 lb-in T max. 0.3 Nm
2.7 lb-in
T max. 0.6 Nm
2.5 Nm 3 Nm
22 lb-in 27 lb-in 5.3 lb-in
3 4
3a
3a
erg yerL ogi c
EasPow
min. 2.5mm2
Ø 5-8mm
CLICK !
Nut M5
1.5Nm, 13.3 Ib in
mm 208 253.40
in 264 9.97 24.60
8.18 0.97
10.37 223.33
183 9.17
PowerLogic 7.20
153
6.02
177 150
6.97 5.91 183
7.20
The conventional mounting technique has always been installing the relay on the
secondary compartment's door. A limitation of this approach could be that the
door construction is not strong enough for the relay's weight and wiring a large
amount of secondary and communication cabling could be challenging.
356 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Panel mounting with detachable display
Figure 220 - Panel mounting with detachable display
mm 247
in 9.72
180 199
7.09 7.81
Pow erLo
gic
199
7.83 150
180 5.91
7.09
29 264
1.12 10.37
1 210
PowerLogic
8.27
Ø5 177
0.2 6.97
M4x20
mm Torx T-20
in 1.5Nm
100
3.94
2
18
0.71
11.5
0.45
20 34
0.79 1.34 Pow erL ogi
c
T max. 1.2Nm
10.6 lb.in T max. 0.3Nm
2.7 lb.in
T max. 0.6Nm
5.3 lb-in
180
3 7.09
Ø7
0.28
min. 2.5mm2
Ø 5-8mm
180
7.09
Nut M5
1.5 Nm, 13.3 Ib in
This mounting technique allows the door to be lighter as the relay's frame is
installed on the back of the secondary compartment. Normally, the relay is
mounted by the terminal blocks, hence the secondary wiring is short.
Communication cabling is easier, too, as the door movement does not need to be
considered. In this case, only the communication between relay base and display
have to be wired.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 357
Projection mounting
Figure 221 - Projection mounting
225
mm
1 2 8.86
in
c
Pow erL ogi
erLyogi c
Powerg
Eas
152
5.98
1.0
0.0 -60
4-2
.36
3b 3c T max. 1.2Nm T max. 0.3Nm

10.6 lb.in 2.7 lb.in
2.5Nm 3Nm T max. 0.6Nm

22 lb.in 27 lb.in 5.3 lb-in
3 4
3a y ogi c
ergerL
EasPow
Vamp 300
3a min. 2.5mm2
Ø 5-8mm ON
OK
F2
F1
I O
Nut M5
1.5Nm, 13.3 Ib in
CLICK !
mm 269
in 264 208 10.59
10.37 8.18 45
224
183 1.77
8.82
PowerLogic 7.20
Vamp 300
ON
152
5.98
177 150 177
6.97 5.91
OK 7.0
F1 F2
I O
If the depth dimension behind the compartment door is limited, the relay can be
equipped with a frame around the collar. This arrangement reduces the depth
inside the compartment by 45 mm. For more details, see 11.5 Environmental
conditions.
358 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Example of the P3 alarm facial label insertion
A B
C D
E F
1
G H
I J
K L
M N
F1 F2
A B
C D
E F
G H
I J
K L
M N
F1 F2
A B
C D
3 E
G
I
K
M
F
H
J
L
N
F1 F2
See "P3 Advanced Series facial label instruction" document for more information.
Protective film
NOTICE
PERMANENT RELAY DAMAGE
Remove the protective film after mounting the relay.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
NOTE: The display of the protective relay is plastic and can melt if exposed to
high temperatures or intensive sunlight.
10.6 Connections
The PowerLogic P3T32 has a fixed combination of analog interface, power
supply, digital input and output, communication and arc flash detection cards as
per the chosen order code. Do not remove cards from the relay's card slots in any
circumstances.
CARD SLOT ARRANGEMENT

WARNING! DO NOT REMOVE CARDS!
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS
FOR HANDLING
ELECTROSTATIC
SENSITIVE
DEVICES VY197B
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 359
10.6.1 Supply voltage cards
Auxiliary voltage
DANGER
Before connecting the devices, disconnect the supply voltage to the unit.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
The external auxiliary voltage UAUX (110–240 V ac/dc, or optionally 24–48 V dc)
of the relay is connected to the pins 1/C/1:1–2 or 1/D/1:1–2.
NOTE: When an optional 24–48 V dc power module is used, the polarity is as

follows: 1/D/2:2 positive (+), 1/D/2:1 negative (-).
The rated frequency (ac) is 50/60 Hz and the AC frequency operating range is the
following:
• 50 Hz, ±10%
• 60 Hz, ±10%
NOTICE
LOSS OF PROTECTION OR RISK OF NUISANCE TRIPPING
Check that the operating mode and SF relay wiring are compatible with the
installation.
NOTE: If the relay is no longer supplied with power or is in permanent fault

state, the protection functions are no longer active and all the PowerLogic P3
digital outputs are dropped out.
360 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 222 - Example of supply voltage card Power C 110-240
Table 138 - Supply voltage card Power C 110-240 & Power D 24-48
Pin No. Symbol Description
20 T12 Heavy duty trip relay 12 for arc protection
10 A1 NO Signal relay 1, normal open connector
9 A1 NC Signal relay 1, normal closed connector
8 A1 Signal relay 1, common connector

COMMON
7 SF NC Service status output, normal closed
6 SF NO Service status output, normal open
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 361
5 SF Service status output, common

COMMON
4 No connection
3 No connection
2 L/+/~ Auxiliary voltage
1 N/-/~ Auxiliary voltage
DANGER
Connect the device's protective ground to functional earth according to the

10.6.2 Analog measurement cards
DANGER
Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT.

NOTE: Disconnecting the secondary circuit of a live CT may cause dangerous

overvoltages.
10.6.2.1 Analog measurement cards E and 1 (slot 8)
This card contains connections for current transformers for measuring of the
phase currents L1–L3 and two earth fault overcurrents I0, and four voltage
transformers for measuring the U0, ULL or ULN.
The relay is able to measure three phase currents, and two earth fault
overcurrents. It also measures up to four voltage signals: line-to-line, line-to-
neutral, neutral displacement voltage and voltage from another side
(synchrocheck). See the voltage modes selection below:
• 3LN, 3LN+U0, 3LN+LLY, 3LN+LNY

• 2LL+U0, 2LL+U0+LLY, 2LL+U0+LNY
• LL+U00+LLY+LLZ, LN+U0+LNY+LNZ
362 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 223 - Analog measurement card E
E = 3L (5/1 A) + 2 I0 (5/1 A+1/0,2 A) + 4U
Figure 224 - Analog measurement card 1
1 = 3L (5/1 A) + 2 I0 (5/1 A+1/0,2 A) ring lug + 4U
Table 139 - Terminal pins for cards E and 1
1 IL1 (S1) Phase current L1 5 A (S1)
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 363
Table 140 - Terminal pins for cards E and 1
1 ULL/ULN Voltage ULL (a) /ULN (a)
2 ULL/ULN Voltage ULL (b) /ULN (n)
3 ULL/ULN Voltage ULL (a) /ULN (a)
4 ULL/ULN Voltage ULL (b) /ULN (n)
5 U0/ULL/ULN VoltageU0(a) / ULL (a) /ULN (a)
6 U0/ULL/ULN Voltage U0(b) /ULL (b) /ULN (n)
7 U0/ULN/ULL Voltage U0 (da) / ULL (a) / ULN (n)
8 U0/ULN/ULL Voltage U0 (dn) / ULL (b) / ULN (n)
10.6.2.2 Analog measurement cards T and 1 (slot 4)
This card contains connections for current measurement transformers for

measuring the phase currents L1, L2 and L3 and earth fault overcurrent I0.
Totally, the relay is able to measure six phase currents, three earth fault
overcurrents and additionally four voltages.
364 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 225 - Analog measurement card "T = 3xI (5/1A) + Io (5/1A)"
Figure 226 - Analog measurement card "1 = 3xI (5/1A) ring lug + Io (5/1A)”
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
Table 141 - Pins 4/T/1:1–12 and 4/1/1:1–12
1 I’L1 Phase current I’L1 (S1), common for 1 A and 5 A
2 I’L1 / 5A Phase current I’L1 (S2)
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 365
10 I03 Earth fault overcurrent I03 (S1), common for 1 A and 5

A
11 I03 / 5A Earth fault overcurrent I03 (S2)
12 I03 / 1A Earth fault overcurrent I03 (S2)
10.6.3 I/O cards
10.6.3.1 I/O card “B = 3BIO+2Arc”
This card contains connections to two arc light sensors (for example, VA 1 DA),
three binary inputs and three binary outputs.
The option card also has three normal open trip contacts that can be controlled
either with the relay’s normal trip functions or using the fast arc matrix.
For more information on BIO, see 6.32.3 Binary inputs and outputs.
Figure 227 - I/O card “B = 3BIO+2Arc”
366 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Table 142 - Slots 2/B/1:1–20
Pin no. Symbol Description
20 T4 Trip relay 4 for arc detection (normal open)
14 BI3 Binary input 3
8 BO COMMON Binary output 1–3 common GND
7 BO3 Binary output 3, +30 V dc
4 Sen 2 - Arc sensor channel 2 negative terminal
3 Sen 2 + Arc sensor channel 2 positive terminal
2 Sen 1 - Arc sensor channel 1 negative terminal
1 Sen 1 - Arc sensor channel 1 positive terminal
10.6.3.2 I/O card “C = F2BIO+1Arc”
This card contains connections to one arc fiber sensor, two fiber binary inputs,
two fiber binary outputs and three fast trip relays.
Arc loop sensor input is used with Arc-SLm sensor. The sensor’s sensitivity can
be set in the Arc protection setting view in eSetup Easergy Pro. If the sensitivity
needs to be reduced, increase the setting value from the default value. As an
example, it could be set up to 900. Test that the switching object no longer
initiates an unwanted sensor activation. Validate also with a strong external light
source that the arc loop channel remains operational. The default adjusted value
is 737. The setting range is from 100 to 900.
NOTE: Some applications have strong Arc flash sources, for example
switching devices such as a CB or a contactor, which could illuminate the loop
sensor during a normal switching operation.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 367
NOTE: The setting value is a relative value for sensitivity, and it does not
anticipate any light intensity (lux) value.
Binary inputs and outputs are designed to be used with 50/125 μm, 62.5/125 μm,
100/140 μm, and 200 μm fiber sizes (Connector type: ST).
The option card also has three normal open trip contacts that can be controlled
either with the relay’s normal trip functions or using the fast arc matrix.
Figure 228 - I/O card “C = F2BIO+1Arc”
Table 143 - Fiber 2 x BI/BO, 1 x Arc loop sensor, T2, T3, T4 I/O card pins (slot 2)
Connector / Symbol Description

Pin no.
1:6 T4 Trip relay 4 for arc detection (normal open)
2 BI2 Fiber binary input 2
3 BI1 Fiber binary input 1
4 BO2 Fiber binary output 2
5 BO1 Fiber binary output 1
368 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Connector / Symbol Description

Pin no.
6 Arc sensor 1 Arc sensor 1 Rx
7 Arc sensor 1 Arc sensor 1 Tx
10.6.3.3 I/O card “D = 2IGBT”
This card contains two semiconductor outputs.
Figure 229 - I/O card “D = 2IGBT”
Table 144 - Slots 4/D/1:1–20
19–20 NC No connection
1897) HSO2 HSO output 2 terminal 2 5/D/1:18

5/D/1:17
1797) 5/D/1:16
5/D/1:15
1697) HSO output 2 terminal 1
1597)
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 369
7 HSO1 HSO output 1 terminal 2 5/D/1:7

5/D/1:6
5/D/1:5
6 5/D/1:4
5 HSO output 1 terminal 1
97) Terminals18-17 and 16-15 are interconnected, so it is sufficient to connect the wiring to terminals
15 and 17 or 16 and 18 only.
10.6.3.4 I/O option card “D=4Arc”
This card contains four arc point connections to four arc light sensors (for
example. VA 1 DA). The card provides sensors 3 to 6.
Figure 230 - I/O option card “D= 4Arc”
Table 145 - Pins 6/D/1:1–8 (slot 6)
8 Sen 6 - Arc sensor 6 negative terminal
7 Sen 6 + Arc sensor 6 positive terminal
10.6.3.5 I/O card “G = 6DI+4DO”
This card provides six digital inputs and four relay outputs. The threshold level is
selectable in the order code.
370 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
The card is equipped with six dry digital inputs with hardware-selectable
activation/threshold voltage and four trip contacts. Input and output contacts are
normally open.
Figure 231 - I/O card “G = 6DI+4DO”
Table 146 - Channel numbering for "C" or "D" power module and four “G” cards in
slots 2–5/G-G-G-G
Pin no. Trip “T” output numbering
Power Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5

supply
Card type C or D G G G G
19, 20 12 16 20 24 28
17, 18 11 15 19 23 27
15, 16 10 14 18 22 26
13, 14 9 13 17 21 25
11, 12 1
DI channel numbering
11, 12 6 12 18 24
9, 10 5 11 17 23
7, 8 4 10 16 22
5, 6 3 9 15 21
3, 4 2 8 14 20
1, 2 1 7 13 19
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 371
NOTE: Digital inputs are polarity-free, which means that you can freely
choose "-" and "+" terminals for each digital input.
Table 147 - Channel numbering for “C” or “D” power module, "B" or "C" arc sensor
interface card and three “G” cards in slots 3–5/G-G-G
Pin no. Trip “T” output numbering
Power Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5

supply
Card type C or D B C G G G
19, 20 12 4
17, 18 11 3
15, 16 10 2
13, 14 9
11, 12 1
5, 6 4
3, 4 3
1, 2 2
19, 20 16 20 24
17, 18 15 19 23
15, 16 14 18 22
13, 14 13 17 21
DI channel numbering
11, 12 6 12 18
9, 10 5 11 17
7, 8 4 10 16
5, 6 3 9 15
3, 4 2 8 14
1, 2 1 7 13
10.6.3.6 I/O card “H = 6DI + 4DO (NC)”
This card provides six digital inputs and four relays outputs that are normally
closed (NC). The threshold level is selectable in the order code.
372 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
The 6xDI+4xDO option card is equipped with six dry digital inputs with hardware-
selectable activation/threshold voltage and four normally closed (NC) trip
contacts.
Figure 232 - I/O card “H = 6DI + 4DO (NC)”
Table 148 - Slots 2–5/G/1:1–20
20 Tx Trip relay
19
18 Tx Trip relay
17
16 Tx Trip relay
15
14 Tx Trip relay
13
12 DIx Digital input
11
10 DIx Digital input
8 DIx Digital input
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 373
6 DIx Digital input
4 DIx Digital input
2 DIx Digital input
10.6.3.7 I/O card “I = 10DI”
This card provides 10 digital inputs. The threshold level is selectable in the order
code.
Figure 233 - I/O card “I = 10DI”
Table 149 - Channel numbering for slots 2–5/G-I-I-I/1:1–20 when one "G" and
three "I" cards are used
Pin no. DI numbering
Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5
Card type G I I I
19, 20 16 26 36
17, 18 15 25 35
15, 16 14 24 34
374 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Pin no. DI numbering
13, 14 13 23 33
11, 12 6 12 22 32
9, 10 5 11 21 31
7, 8 4 10 20 30
5, 6 3 9 19 29
3, 4 2 8 18 28
1, 2 1 7 17 27
10.6.4 Arc flash sensor
DANGER
Clean the arc sensor periodically as instructed in this user manual and after
an arc flash fault.
VA 1 DA is a point-type arc flash sensor. The sensor activated by strong light. It

transforms the light information into the current signal that is used by the device to
detect arc flash light.
Figure 234 - Sensor dimensions
mm 22.2
in 0.83 20
14 0.79
0.55
10
0.39
25
1.83
46.4
0.98
8
0.31
4.2
0.17
The sensor features include:
• standard 8000–10000 lux visible light sensitivity

• wide area arc flash detection
• maximum 2 ms detection time
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 375
• standard cable length 6 m (236.22 in) or 20 m (787.40 in) (cut to length on

site)
• easy to install (two-wired non-polarity sensitive connection)
DANGER
Do not attempt to extend the length of arc flash sensor cables.
10.6.4.1 Mounting the sensors to the switchgear
DANGER
• Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe

electrical work practices. See NFPA 70E, NOM-029-STPS-2011, or CSA
Z462.
• The arc fault detection system is not a substitute for proper PPE when
working on or near equipment being monitored by the system.
• Information on this product is offered as a tool for conducting arc flash
and equipment installation practices. It is not intended as a substitute for
the engineering judgement and adequate review necessary for such
activities.
• Only qualified personnel should install and service this equipment. Read
this entire set of instructions and check the technical characteristics of the
device before performing such work.
• Perform wiring according to national standards (NEC) and any
requirements specified by the customer.
• Observe any separately marked notes and warnings.
• Before performing visual inspections, tests, or maintenance on this
equipment, disconnect all sources of electric power. Assume all circuits are
live until they are completely de-energized, tested, and tagged. Pay
particular attention to the design of the power system. Consider all sources
of power, including the possibility of backfeeding.
is off.
• The equipment must be grounded.
• Do not open the device. It contains no user-serviceable parts.
• Install all devices, doors and covers before turning on the power to this
device.
Install arc flash sensors inside the switchgear. There are two options for mounting
the sensors:
376 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
• in customer-drilled holes on the switchgear

• on VYX001 Z-shape or VYX002 L-shape mounting plates available from
Schneider Electric or locally fabricated from supplied drawings
Figure 235 - VYX 001 mounting plate for sensor
mm 50 51
in 1.97 25 2.0
15
0.59 0.98
59
2.32 2.5
42 0.1
1.65
10
0.39
15
7 50 0.59
0.28 1.97
Figure 236 - VYX 002 mounting plate for sensor
mm
in 10
0.39
15 59 15
0.59 2.32 0.59
3
0.12
30
1.18
30
1.18
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 377
Figure 237 - Mounting the sensor
A. Active part of the sensor

B. Cable clamp
C. Fastening screw 4 x 15 mm
D. Sensor cable
1. Press the active part of the sensor through the 10 mm hole in the panel
surface.
2. Fix it using a 4 mm screw.
10.6.4.2 Connecting the sensors to the device
The sensors are delivered with 6 or 20 m cables.
DANGER
Do not attempt to extend the length of arc flash sensor cables.
NOTE: Use sensor type VA1DA-6W or VA1DA-20W when a shielded cable is

required.
After mounting the sensors, connect them to the device.
1. Route the wire to the nearest device using the shortest route possible.
Cut the wire to a suitable length.
Take into account the wiring methods inside the equipment. This should be
compliant with local regulations.
2. Connect the arc sensors to the screw terminals.

The polarity of the arc sensor cables is not critical.
NOTE: For the connection terminals, see section I/O cards.
378 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
3. If using a shielded cable, connect the cable shield to ground at the sensor
end.
Related topics
10.6.3.1 I/O card “B = 3BIO+2Arc”
10.6.3.2 I/O card “C = F2BIO+1Arc”
10.6.3.4 I/O option card “D=4Arc”
10.6.5 Communication cards
Table 150 - Communication card types and their pin numbering
Type Communication Signal levels Connectors Pin usage

ports
P = Fibre PP (slot 9) Plastic fibre interface Versatile Link fiber
COM 3 port (if slot 9

card)
R = Fibre GG (slot 9) Glass fibre interface ST

(62.5/125 μm)
COM 3 port (if slot 9

card)
K = RS-232 COM 1 / COM 2 RS-232 D-connector 1 = TX COM 2
(slot 6) 2 = TX COM 1
3 = RX COM 1
4 = IRIG-B
5 = IRIG-B GND
7 = GND
8 = RX COM 2
9 = +12V
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 379

ports
B = RS-232 COM 3 / COM 4 RS-232 D-connector 1 = TX COM 4
3 = RX COM 3
4 = IRIG-B
5 = IRIG-B GND
6=
7 = GND
8 = RX COM 4
9 = +12V
C = RS-232+Eth RJ COM 3 / COM 4 RS-232 D-connector 1 = TX COM 4
3 = RX COM 3
4 = IRIG-B
5 = IRIG-B GND
6=
7 = GND
8 = RX COM 4
9 = +12V
Ethernet Ethernet RJ-45 1 = Transmit +
100 Mbps 2 = Transmit -
3 = Receive +
4=
5=
6 = Receive -
7=
8=
380 P3T/EN/M/30-208A

ports
D = RS-232+Eth LC COM 3 / COM 4 RS-232 D-connector 1 = TX COM 4
3 = RX COM 3
4 = IRIG-B
5 = IRIG-B GND
6=
7 = GND
8 = RX COM 4
9 = +12V
Ethernet Light LC fiber connector 1 = Receive
100 Mbps 2 = Transmit
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 381

ports
E = 2 x RS-485 (slot 9) COM 3 (RS-485 RS-485 S2 DIP switch for

interface 1) termination resistors
of the RS-485
COM 4 (RS-485
interface 2
interface 2)
8 = RS-485 interface 2
cable shield
connection
“-“ connection
“+“ connection
ground terminal
“-“ connection
“+“ connection
ground terminal
cable shield
connection
S1 DIP switch for

termination resistors
of the RS-485
interface 1
* RS-485 interfaces 1
and 2 galvanically
isolated from each
other
382 P3T/EN/M/30-208A

ports
F = RS-485+RJ (slot 9) Ethernet Ethernet RJ45 connector from

top:
COM 3 (RS-485 100 Mbps
interface 1) 1 = Transmit+
RS-485
2 =Transmit-
3 =Receive+
4=
5=
6 = Receive-
7=
8=
NOTE: Turn on the

DIP switch when
the termination
and signal biasing
resistor is needed.
DIP switch for

of the RS-485
interface 1
“-“ connection
“+“ connection
ground terminal
cable shield
connection
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 383

ports
G = RS-485+LC (slot Ethernet Light LC connector from

9) top:
COM 3 (RS-485 100 Mbps
interface 1) 1 = Receive
RS-485
2 = Transmit
NOTE: Turn on the

DIP switch when
the termination
and signal biasing
resistor is needed.
DIP switch for

of the RS-485
interface 1
“-“ connection
“+“ connection
ground terminal
1= RS-485 interface 1
cable shield
connection
N = 2EthRJ 100 Mbps Ethernet Ethernet 2 x RJ-45 1=Transmit+

interface with IEC
(slot 9) 100 Mbps 2=Transmit-
61850
3=Receive+
4=
5=
6=Receive-
7=
8=
O = 2EthLC 100 Mbps Ethernet Light 2 x LC LC-connector from top:

fibre interface with IEC
(slot 9) 100 Mbps -Port 2 Rx
61850
-Port 2 Tx
-Port 1 Rx
-Port 1 Tx
384 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
NOTE: When a communication option module of type B, C, D, E, F or G are

used in slot 9, serial ports COM 3 / COM 4 are available.
RS-485 connections
Figure 238 - All shields connected through and grounded at one end
DIP switches
Figure 239 - DIP switches in optic fibre options
Table 151 - DIP switches in optic fibre options
DIP switch Switch Function

number position
Fibre optics
1 Left Echo off
1 Right Echo on
2 Left Light on in idle state
2 Right Light off in idle state
3 Left Not applicable
3 Right Not applicable
4 Left Not applicable
4 Right Not applicable
10.6.5.1 COM 1 port
The COM 1 port is for serial communication protocols. The type of the physical
interface on this port depends on the type of the selected communication option
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 385
module. The use of some protocols may require a certain type of option module.
The parameters for this port are set via the front panel or with eSetup Easergy
Pro in the COM 1 setting view.
Table 152 - COM 1 port
Type External Order code Cable Typically

module used
protocols
RS-232 (slot 6) VPA3CG VPA3CG VX068 None
Profibus DP
10.6.5.2 COM 3 – COM 4 ports
COM 3 and COM 4 are ports for serial communication protocols. The type of the
physical interface on these ports depends on the type of the selected
communication option module. The use of some protocols may require a certain
type of option module. The parameters for these ports are set via the front panel
or with eSetup Easergy Pro in the COM 3 PORT – COM 4 PORT setting views.
Communication information is normally sent to the control system (SCADA), but it

is also possible to use certain communication-related notifications internally, for
example alarms. This is can be done for example via the logic and different
matrices.
Figure 240 - Communication-related notifications can be connected to trip

contacts in the Output matrix setting view
386 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Type External Order code Cable / order Typically

module code used
protocols
232+00 None None None - None
or - IEC-101
232+Eth RJ - IRIG-B
or - GetSet
232+Eth LC
VIO12-AB VIO 12 AB None - None
(Slot 9)
and - - ExternalIO
VSE-002 VSE002
VIO12-AC VIO 12 AC None - None
and - - ExternalIO
VSE-002 VSE002
VIO12-AD VIO 12 AD None - None
and - - ExternalIO
VSE-002 VSE002
VSE-001 VSE001 None - None
- IEC-103
- ModbusSlv
- SpaBus
- IEC-103
- ModbusSlv
- SpaBus
- DNP3
VPA-3CG VPA3CG VX072 - None
- ProfibusDP

module code used
protocols
232+00 None None None - None
or - IEC-101
232+Eth RJ - IRIG-B
or - GetSet
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 387

module code used
protocols
232+Eth LC
+VX067 (Split VIO12-AB VIO 12 AB None - None

cable)
and - - ExternalIO
(Slot 9)
VSE-002 VSE002
VIO12-AC VIO 12 AC None - None
and - - ExternalIO
VSE-002 VSE002
VIO12-AD VIO 12 AD None - None
and - - ExternalIO
VSE-002 VSE002
- IEC-103
- ModbusSlv
- SpaBus
- IEC-103
- ModbusSlv
- SpaBus
- DNP3
To be able to use COM 3 and COM 4 ports, the RS-232 communication interface
(option B, C or D) has to be split in two by using a VX067 cable.
Figure 241 - VX067 cable on the D-connector of slot 9 option card
1 2 3 4 5 6 8
A
9
VX067
VX067
A. COM 3 port B. COM 4 port
388 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
NOTE: It is possible to use two serial communication protocols

simultaneously, but the restriction is that the same protocol can be used only
once.
Use a VX086 cable to interface simultaneously with two protocols and IRIG-B.
The Communication > Protocol configuration setting view contains the

selection for the protocol, port settings and message/error/timeout counters. Only
serial communication protocols are valid with the RS-232 interface.
Figure 242 - Protocol configuration setting view
Protocol Protocol Set

selection for
COM port
None -
SPA-bus SPA-bus (slave)
ProfibusDP Interface to
Profibus DB
module VPA
3CG (slave)
ModbusSlv Modbus RTU

slave
IEC-103 IEC-60870-5-10
3 (slave)
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 389
ExternalIO Modbus RTU

master for
external I/O-
modules
IEC 101 IEC-608670-5-1

01
DNP3 DNP 3.0
GetSet Communicationi
protocola for
interface
Msg# 0–232 - 1 Message Clr

counter since
the relay has
restarted or
since last
clearing
Errors 0–216 - 1 Protocol Clr

interruption
since the relay
has restarted or
since last
clearing
Tout 0–216 - 1 Timeout Clr

interruption
since the relay
has restarted or
since last
clearing
Display of 1.
speed/DPS
current
communication
parameters.
speed = bit/s
D = number of
data bits
P = parity: none,
even, odd
S = number of
stop bits
Set = An editable parameter (password needed). Clr = Clearing to zero is possible.
1. The communication parameters are set in the protocol-specific menus. For the local
port command line interface, the parameters are set in the configuration menu.
390 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
10.6.6 Local port
The relay has a USB port in the front panel.
Protocol for the USB port
The front panel USB type B port is always using the command line protocol for
eSetup Easergy Pro.
The speed of the interface is defined in the CONF/DEVICE SETUP menu via the
front panel. The default settings for the relay are 187500.
10.6.7 Connection data
Table 156 - Auxiliary power supply
UAUX 110 (-20%) – 240 (+10%) V ac/dc
110/120/220/240 V ac
110/125/220 V dc
or
24–48 ±20% V dc
24/48 V dc
Power consumption
- Normal state98) < 20 W
- All digital outputs activated < 28 W
- All digital outputs activated and two (2) < 35 W

external communication devices powered
Terminal block: Wire cross section:
- MSTB 2.5–5.08 Maximum 2.5 mm2 (13–14 AWG)
Minimum 1.5 mm2 (15–16 AWG)
Wire type: single strand or stranded with

insulated crimp terminal
98) Power on, communications, measurements, display, LED’s and SF output active.
Table 157 - Digital inputs technical data
Number of inputs As per the order code
Voltage withstand 255 V ac/dc
(as per the order code letters) A: 24–230 V ac/dc (max. 255 V ac/dc)
Nominal operation voltage for DI inputs B: 110–230 V ac/dc (max. 255 V ac/dc)
C: 220–230 V ac/dc (max. 255 V ac/dc)
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 391
Typical switching threshold (as per order A: 12 V dc

code letters)
B: 75 V dc
C: 155 V dc
NOTE: For trip circuit supervision with

two digital inputs, select a lower
switching threshold (24 V or 110 V).
Current drain < 4 mA (typical approx. 3mA)
Cycle time 10 ms
Activation time dc/ac < 11 ms / < 15 ms
Reset time dc/ac < 11 ms / < 15 ms
- MSTB2.5–5.08 Maximum 2.5 mm2 (13–14 AWG)

NOTE: Set the dc/ac mode according to the used voltage in eSetup Easergy
Pro.
Table 158 - Trip contact, high break
Number of contacts 5 normal open contacts
Rated voltage 250 V ac/dc
Continuous carry 5A
Minimum making current 100 mA @ 24 Vdc
Make and carry, 0.5 s at duty cycle 10% 30 A
Make and carry, 3 s at duty cycle 10% 15 A
Breaking capacity, AC 2 000 VA
Breaking capacity, DC (L/R = 40 ms)
at 48 V dc: 5A
at 110 V dc: 3A
at 220 V dc 1A
392 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Contact material Ag alloy
- MSTB2.5–5.08 Maximum 2.5 mm2 (13–14 AWG)

NOTE: High-break trip contacts exist in power module C and D only.
Table 159 - Trip contact, Tx
Number of contacts As per the order code
Continuous carry 5A
Minimum making current 100 mA at 24 Vdc
Make and carry, 0.5 s 30 A
Make and carry, 3 s 15 A
Breaking capacity, ac 2 000 VA
Breaking capacity, dc (L/R = 40 ms)
at 48 V dc: 1.15 A
at 110 V dc: 0.5 A
at 220 V dc: 0.25 A
- MSTB2.5 - 5.08 Maximum 2.5 mm2 (13–14 AWG)

Table 160 - Signal contact, A1 and SF
Number of contacts: 1
Continuous carry 5A
Minimum making current 100 mA at 24 V ac/dc
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 393
Make and carry, 0.5 s 30 A
Make and carry, 3 s 15 A
Breaking capacity, ac 2 000 VA
Breaking capacity, dc (L/R = 40 ms)
at 48 V dc: 1A
at 110 V dc: 0.3 A
at 220 V dc: 0.15 A
Terminal block Wire cross section
- MSTB2.5–5.08 Maximum 2.5 mm 2 (13–14 AWG)

Table 161 - Local serial communication port
Number of ports 1 on front
Electrical connection USB
Data transfer rate 200 – 187 500 b/s
Protocols GetSet
Table 162 - COM 3-4 serial communication port
Number of physical ports 0–1 on rear panel (option)
Electrical connection RS-232 (option, IRIG-B included)
RS-485 (option)
Profibus (option, external module)
Glass fibre connection (option, external

module)
Protocols Modbus RTU, master
Modbus RTU, slave
Spabus, slave
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 61870-5-101
Profibus DP
DNP 3.0
IRIG-B
394 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Table 163 - Ethernet communication port
Number of ports 0–2 on rear panel (option)
Electrical connection RJ-45 10/100 Mbps (option)
LC 100Mbps (option)
Protocols IEC 61850
Modbus TCP
DNP 3.0
Ethernet/IP
IEC 61870-5-101
Table 164 - Fiber Ethernet communication port
Number of ports 0 or 2 on rear panel (option)
Connection type LC 100 Mbps
Optical characteristics Operates with 62.5/125 μm and 50/125 μm

multimode fiber
Center Wavelength: 1300 nm typical
Output Optical Power:
• Fiber: 62.5/125 μm, NA = 0.275 23.0 dBm

• Fiber: 50/125 μm, NA = 0.20 26.0 dBm
Input Optical Power: -31 dBm
Maximum range 2 km (6561.68 ft)
Protocols IEC 61850
Modbus TCP
DNP 3.0
Ethernet/IP
IEC 61870-5-101
Table 165 - Arc sensor inputs
Number of inputs As per the order code
Supply to sensor Isolated 12 V dc
Table 166 - Measuring circuits
Phase current inputs I' (5/1 A) Slot 4:
T = 3 x I (5/1A) + I0 (5/1A)
Rated phase current 5A 1A
- Current measuring range 0.05–250 A 0.02–50 A
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 395
- Thermal withstand • 20 A (continuously) • 4 A (continuously)

• 100 A (10 s) • 20 A (10 s)
• 500 A (1 s) • 100 A (1 s)
• 1250 A (10 ms) • 250 A (10 ms)
- Burden 0.075 VA 0.02 VA
- Impedance 0.003 Ohm 0.02 Ohm
I0 input (5A and 1A)
Rated earth fault overcurrent 5A 1A
- Current measuring range 0.05–250 A 0.02–50 A
- Thermal withstand • 20 A (continuously) • 4 A (continuously)

• 100 A (10 s) • 20 A (10 s)
• 500 A (1 s) • 100 A (1 s)
- Burden 0.075 VA 0.02 VA
- Impedance 0.003 Ohm 0.02 Ohm
Phase current inputs I (1 A, 5 A) Slot 8:
E = 3L(5/1A) + 2I0(5/1A+1/0.2A) + 4 U
N = 3L(5/1A) + I01(5/1A) + I02CSH(2/20A) + 4 U
Rated phase current 5A
- Current measuring range 5A: 0.05–250 A
1A: 0.02–50 A
- Thermal withstand • 20 A (continuously)

• 100 A (10 s)
• 500 A (1 s)
• 1250 A (10 ms)
- Burden 5A: 0.075 VA; 1A: 0.003 VA
- Impedance 0.003 Ohm
I0 input (5 A) Slot 8:
E = 3L(5/1A) + 2I0(5/1A+1/0.2A) + 4 U
N = 3L(5/1A) + I01(5/1A) + I02CSH(2/20A) + 4 U
Rated earth fault overcurrent 5A
- Current measuring range 0.015–50 A

• 100 A (10 s)
• 500 A (1 s)
- Burden 0.075 VA
396 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
I0 input (1 A) Slot 8:
E = 3L(5/1A) + 2I0(5/1A+1/0.2A) + 4 U
N = 3L(5/1A) + I01(5/1A) + I02CSH(2/20A) + 4 U
Rated earth fault overcurrent 1 A (configurable for CT secondaries 0.1–10.0 A)

• 20 A (10 s)
• 100 A (1 s)
- Burden 0.02 VA
I0 input (0.2 A) Slot 8:
E = 3L(5/1A) + 2I0(5/1A+1/0.2A) + 4 U
Rated earth fault overcurrent 0.2 A (configurable for CT secondaries 0.1 – 10.0 A)
- Thermal withstand • 0.8 A (continuously)

• 4 A (10 s)
• 20 A (1 s)
- Burden 0.02 VA
Voltage inputs
Rated voltage UN 100 V (configurable for VT secondaries 50–250 V)
- Voltage measuring range 0.5–190 V
- Thermal withstand 250 V (continuously)
600 V (10 s)
- Burden <0.015 VA (110 V), <0.06 VA (250 V)
Frequency
Rated frequency fN 45–65 Hz (protection operates accurately)
Measuring range 16–95 Hz
< 44Hz / > 66Hz (other protection is not steady except frequency protection)
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 397
Analog interface cross section and tightening torque
Table 167 - Analog interface cross-section and tightening torque
Terminal characteristics
Current inputs Voltage inputs
Screw clamp Ring lug
Maximum wire 4 (10-12) (12–22) 2.5 (13-14)

cross-section, mm2
(AWG)
Maximum wiring 1.2 (10.6) 0.79 (7) 0.5-0.6 (4.4-5.3)

screw tightening
torque Nm (Ib-in)
Maximum connector - 0.3-0.4 (2.7-3.5)

retention tightening
torgue Nm (Ib-in)
Wire type Single strand or

stranded with
insulated crimp
terminal
Ring lug width (mm) - 8.0, M3.5

and screw size
10.6.8 External option modules
10.6.8.1 VSE-001 fiber-optic interface module
DANGER
• This equipment must only be installed or serviced by qualified electrical

personnel.
• Turn off all power supplying this device and the equipment in which it is
installed before working on the device or equipment.
• Connect protective earth before turning on any power supplying this
device.
An external fiber-optic module VSE-001 is used to connect the device to a fiber-

optic loop or a fiber-optic star. There are four different types of serial fiber-optic
modules:
• VSE001PP (Plastic-plastic)
• VSE001GG (Glass-glass)
398 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
The modules provide a serial communication link up to 1 km (0.62 miles) with

VSE 001 GG. With a serial-fibre interface module, it is possible to have the
following serial protocols in use:
• None
• IEC-103
• Modbus slave
• SpaBus
The power for the module is taken from pin 9 of the D-connector or from an
external power supply interface.
Figure 243 - VSE-001 module
A. VSE-001 B. Communication bus
Module interface to the device
The physical interface of the VSE-001 is a 9-pin D-connector. The signal level is
RS-232.
NOTE: The product manual for VSE-001 can be found on our website.
10.6.8.2 VSE-002 RS-485 interface module
DANGER

personnel.
device.
An external RS-485 module VSE-002 (VSE002) is used to connect PowerLogic

P3 protection devices to RS-485 bus. With the RS-485 serial interface module,
the following serial protocols can be used:
• None
• IEC-103
• ModbusSlv
• SpaBus
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 399
The power for the module is taken from pin 9 of the D-connector or from an
external power supply interface.
Figure 244 - VSE-002 module
A. VSE-002 B. Communication bus
The physical interface of the VSE-002 is a 9-pin D-connector. The signal level is
RS-232 and therefore, the interface type for the module has to be selected as
RS-232.
It is possible to connect multible devices in daisychain. “Termination” has to be

selected as on for the last unit in the chain. The same applies when only one unit
is used.
Figure 245 - RS-232 and TTL interface
Termination
ON OFF
73 mm
Interface type
TLL RS-232
20 mm
Table 168 - RS-232 and TTL interface
Pin number TTL mode RS-232 mode
1 - -
2 RXD (in) RXD (in)
3 TXD (out) TXD (out)
4 RTS (in) RTS (in)
7 GND GND
400 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Pin number TTL mode RS-232 mode
9 +8V (in) +8V (in)
10.6.8.3 VPA-3CG Profibus interface module
DANGER

personnel.
device.
PowerLogic P3T32 can be connected to Profibus DP by using an external

Profibus interface module VPA-3CG (VPA3CG). The device can then be
monitored from the host system. VPA-3CG is attached to the RS-232 D-connector
at the back of the device with a VX-072 (VX072) cable. With the Profibus interface
module, the following protocols can be used:
• None
• ProfibusDP
The power for the module is taken from an external power supply interface.
Figure 246 - VPA-3CG module
A. VPA-3CG B. Communication bus
The physical interface of the VPA-3CG Profibus interface module is a 9-pin D-

connector.
Profibus devices are connected in a bus structure. Up to 32 stations (master or

slave) can be connected in one segment. The bus is terminated by an active bus
terminator at the beginning and end of each segments. When more than 32
stations are used, repeaters (line amplifiers) must be used to connect the
individual bus segments.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 401
The maximum cable length depends on the transmission speed and cable type.
The specified cable length can be increased by the use of repeaters. The use of
more than 3 repeaters in a series is not recommended.
A separate product manual for VPA-3CG can be found on our website.
10.6.8.4 VIO 12A RTD and analog input / output modules
VIO 12A I/O modules can be connected to PowerLogic P3T32 using VSE 001 or
VSE 002 interface modules.
VIO 12A I/O modules can be connected to PowerLogic P3U20 and P3U30 using
RS-485 connection in interface modules. Alternatively VIO 12A I/O modules can
be connected to PowerLogic P3U20 and P3U30 using RS-232 connection. If
RS-232 connection is used a separate VX082 or VX083 connection cable and
VSE001 or VSE002 option module are needed.
A separate product manual for VIO 12A is available.
10.6.9 Block diagrams
The status of the output contacts is shown when the relay is energized but none
of the protection, controlling or self-supervision elements are activated.
402 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 247 - Typical block diagram for P3M32, P3T32 and P3G32 relays
N -/~ 1/C/1:1 ~ 1/C/1:20 T12

1/C/1:19 T12
L +/~ 1/C/1:2 = 1/C/1:18 T11
1/C/1:17 T11
P3T32-CGITA-AAENA-BAAAA
1/C/1:16 T10
M
G
DI1 2/G/1:1 1/C/1:15 T10
DI
DI1 2/G/1:2 1/C/1:14 T9
DI2 2/G/1:3 1/C/1:13 T9
DI2 2/G/1:4 1/C/1:12 T1
DI3 2/G/1:5
1/C/1:11 T1
DI3 2/G/1:6
1/C/1:10 A1 NO
1
DI4 2/G/1:7 1/C/1:9 A1 NC
DI4 2/G/1:8 1/C/1:8 A1 COM
DI5 2/G/1:9 1/C/1:7 SF NC
DI5 2/G/1:10 1/C/1:6 SF NO
DI6 2/G/1:11 1/C/1:5 SF COM
1
DI6 2/G/1:12
DI7 3/I/1:1 DI 2/G/1:13 T13

DI7 3/I/1:2 2/G/1:14 T13
DI8 3/I/1:3 2/G/1:15 T14
DI8 3/I/1:4
2/G/1:16 T14
DI9 3/I/1:5
3/I/1:6 2/G/1:17 T15
DI9
DI10 3/I/1:7 2/G/1:18 T15
DI10 3/I/1:8 2/G/1:19 T16
DI11 3/I/1:9 2/G/1:20 T16
DI11 3/I/1:10
DI12 3/I/1:11
DI12 3/I/1:12
DI13 3/I/1:13
DI13 3/I/1:14
DI14 3/I/1:15
DI14 3/I/1:16
DI15 3/I/1:17
DI15 3/I/1:18
DI16 3/I/1:19
DI16 3/I/1:20
IL1 (S1) 8/E/1:1 8/1/1:1

IL1 5/1A
IL1 (S2) 8/E/1:2 8/1/1:2
IL2 (S1) 8/E/1:3 8/1/1:3
IL2 5/1A
IL2 (S2) 8/E/1:4 8/1/1:4
IL3 (S1) 8/E/1:5 8/1/1:5
IL3 5/1A
IL3 (S2) 8/E/1:6 8/1/1:6
Io1 (S1) 8/E/1:7 8/1/1:7 I0 5A
Io1 (S2) 8/E/1:8 8/1/1:8
I0 1A
Io1 (S2) 8/E/1:9 8/1/1:9
Io2 (S1) 8/E/1:10 8/1/1:10 I0 1A
Io2 (S2) 8/E/1:11 8/1/1:11
I0 0.2A
Io2 (S2) 8/E/1:12 8/1/1:12
ULL/ULN 8/E/2:1 8/1/2:1
U1
ULL/ULN 8/E/2:2 8/1/2:2
ULL/ULN 8/E/2:3 8/1/2:3
U2
ULL/ULN 8/E/2:4 8/1/2:4
Uo/ULL/ULN 8/E/2:5 8/1/2:5
U3
Uo/ULN/ULL 8/E/2:6 8/1/2:6
Uo/ULN/ULL 8/E/2:7 8/1/2:7 U4
Uo/ULN/ULL 8/E/2:8 8/1/2:8
IꞌL1 (S1) 4/T/1:1 4/1/1:1 5A

IꞌL1 (S2) 4/T/1:2 4/1/1:2 1A
IꞌL1 (S2) 4/T/1:3 4/1/1:3
IꞌL2 (S1) 4/T/1:4 4/1/1:4 5A
IꞌL2 (S2) 4/T/1:5 4/1/1:5
1A
IꞌL2 (S2) 4/T/1:6 4/1/1:6 9/N/1 Eth1
IꞌL3 (S1) 4/T/1:7 4/1/1:7
5A 9/N/2 Eth2
IꞌL3 (S2) 4/T/1:8 4/1/1:8
IꞌL3 (S2) 1A
4/T/1:9 4/1/1:9
Io3 (S1) 4/T/1:10 4/1/1:10 5A

Io3 (S2) 4/T/1:11 4/1/1:11
1A
Io3 (S2) 4/T/1:12 4/1/1:12
DANGER
Connect the device's protective ground to functional earth according to the
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 403
10.6.10 Connection examples
Figure 248 - Connection example of P3T32 applied to a power transformer
3LN_Uo_P3T32_connection_v1
1
IL1
2
3 IL2 5A
4 1A
8/E/1 : 1...12
5 IL3
Slot 8
6
7 Io1
8
9
10
Io2
1) 11 1A
12 0.2A
P3T32
1
2 I’L1
5A
3 1A
4
4/T/1 : 1 ... 12
5 I’L2
5A
6 1A
Slot 4
7
8 I’L3
5A
9 1A
10
11 5A
Io3
12 1A
1
UL1
2
3 8/E/2 : 1...8
UL2
Slot 8
4
5 UL3
6
7 Uo
8
L1
L2
L3
1) Power direction
404 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
DANGER
• Always connect the polarity of the current transformer (CT) and the
voltage transformer (VT) and their secondary ground wiring according to
the connection diagrams presented in this document.
• Connect the device's protective ground to functional earth according to
10.7 Arc flash detection system setup and testing
10.7.1 Setting up the arc flash system
DANGER

Z462.
activities.
is off.
device.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 405
Before setting up the arc flash system:

• Mount and connect all components and sensors.
• Make sure that you understand the customer application.
1. Identify the wiring connection of sensors to the device’s connectors.
2. Identify the wiring connection to breaking devices.
3. Identify binary I/O wiring connections.
4. Proceed with configuration in eSetup Easergy Pro with consideration of the

customer application.
5. Power up the device.
6. Reset the device by pushing the reset button.
7. Verify LED indication as described with consideration of the customer

application.
8. If connecting two devices through MT in and MT out:
DANGER
Ensure that the wiring connections for Master Trip (MT) input and MT
output are secure and meet industry standards for reliability.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious

injury.
a. Verify the MT in MT out connections.
b. Set the related dip switch configuration.
c. Verify the LED indications.
10.7.2 Commissioning and testing
This section contains the commissioning testing instructions. The figure below
shows the testing sequence.
406 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 249 - Testing sequence
Arc system commissioning
Verifying the installation against

drawings and customer specifications
Checking zones
Testing arc flash sensors
Testing alarm contacts
Cross-checking between zones
Testing the circuit breaker failure

protection
Trip circuits Filling in test results
Restoring the current measuring and

trip circuits
Gathering of test equipment
Finalizing the test report
End
10.7.2.1 Checking zones
1. Check the protected zones where sensors have been installed and compare
them against the drawings.
2. Consult the customer if the configuration does not match with the drawings.
10.7.2.2 Disconnecting trip circuits
DANGER
Before disconnecting trip circuits, review system drawings and diagrams.
NOTE: Remove trip circuits may cause a loss of protection.
• Disconnect the trip signals to the circuit breakers that may disturb other parts
of the system during the test.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 407
• Also disconnect trip signals routed to other parts of the system, such as the
breaker failure (ANSI 50BF) backup trip to upstream breakers and the transfer
trip signals.
• Test the disconnected trip signals with a multimeter.
10.7.2.3 Sensor testingTesting
DANGER

Z462.
activities.
is off.
device.
Testing the arc flash sensors with the light-only criteria operates the trip outputs of
the device or the I/O units for the protected zone.
Testing the arc flash sensors with the light and current criteria, without an injected
current, only generates an indication on the unit that protects the zone. The
indication of the arc fault is registered by the possible main unit and I/O unit.
NOTE: Testing the arc flash sensors using a light source can trip the
neighboring zones.
408 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
NOTE: For more information on viewing and resetting indications, see the
corresponding sensor user manual or se.com.
NOTE: Because of their placement, some sensors cannot be tested without

dismantling parts of the system. After completing the testing, reassemble the
parts and validate the compliance with original mounting. Consult the
equipment manufacturer before dismantling any parts.
10.7.2.3.1 Testing the sensors
Test the sensors with the main device. See VAMP 125 Arc Flash Protection
Device User Manual.
Reset the main device before the test.
NOTE: Because of their placement, some sensors cannot be tested without

dismantling parts of the system. After completing the testing, reassemble the
parts and validate the compliance with original mounting. Consult the
equipment manufacturer before dismantling any parts.
Figure 250 - Testing point sensors
1. Point light to each arc flash sensor, one at a time, with a powerful light source
such as camera flash unit or flashlight.
2. Check the light sensor indication from the device.
3. Check the light sensor address from the device.

4. Compare the light sensor address information from the device with the sensor
location map.
5. Fill in the test result in the test report.

See VAMP Arc Flash Protection Testing Manual.
6. Reset the device.
7. Repeat the procedure with the next sensor.
10.7.2.3.2 Testing the sensor supervision
Test the sensors with the main device.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 409
Figure 251 - Testing the sensor’s self-supervision

TRIP
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
N
ACT
t/int
L>ex tch
La TRIP
L+I/L
Zone TS
PU
OR IN
Addr. SENS
4
3
2
1
T3 11
R3 9 10
T2 7 8
R2 5 6
T1 3 4
1 2
R1
X1
1. Disconnect one wire from one point sensor, one for each unit, to see that the
self-supervision system recognizes the fault in the sensor.
2. Wait until the arc fault indication appears.
Depending on the device, this can take several minutes. See HMI functions
and indications in the device user manual.
3. Check that the service status output operates.
4. Fill in the test results in the test report.

See the test report template in VAMP Arc Flash Protection Testing Manual.
5. Reconnect the wire and reset the system.
6. Repeat the procedure with the other units.
10.7.2.3.3 Testing the binary I/O connectivity
BI/O signals such as light and overcurrent information are transmitted between
devices through dedicated inputs/output.
1. Activate the signal outputs in the binary I/O by generating arc fault light signal,
overcurrent pickup or both.
2. Check the configuration modes used for the customer application.
3. Fill in the test result in the test report.
4. Reset the main unit.
5. Repeat the procedure with all connected I/O’s.
10.7.3 Test report
10.7.3.1 Filling in the test report
1. Download the test report template from the Schneider Electric website.
2. Fill in all the required information about the system, the tested arc flash units
and the test results.
410 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
10.7.3.2 Test report example
Figure 252 - Test report example
Easergy P3x3x Arc stage commissioning and testing report

Customer Customer name Substation
Information
Customer address Bay
Unit Device name: Device location:

Serial number: Order code:
Program version: IP Address:
NetMask: Gateway:
MAC address: NTP Server:
Scaling CT primary current input: A Pick-up setting: xln
CT secondary current input: A Pick-up value: A
CT residual current primary input: A Pick-up setting: xln
CT residual current secondary input: A Pick-up value: A
Arc sensors Sensor Arc sensor status Tested Remarks
1 OK NA
2 OK NA
3 OK NA
4 OK NA
5 OK NA
6 OK NA
Arc stages Stage number Activation criteria Tested Remarks

1 Light I>int Io1>int
CBFP Stage number Delay setting / ms Tested Remarks

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Trip relays Trip relay Tested CBFP Remarks

T1 OK NA
T2 OK NA
T3 OK NA
T4 OK NA
T9 OK NA
T10 OK NA
T11 OK NA
T12 OK NA
HS01 OK NA
HS02 OK NA
Led indications Led name Tested Led name Tested

A Yes NA B Yes NA
C Yes NA D Yes NA
E Yes NA F Yes NA
G Yes NA H Yes NA
I Yes NA J Yes NA
K Yes NA L Yes NA
M Yes NA N Yes NA
Testing device Device Calibration date

Signatures Commissioner(s)
Supervisor
Date
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 411
10.7.4 Troubleshooting
This table describes some common problems in the arc flash system and how
they can be solved.
Table 169 - Troubleshooting
Problem Possible cause Solution
The trip signal does not Faulty trip circuit wiring Check that the wiring of the
reach the circuit breaker. trip circuit is not faulty.
The protection does not trip The protection needs both Check the dip switch
even when a sufficient light light and current information configuration. The protection
signal is provided. to trip. may be configured to
require both the light and
current condition to trip.
Faulty sensor wiring Loose sensor wire Check the sensor wiring.
detected by the self- The sensor wire may have
supervision loosened in the terminal
blocks.
Error message indicating Light pulse to the arc flash Check that the light pulse to
blocked sensor channel sensor is too long. the arc flash sensor is not
too long.
If light is supplied to the arc

flash sensor for more than
three seconds, the self-
supervision function
activates and switches the
light sensor channel to
daylight blocking mode, and
the sensor channel is
blocked. The sensor
channel indication activates
an error message indication
on the LED.
Remove the light source to

reset the blocked channel.
10.8 Voltage measurement modes

Depending on the application and available voltage transformers, the relay can be
connected either to zero-sequence voltage, line-to-line voltage or line-to-neutral
voltage. The configuration parameter "Voltage measurement mode" must be set
according to the type of connection used.
Voltage measuring modes correlation for E and F analogue measurement

cards
U1, U2, U3 and U4 are voltage channels for the relay.
412 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
The physical voltage transformer connection in the PowerLogic P3T32 depends

on the used voltage transformer connection mode. This setting is defined in the
Scaling setting view. See Table 170.
Figure 253 - Example of terminal 8/E/1 and 8/E/2
Table 170 - Correlation between voltage measuring mode and physical voltage
input in Terminals 8/E/1 and 8/F/2
Terminal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Voltage channel U1 U2 U4 U399)
Mode / Used voltage
3LN Not in use
3LN+U0 U0
UL1 UL2 UL3
3LN+LLy LLy
3LN+LNy LNy
2LL+U0 Not in use
2LL+U0+LLy U23 LLy

U12
2LL+U0+LNy U0 LNy
LL+LLy+U0+LLz U12y U12z
LN+LNy+U0+LNz UL1 UL1y UL1z

99) Voltagechannel 3 (U3) is intended for the THD values, 3LN/LLy or 3LN/LNy voltage mode only. It
should not be used for the normal measurements.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 413
10.8.1 Multiple channel voltage measurement
Slot 8 can accommodate one of four different types of analogue measurement

cards. Each of them have four voltage measurement channels.
This section introduces various voltage connections and the required voltage
measuring modes for the connections. The settings are defined in the Scalings
view.
3LN
• Voltages measured by VTs: UL1, UL2, UL3

• Values calculated:UL12, UL23, UL31, U1, U2, U2/U1, f, U0
• Measurements available: All
• Protection functions not available: ANSI 25
Figure 254 - 3LN
UL1
P3x3x 3LN
UL2
UL3
8/E/2 : 1...8
8/F/2 : 1...8
1
U1
2
3
U2
4
5
U3
6
7
U4
8
DANGER
3LN+U0
This connection is typically used for feeder and motor protection schemes.
• Voltages measured by VTs: UL1, UL2, UL3, U0

• Values calculated: UL12, UL23, UL31, U1, U2, U2/U1, f
414 P3T/EN/M/30-208A

Figure 255 - 3LN+U0
UL1
P3x3x 3LN + Uo
UL2
UL3
8/E/2 : 1...8
8/F/2 : 1...8
1
U1
2
3
U2
4
5
U3
6
7
U4
8
DANGER
3LN+LLy
Connection of voltage transformers for synchrocheck application. The other side

of the CB has line-to-line connection for reference voltage.
• Voltages measured by VTs: UL1, UL2, UL3, UL12y

• Values calculated: UL12, UL23, UL31, U1, U2, U2/U1, f, U0
• Protection functions not available: -
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 415
Figure 256 - 3LN+LLy
P3x3x 3LN + LLy

UL1
UL2
UL3
8/E/2 : 1...8
8/F/2 : 1...8
1
U1
2
3
U2
4
5
U3
6
7
U4
8
DANGER
3LN+LNy
This connection is typically used for feeder protection scheme where line-to-
neutral voltage is required for synchrocheck application.
• Voltages measured by VTs: UL1, UL2, UL3, UL1y

• Values calculated: UL12, UL23, UL31, U1, U2, U2/U1, f, U0
416 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 257 - 3LN+LNy
P3x3x 3LN + LNy

UL1
UL2
UL3
8/E/2 : 1...8
8/F/2 : 1...8
1
U1
2
3
U2
4
5
U3
6
7
U4
8
DANGER
2LL+U0
Connection of two line-to-line and neutral displacement voltage measurement

schemes.
• Voltages measured by VTs: UL12, UL23, U0

• Values calculated: U31, UL1, UL2, UL3, U1, U2, U2/U1, f
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 417
Figure 258 - 2LL+U0
UL1
P3x3x 2LL + Uo
UL2
UL3
8/E/2 : 1...8
8/F/2 : 1...8
1
U1
2
3
U2
4
5
U3
6
7
U4
8
DANGER
2LL+U0+LLy
Connection of two line-to-line and neutral displacement voltage schemes. Line-to-

line reference voltage is taken from the other side of the CB for synchrocheck
scheme.
• Voltages measured by VTs: UL12, UL23, U0, UL12y

• Values calculated: UL31, UL1, UL2, UL3, U1, U2, U2/U1, f
418 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 259 - 2LL+U0+LLy
UL1
P3x3x 2LL + Uo + LLy

UL2
UL3
8/E/2 : 1...8
8/F/2 : 1...8
1
U1
2
3
U2
4
5
U3
6
7
U4
8
DANGER
2LL+U0+LNy
Connection of two line-to-line and neutral displacement voltage schemes. The

other side of the CB has phase-to-neutral connection for synchrocheck.
• Voltages measured by VTs: UL12, UL23, U0, UL1y

• Values calculated: UL31, UL1, UL2, UL3, U1, U2, U2/U1, f
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 419
Figure 260 - 2LL+U0+LNy
UL1
P3x3x 2LL + Uo + LNy

UL2
UL3
8/E/2 : 1...8
8/F/2 : 1...8
1
U1
2
3
U2
4
5
U3
6
7
U4
8
DANGER
LL+U0+LLy+LLz
This scheme has two CBs to be synchronized. The left side of the bus bar has
line-to-line and the right side line-to-line connection for synchrocheck's reference
voltages. In the middle, the system voltages are measured by phase-to-neutral
and open delta connection.
• Voltages measured by VTs: UL12, U0, UL12y, UL12z

• Values calculated: UL1, UL2, UL3, f
• Measurements available: -
420 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 261 - LL+U0+LLy+LLz
UL1
P3x3x LL + Uo + LLy + LLz

UL2 8/C/1 : 11...12
UL3 8/D/1 : 11...12
8/E/2 : 1...8
8/F/2 : 1...8
1 U1
2
3 U2
4
5 U3
6
7 U4
8
DANGER
LN+U0+LNy+LNz
This scheme has two CBs to be synchronized. The left and right sides of the bus
bar have line-to-neutral connections for synchrocheck's reference voltages. In the
middle, system voltages are measured by phase-to-neutral and broken delta
connection.
• Voltages measured by VTs: UL, U0, ULy, ULz

• Values calculated: UL12, UL23, UL31f
• Measurements available: -
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 421
Figure 262 - LN+U0+LNy+LNz
UL1
P3x3x LN + Uo + LNy + LNz

UL2
UL3
8/E/2 : 1...8
8/F/2 : 1...8
1 U1
2
3 U2
4
5 U3
6
7 U4
8
DANGER
10.9 CSH120 and CSH200 Core balance CTs

Function
The specifically designed CSH120 and CSH200 core balance CTs are for direct
earth fault overcurrent measurement. The difference between CSH120 and
CSH200 is the inner diameter.
Because of their low-voltage insulation, they can only be used on cables.
422 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 263 - CSH120 and CSH200 core balance CTs
Characteristics
CSH120 CSH200
Inner diameter 120 mm (4.7 in) 200 mm (7.9 in)
Weight 0.6 kg (1.32 lb) 1.4 kg (3.09 lb)
Accuracy ±5% at 20°C (68°F)
±6% max. from -25°C to 70°C
(-13°F to +158°F)
Transformation ratio 470/1
Maximum permissible 20 kA - 1 s
current
Operating temperature -25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F)
Storage temperature -40°C to +85°C (-40°F to +185°F)
Dimensions
Figure 264 - Dimensions
A B
C
G H J D
I K
F E
A. 4 horizontal mounting holes Ø 6 B. 4 vertical mounting holes Ø 6
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 423
Dime C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K.
nsion
s
CSH12 120 164 44 190 80 40 166 65 35

0
(4.75) (6.46) (1.73) (7.48) (3.14) (1.57) (6.54) (2.56) (1.38)
(in)
CSH20 196 256 46 274 120 60 254 104 37

0
(7.72) (10.1) (1.81) (10.8) (4.72) (2.36) (10) (4.09) (1.46)
(in)
DANGER
• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all
power is off.
• Only CSH120 and CSH200 core balance CTs can be used for direct earth
fault overcurrent measurement.
• Install the core balance CTs on insulated cables.
• Cables with a rated voltage of more than 1000 V must also have an
earthed shielding.
Assembly
Group the MV cable (or cables) in the middle of the core balance CT.
Use non-conductive binding to hold the cables.
Remember to insert the three medium-voltage cable shielding earthing cables

through the core balance CT.
424 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Figure 265 - Assembly on MV cables
CAUTION
Connect the secondary circuit and the cable shielding of the CSH core
balance CTs to earth in the shortest possible manner according to the
connection diagram presented in this document.
Connection
Connection to PowerLogic P3T32
To earth fault current I0 input, on connector X1, terminals 9 and 10 (shielding).
Recommended cable
• Sheathed cable, shielded by tinned copper braid

• Minimum cable cross-section 0.93 mm² (AWG 18)
• Resistance per unit length < 100 mΩ/m (30.5 mΩ/ft)
• Minimum dielectric strength: 1000 V (700 Vrms)
• Connect the cable shielding in the shortest manner possible to PowerLogic
P3T32
• Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle.
The connection cable shielding is grounded in PowerLogic P3T32.
The maximum resistance of the PowerLogic P3T32 connection wiring must not
exceed 4 Ω (i.e. 20 m maximum for 100 mΩ/m or 66 ft maximum for 30.5 mΩ/ft).
Connecting two CSH120 or CSH200 CTs in parallel
Two CSH200 CTs can be connected in parallel if the cables do not fit through a
single CT.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 425
• Fit one CT per a set of cables.

• Ensure the wiring polarity is correct. The maximum permissible current at the
primary is limited to 6 kA - 1 s for all cables.
DE80231
426 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
11 Test and environmental conditions Transformer protection relay
11 Test and environmental conditions
11.1 Disturbance tests

Table 171 - Disturbance tests
Test Standard & Test class / Test value

level
Emission IEC/EN 60255-26 (ed3)
Conducted Class A / CISPR 22 0.15–30 MHz
Emitted Class A / CISPR 11 / IACS 150 k Hz – 6 GHz

E10
Immunity IEC/EN 60255-26 (ed3)
Slow damped oscillatory IEC/EN 61000-4-18 ±2.5kVp CM

wave
IEEE C37.90.1 ±2.5kVp DM
1 MHz
Fast damped oscillatory IEC/EN 61000-4-18 ±2.5kVp CM

wave
3 MHz, 10 MHz and 30 MHz
Static discharge (ESD) IEC/EN 61000-4-2 Level 4 ±8 kV contact
±15 kV air
Emitted HF field IEC/EN 61000-4-3 Level 3 80 MHz – 6 GHz, 10 V/m
IEEE C37.90.2 / IACS E10 80–1000 MHz, 20 V/m
Fast transients (EFT)100) IEC/EN 61000-4-4 Level 4 ±4 kV, 5/50 ns, 5 kHz
IEEE C37.90.1
Surge IEC/EN 61000-4-5 Level 4 ±4 kV, 1.2/50 μs, CM
±2 kV, 1.2/50 μs, DM
Conducted HF field IEC/EN 61000-4-6 Level 3 0.15–80 MHz, 10 Vrms
Power-frequency magnetic IEC/EN 61000-4-8 300 A/m (continuous)

field
1000 A/m 1–3 s
Pulse magnetic field IEC/EN 61000-4-9 Level 5 1000 A/m, 1.2/50 μs
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 427
Transformer protection relay 11 Test and environmental conditions

level
ac and dc voltage dips IEC/EN 61000-4-29, 0% of rated voltage - Criteria

IEC/EN 61000-4-11 A
• ac: ≥ 0.5 cycle
• dc: ≥ 10 ms
40% of rated voltage -

Criteria C
• ac: 10 cycles
• dc: 200 ms
70% of rated voltage -

Criteria C
• ac: 25 cycles
• dc: 500 ms
ac and dc voltage IEC/EN 61000-4-29, 100% interruption - Criteria

interruptions IEC/EN 61000-4-11 C
• ac: 250 cycles
• dc: 5 s
Voltage alternative IEC/EN 61000-4-17 15% of operating voltage

component (dc) / 10 min
100) When digital inputs are used, it is recommended to add a 20 ms delay setting at the digital inputs.
11.2 Electrical safety tests

Table 172 - Electrical safety tests

level
Impulse voltage withstand IEC/EN 60255-27, Class III 5 kV, 1.2/50 μs, 0.5 J
1 kV, 1.2/50 μs, 0.5 J

Communication
Dielectric test IEC/EN 60255-27, Class III 2 kV, 50 Hz
0.5 kV, 50 Hz
Communication
Insulation resistance IEC/EN 60255-27 > 100 MΩ at 500 Vdc using

only electronic/brushless
insulation tester
Protective bonding IEC/EN 60255-27 shall not exceed 0,1 Ω

resistance
Clearance and creepage Design criteria for distances

distance as per IEC 60255-27 Annex
C (pollution degree 2,
overvoltage category 3)
428 P3T/EN/M/30-208A

level
Burden IEC 60255-1
Contact performance IEC 60255-1
11.3 Mechanical tests

Table 173 - Mechanical tests

level
Device in operation
Vibrations IEC 60255-21-1, Class II / 1 Gn, 10 Hz – 150 Hz

IEC 60068-2-6, Fc
Shocks IEC 60255-21-2, Class II / 10 Gn / 11 ms

IEC 60068-2-27, Ea
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Method A, 2 G horizontal / 1 G vertical ,

Class II 1–35 Hz
Device de-energized
Vibrations IEC 60255-21-1, Class II / 2 Gn, 10 Hz – 150 Hz

IEC 60068-2-6, Fc
Shocks IEC 60255-21-2, Class II / 30 Gn / 11 ms

IEC 60068-2-27, Ea
Bump IEC 60255-21-2, Class II / 20 Gn / 16 ms

IEC 60068-2-27, Ea
11.4 Environmental tests

Table 174 - Environmental tests

level
Device in operation
Dry heat EN / IEC 60068-2-2, Bd 70°C (158°F)
UL 508101) 55°C (131°F)
Cold EN / IEC 60068-2-1, Ad -40°C (-40°F)
Damp heat, cyclic EN / IEC 60068-2-30, Db From 25°C (77°F) to 55°C

(131°F)
From 93% RH to 98% RH
Testing duration: 6 days
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 429
Transformer protection relay 11 Test and environmental conditions

level
Damp heat, static EN / IEC 60068-2-78, Cab 40°C (104°F)
93% RH
Testing duration: 10 days
Change of temperature IEC / EN 60068-2-14, Nb Lower temp -40°C
Upper temp 70°C
5 cycles
Flowing mixed gas corrosion IEC 60068-2-60, Ke 25° C (77° F), 75 % RH

test, method 1
21 days 100 ppb H2S, 500
ppb SO2
Flowing mixed gas corrosion IEC 60068-2-60, Ke 25° C (77° F), 75 % RH

test, method 4
21 days 10 ppb H2S, 200
ppb NO2, 10 ppb CL2, 200
ppb SO2
Device in storage
Dry heat EN / IEC 60068-2-2, Bb 70°C (158°F)
Cold EN / IEC 60068-2-1, Ab -40°C (-40°F)

101) Testcondition: Device operated continuously. All digital inputs and digital outputs activated with 5
s on, 30 s off duty cycle, carrying maximum rated loads.
11.5 Environmental conditions

Table 175 - Environmental conditions
Condition Value
Ambient temperature, in- -40 – 60°C (-40 –140°F)104)

service102)103)
Ambient temperature, storage -40 – 70°C (-40 –158°F)
Relative air humidity < 95%, no condensation allowed
Maximum operating altitude 2000 m (6561.68 ft)

102) Thedisplay contrast is affected by ambient temperatures below -25°C (-13°F).
103) After
a cold start, in temperatures below -30°C (-22°F), allow the relay to stabilize for a few
minutes to achieve the specified accuracy.
104) Recommended values with VYX 695 projection mounting frame:
• device with 1 x raising frame → maximum ambient temperature 55°C

• device with 2 x raising frame → maximum ambient temperature 50°C
430 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
11.6 Casing
Table 176 - Casing
Parameter Value
Degree of protection (IEC 60529) IP54 Front panel, IP20 rear side, IP10 rear
side (if analog measurement card with ring
lug connectors is used)
Dimensions (W x H x D) 270 x 176 x 230 mm / 10.63 x 6.93 x 9.06

in
Weight 4.2 kg (9.272 lb) or higher (depends of

options)
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 431
Transformer protection relay 12 Maintenance
12 Maintenance
DANGER
• Wear your personal protective equipment (PPE) and comply with the safe
electrical work practices. For clothing, see applicable local standards.
• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to ensure that all
power is off.
• Do not open the secondary circuit of a live current transformer.
• Always connect the polarity of the current transformer (CT) and the voltage
transformer (VT) and their secondary ground wiring according to the
The PowerLogic P3 protection relays and arc flash detection products together
with their extension units, communication accessories, arc flash detection sensors
and cabling, later called “device”, require maintenance in work according to their
specification. Keep a record of the maintenance actions. The maintenance can
include, but is not limited to:
• preventive maintenance
• periodic testing
• hardware cleaning
• system status messages
• spare parts
• self-supervision
12.1 Preventive maintenance

Check the device visually when the switch gear is de-energized. During the
inspection, pay attention to:
• dirty components
• loose wire connections
• damaged wiring
• indicator lights
• other mechanical connections
Perform visual inspection every three (3) years minimum.
Related topics
2.5.7 Testing the LEDs and LCD screen
432 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
12 Maintenance Transformer protection relay
12.2 Periodic testing

Test the device periodically according to the end user's safety instructions and
national safety instructions or law. Carry out functional testing every five (5) years
minimum.
Conduct the testing with a secondary injection principle for the protection stages
used in the device and its extension units.
In corrosive or offshore environments, carry out functional testing every three (3)
years. For the testing procedures, see separate testing manuals.
12.3 Hardware cleaning

Special attention must be paid that the device do not become dirty. If cleaning is
required, wipe out dirt from the units.
12.4 System status messages

If the device’s self checking detects an unindented system status, it will in most
cases provide an alarm by activating the service LED and indication status
notification on the LCD screen. If this happens, store the possible message and
contact your local representative for further guidance.
12.5 Spare parts

Use an entire unit as a spare part for the device to be replaced. Always store
spare parts in storage areas that meet the requirements stated in the user
documentation.
12.6 Self-supervision
NOTICE
LOSS OF PROTECTION OR RISK OF NUISANCE TRIPPING
Check that the operating mode and SF relay wiring are compatible with the
installation.
NOTE: If the relay is no longer supplied with power or is in permanent fault

state, the protection functions are no longer active and all the PowerLogic P3
digital outputs are dropped out.
Description
The electronic parts and the associated circuitry as well as the program execution
are supervised by means of a separate watchdog circuit. Besides supervising the
device, the watchdog circuit attempts to restart the microcontroller in an
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 433
inoperable situation. If the microcontroller does not restart, the watchdog issues a
self-supervision signal indicating a permanent internal condition.
When the watchdog circuit detects a permanent fault, it always blocks any control
of other digital outputs (except for the self-supervision SF output). In addition, the
internal supply voltages are supervised. Should the auxiliary supply of the device
disappear, an indication is automatically given because the device status
inoperative (SF) output functions on a working current principle. This means that
the SF relay is energized, the 1/C/1:5–7 (or 1/D/1:5-7) contact closed, when the
auxiliary supply is on and the PowerLogic P3T32 device is fully operational.
In addition to the dedicated self-supervision function, the protection relay has

several alarm signals that can be connected to outputs through the output matrix.
The alarms include:
• remote communication inactive

• extension I/O communication inactive
• communication Port 1 down
• communication Port 2 down
• selfdiag 1, 2 or 3 alarm
• password open
NOTE: SF output is referenced as "service status output" in the setting tool.
To get self-supervision alarms to SF output contact, they must be linked in the

DIAGNOSIS setting view’s section SELFDIAG SIGNAL CONFIGURATION.
Required alarms are first linked to a Selfdiag1, Selfdiag2 or Selfdiag3 group
(Figure 266).
Figure 266 - Selfdiag alarm signal configuration
434 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Having the Seldiag alarm grouping made, the appropriate alarms can be assigned
to SF relay. By default, selfdiag alarm 2 is linked to SF relay (Figure 267). The
function of this default setup is the same as in the older systems where this
configuration was not possible.
Figure 267 - Linking Selfdiag alarm 1-3 to SF relay
It is possible to choose what selfdiag alarms 1-3 do when activated. This option
can be done through the output matrix (Figure 268). This allows you to categorize
and prioritize actions for each selfdiag alarms individually. For example, in this
configuration, selfdiag alarm 2 activates T9.
Figure 268 - Selecting selfdiag 1-3 actions. The number of outputs varies
depending on the device and order code
12.6.1 Diagnostics
The device runs self-diagnostic tests for hardware and software in boot sequence
and also performs runtime checking.
Permanent inoperative state
If a permanent inoperative state has been detected, the device releases an SF

relay contact and the service LED is set on. The local panel also displays a
detected fault message. The permanent inoperative state is entered when the
device is not able to handle main functions.
Temporal inoperative state
When the self-diagnostic function detects a temporal inoperative state, a Selfdiag

matrix signal is set and an event (E56) is generated. If the inoperative state was
only temporary, an off event is generated (E57). The self-diagnostic state can be
reset via the front panel.
Diagnostic registers
Self-diagnostic data can be assigned to 3 groups (Selfdiag 1, 2 and 3) in

SELFDIAG SIGNAL CONFIGURATION. The information of each self-diagnostic
group can be found in four 16-bit diagnostic registers, they are readable through
remote protocols. The addresses of the registers are:
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 435
• 2191 to 2194 for Selfdiag 1

The following table shows the meaning of each diagnostic register and their bits.
Table 177 - Readable registers through remote communication protocols
Register Bit Code Description
SelfDiag1 0 (LSB) (Reserved) (Reserved)
1 (Reserved) (Reserved)
2 T1 Detected digital
output fault
3 T2
4 T3
5 T4
6 T5
7 T6
8 T7
9 T8
10 A1
11 A2
12 A3
13 A4
14 A5
15 T9
SelfDiag2 0 (LSB) T10 Detected digital

output fault
1 T11
2 T12
3 T13
4 T14
5 T15
6 T16
7 T17
8 T18
436 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
Register Bit Code Description
9 T19
10 T20
11 T21
12 T22
13 T23
14 T24
SelfDiag4 0 (LSB) +12V Detected internal

voltage fault
1 ComBuff BUS: detected buffer

error
2 Order Code Detected order code

error
3 Slot card Detected option card

error
4 FPGA conf. Detected FPGA

configuration error
5 I/O unit Detected ARC I/O

unit error
6 Arc sensor Detected faulty arc

sensor
7 QD-card error Detected QD-card

error
8 BI Detected ARC BI
error
9 LowAux Low auxiliary supply

voltage
The code is displayed in self-diagnostic events and on the diagnostic menu on the
local panel and eSetup Easergy Pro.
NOTE: All signals are not necessarily available in every P3 product.
12.7 Arc flash detection system maintenance

The device requires maintenance to ensure that it works according to the
specification. Carry out testing every fours (4) years.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 437
DANGER
• Carry out periodic system testing as per the testing recommendation in this
manual or of the protection system scheme has been changed.
• Connect the watchdog (SF) output contact to a monitoring device, such as
SCADA or Distributed Control System (DCS) to detect a power-off or a
permanent fault state.
NOTE: If the arc flash detection unit is no longer supplied with power or is in
permanent non-operational state, the protection functions are no longer active
and all the output contacts are dropped out.
Keep record of the maintenance actions performed for the system.
The maintenance can include but is not limited to:

• visual inspection
• hardware cleaning
• sensor condition and positioning check
• checking the obstruction of sensors
12.7.1 Visual inspection
Do visual inspection once every three (3) years minimum.
1. De-energize the switchgear.
2. Inspect the device, sensors and cabling.

Pay attention to:
◦ possible dirty arc sensors
◦ loose wire connections
◦ damaged wiring
◦ indicator lights (device start-up)
◦ other mechanical connections
12.7.2 Hardware cleaning
Pay special attention to ensure that the device, its extension units and sensors do
not become dirty.
DANGER
• Do not use any type of solvents or gasoline to clean the device, sensors
or cables.
• When cleaning the sensor, make sure that the cleaning solution does not
contact anything other than the sensor.
438 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
• If cleaning is required, wipe out dirt from the device.

• Use a dry cleaning cloth or equivalent together with mild soapy water to clean
any residues from the light sensor.
12.7.3 Sensor condition and positioning check
Always check that the sensor positioning remains as it was originally designed
after:
• commissioning
• sensor replacement
• modification procedure
• cleaning
• arc flash fault
Check for obstruction of the sensors.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 439
Transformer protection relay 13 Order codes and accessories
13 Order codes and accessories
13.1 Order codes

When ordering, state:
• Order code of the relay
• Quantity
• Accessories (see the order codes in section Accessories)
Figure 269 - P3T32 order code

Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
P3T32 - A - A A -
Application
T32 = Transformer protection relay with differential protection
Nominal Supply voltage [V]

C = Power C 110-240 V (80 .. 265 Vac/dc, 5 x DO heavy duty, A1, SF)
D = Power D 24-48 V (18 .. 60 Vdc, 5 x DO heavy duty, A1, SF)
I/O Card I
G = 6DI+4DO (6 x DI, 4 x DO) Slot 3 = A, G, H or I
B = 3BIO+2Arc (3 x BI/BO, 2 x Arc point sensor, T2, T3, T4) Slot 3 = A, G, H or I
C = F2BIO+1Arc (Fibre 2 x BI/BO, 1 x Arc loop sensor, T2, T3, T4) Slot 3 = A, G, H or I
I/O Card II
A = None
G = 6DI+4DO (6 x DI, 4 x DO)
H = 6DI+4DO (6 x DI, 4 x DO(NC))
I = 10DI (10 x DI)
I/O Card III
T = 3xI (5/1A) + Io (5/1A) clamp for transformer differential protection Slot 8 = E or F
1 = 3xI (5/1A) + Io (5/1A) ringlug for transformer differential protection Slot 8 = 1 or 2
I/O Card IV
A = None
Option card I
A = None
D = 4Arc (4 x Arc sensor)
K = RS232 (RS232, IRIG-B)
Future option
A = None
Analog measurement card (See application)

E = 3L(5/1A) + 2Io (5/1A+1/0,2A)+4U Slot 4 = T and Region = A or C or R
1 = 3L(5/1A) + 2Io (5/1A+1/0,2A) ringlug + 4U Slot 4 = 1
Communication interface I
A = None
B = RS232 (RS232, IRIG-B)
C = RS232+RJ (RS232, IRIG-B + Ethernet RJ-45 100 Mb/s)
D = RS232+LC (RS232, IRIG-B + Ethernet LC 100 Mb/s)
E = 2xRS485 (2-wire)
F = RS485+RJ (RS485 2-wire + Ethernet RJ-45 100 Mb/s)
G = RS485+LC (RS485 2-wire + Ethernet LC 100 Mb/s)
N = 2xRJ (Ethernet RJ 100 Mb/s, RSTP)
O = 2xLC (Ethernet LC 100 Mb/s, RSTP)
P = PP (Plastic / Plastic serial fibre)
R = GG (Glass / Glass serial fibre)
Reserved
A = Reserved
Display type
B = 128x128 (128 x 128 LCD matrix)
C = 128x128Ext (128 x 128 LCD matrix, detachable)
Nominal DI voltage (voltage withstand)

A = 24 Vdc/ac (255 Vdc/ac)
B = 110 Vdc/ac (255 Vdc/ac)
C = 220 Vdc/ac (255 Vdc/ac)
Product version
A = Version 2.1
Future option
A = None
Region
A = English, IEC
B = English, ANSI Slot 4 = 1 and Slot 8 = 1
C = Chinese
R = Russian
W = OEM W
1) If slot 8 = 1 or 2, then slot 4 = 1

2) By default, the cable length is 2 m (6.56 ft). You can order cables of other
length separately: VX001-1 (1 m/3.28 ft), Vx001-3 (3 m/9.84 ft) or VX001-5 (5 m/
16.40 ft).
NOTE: All PCBA cards are conformally coated.
440 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
13 Order codes and accessories Transformer protection relay
13.2 Accessories
Table 178 - Accessories for PowerLogic P3 Advanced
Product Description REL code P3F30 P3L30 P3M30 / P3G30 / P3T32

reference P3M32 P3G32
VA1DA-20 Arc sensor, 20 m REL52801 X X X X X
VA1DA-20S-HF Arc sensor, 20 m, shielded, REL52802 X X X X X

halogen free
VA1DA-20S Arc sensor, 20 m, shielded REL52803 X X X X X
VA1DA-6 Arc sensor, 6 m connect REL52804 X X X X X

cable
VA1DA-6S-HF Arc sensor, 6 m, halogen free REL52805 X X X X X
VA1DA-6S Arc sensor, 6 m, shielded REL52806 X X X X X
VA1EH-20 Arc sensor, 20 m pipe sensor REL52807 X X X X X
VA1EH-20S Arc sensor, 20 m pipe sensor, REL52808 X X X X X

shielded
VA1EH-6 Arc sensor, 6 m pipe sensor REL52809 X X X X X
VA1EH-6S Arc sensor, 6 m pipe sensor, REL52810 X X X X X

shielded
VA1DA-6W Arc sensor, 6 m, shielded at REL52839 X X X X X

sensor end
VA1DA-20W Arc sensor, 20 m, shielded at REL52840 X X X X X

sensor end
VA2DV-3-SE Arc sensor, 3 m, shielded, REL52851 X X X X X

metal pipe
VA2DV-6-SE Arc sensor, 6 m, shielded, REL52852 X X X X X

metal pipe
ARC SLM-1 Arc fiber sensor, 1 m REL52870 X X X X X
ARC SLM-35 Arc fiber sensor, 35m REL52877 X X X X X
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 441
Transformer protection relay 13 Order codes and accessories

VIO12AASE RTD module, 12pcs RTD REL52811 X X X X X

inputs, Optical Tx
VIO12ABSE RTD module, 12pcs RTD REL52812 X X X X X

inputs, RS485
VIO12ACSE RTD module, 12pcs RTD REL52813 X X X X X

inputs, mA in/out
VIO12ADSE RTD module, 12pcs RTD REL52814 X X X X X

inputs, mA in/out
VPA3CGSE Profibus interface module REL52815 X X X X X
VSE001-GGSE Fiber optic module (Glass - REL52816 X X X X X

Glass)
VSE001-GPSE Fiber optic module (Glass - REL52817 X X X X X

Plastic)
VSE001-PGSE Fiber optic module (Plastic - REL52818 X X X X X

Glass)
VSE001-PPSE Fiber optic module (Plastic - REL52819 X X X X X

Plastic)
VSE002 RS485 module REL52820 X X X X X
VX052-3 USB programming cable REL52822 X X X X X

(eSetup Easergy Pro)
VX067 P3x split cable for REL52823 X X X X X

COM1-2&COM3-4 ports
VX072 P3x Profibus cable REL52824 X X X X X
VYX001 Mounting plate for sensor Z- REL52828 X X X X X

shape
VYX002 Mounting plate for sensor L- REL52829 X X X X X

shape
VYX301 VSE00x Wall fastening REL52831 X X X X X

module
VYX695 Raising frame, P3x, 45 mm REL52832 X X X X X
P3XWAF Wall mounting kit P3x3x and REL52842 X X X X X

V321
442 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
13 Order codes and accessories Transformer protection relay

VX086 P3x (RS232) - REL52838 X X

COM1/2+3/4+IRIG-B(3xD9)
EMS59572 Voltage adapter - 47… 240 V EMS59572 X X

- RJ45 output
EMS59573 LPVT hub connector, RJ45 EMS59573 X X

input - RJ45 output
CCA770 Screened Ethernet cable 59660 X X

between LPVT hub or Voltage
adapter and P3 relay, 0.6 m

adapter and P3 relay, 2 m

adapter and P3 relay, 4 m
VW3A8306RC LPVT hub termination, use VW3A8306 X X

this if all LPVT are not RC
present
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 443
Transformer protection relay 14 Firmware revision
14 Firmware revision
Table 179 - Firmware revisions
FW revision Changes
Version: 30.208 • Added two stages for directional earth fault overcurrent (total five stages)
• New scaling settings for conventional VT connection to PowerLogicTM P3 LPVT
Release date: October 2024
input (via adapter)
• Improved method to monitor Circuit Breaker open and close time
• Added busbar voltage measurement on P3G32 local HMI and eSetup Easergy
Pro in DiffGenTra mode
• Added bias current view to PowerLogicTM P3 Advanced differential relays’ local
HMI & eSetup Easergy Pro Setting tool
• Adjustable time delay setting for object’s closing operation
• Configurable Virtual Inputs with adjustable pulse timer
• Various communication parameter updates
• Disabling remote configuration, communication port locking by password
Version: 30.207 • Range name changed to PowerLogic P3

• Require eSetup Easergy Pro version >= 4.5.0
• Communications
◦ More parameters to Modbus, SPA and Profibus
◦ Added “Time to re-start” and “Thermal capacity” to Modbus, IEC103, DNP 3,
IEC101/104 and IEC 61850
◦ Modbus setting parameter to ANSI 47 and ANSI 25 stages
◦ Protocols assigned as Ethernet protocol 1 and 2 are checked by firewall rules
◦ IEC 104 protocol now available by default
◦ f<<< to IEC 61850, IEC 101/103/104 and DNP3
• Added phase rotation setting for P3T32 and P3G32
• Edge sensitive logic gate added
• Intermittent e/f (67NI) spike detection enhancement
• 3-phase VT fuse failure added
• Uo measurement scalable to primary in HMI and communication protocols
• Frequency available in the sample mode DR
• Added phase wise fault current & engine running hours & bias currents on HMI
Version: 30.206 • Added power direction setting

• Calculated residual voltage available in sample mode disturbance recording
• Added 5th under frequency stage
• Shorter operate time for under frequency protection (now 80 ms)
• Improved inrush blocking for differential stage (applies to P3M32, P3G32 and
P3T32 )
• Added VI5-VI12 to mimic display
• Communications
◦ IEC 104 communication protocol added (consult Schneider Electric’s
representative for availability)
◦ Added DI / DO signals to SPA, Ethernet IP and IEC 103
◦ Added SOTF TRIP, Io>>>>> START/TRIP, IoDir>>> START/TRIP, Uc> START/
TRIP, Uo>>> START/TRIP to IEC 101/103/104 and DNP3
◦ Added Iv> START/TRIP, If5> START/TRIP to IEC 101/104 DNP3
444 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
14 Firmware revision Transformer protection relay
FW revision Changes
Version: 30.205.1 • SW selectable phase CT secondary current between 1 A or 5 A. This applies to

hardware which has 5 A phase current inputs in Slot 8:
Release date: February 2021
◦ E = 3L(5A) + 2Io(5/1A+1/0,2A) + 4U
◦ 1 = 3L(5A) + 2Io (5/1A+1/0,2A) ringlug + 4U
• Upgraded and restored 5th harmonic blocking stage for the dI> stage.
• Added START signals for 87dI>, 87dI>>, 64REF dIo> and 64REF dIo>> stages.
They are visible in matrix, DNP3, IEC 101, IEC 103 and IEC 61850 protocols.
• Added TRIP signals of 64REF dIo> and 64REF dIo>> to IEC 103 communication
protocol
Version: 30.205 • Polarity of the output contacts in the power supply card is now SW selectable
between NO and NC
• Frequency stage improvement
• Global trip line to output matrix
• Phasor symbol improvement in the HMI
• Local panel control no longer requires activation of the Operator access level
when it is disabled in the Objects setting view
• HMI password enhancement with letters and characters
• Communication:
◦ IEC61850 new LN (LTIM) added for time management
◦ IEC61850 new LN (ZMOT) added for running hours
◦ Modbus update to access arc sensor status
◦ New timeout mechanism added for Telnet/Serial/Http connections (not
applicable to ANSI model)
Version: 30.204 •
• Updated secondary current representation for P3T32
Release date: January 2021
• Communications:
◦ IEC61850 and Modbus: Alarm setting and operations left parameters for circuit
breaker monitoring
◦ Ethernet/IP communication protocol restored back to use
• Cybersecurity:
◦ Removed Administrator account due to cybersecurity requirement.
Version: 30.203 • I>>> stage latch function upgrade during the power on-off-on state
• RSTP network reconstruction optimization
Release date: July 2020
• Adjusted time stamps for disturbance recorder and events logs
• Backlight off default timeout changed to 10 min
• Added Modbus registers for alarm setting of CB wear (read) and Operation left
data (read)
• DNP3 updates:
◦ Added function 24 record current time
◦ Added VO and LED status to BI data list
◦ Added the possibility to configure time reference to UTC
Version: 30.202 • LPIT support

◦ for P3U30 and P3F30 models only
Release date: July 2020
◦ The high-speed arc flash current (Arc I>) is not supported in this release.
◦ CT secondary in slot 8 adjustable to 1–10 A
• Modbus
◦ Added PME/PSO support
◦ Voltage measurements descriptions
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 445
Transformer protection relay 14 Firmware revision
FW revision Changes
Version: 30.201 Cybersecurity improvements:

• passwords are stored as salted hash
Release date: January 2020
• password resetting procedure changed
• new user account Administrator added
• editing output matrix and several communication settings through Ethernet
interface blocked
Version: 30.111 • Improved menu titles for COM ports and Ethernet ports in the Protocol
Configuration menu
• IEC-61850 speed optimizations
• Added IRIG-B support for option 'K' in slot 6
• Support for eight (8) controllable objects and protocol parameters for Modbus, IEC
61850, IEC 103, IEC 101, Device Net, Profibus, DNP 3, and SPAbus
• Modbus:
◦ registers to include protection function status
◦ added LED status information
Version: 30.110 • ANSI terminology

• Digital inputs 33–36 added to DNP and IEC 101 protocol
Release date: August 2019
• Phase-wise cumulative breaking current over IEC 61850
• Temperature LN to IEC 61850
• Add VI5-20 and VO7-20 added to IEC 103 protocol mapping
• Ethernet/IP protocol removed
Version: 30.109 • Arc protection I>int. start setting changed to be relative to CT primary instead of
application nominal current.
Release date: March 2019
• Unit for start setting of I0>int. arc protection changed to "pu".
• Negative sequence voltage U2>, U2>> and U2>>>(ANSI 47) stages added.
• Maximum number of disturbance records increased from 12 to 24.
• IEC 61850 logical nodes added for digital inputs 32....36.
• Digital inputs 33...36 added to IEC 103 protocol.
• BIO and IGBT support added to P3x3x models.
Version: 30.108 • Intermittent earth fault (ANSI 67NI) changed:

◦ New start setting "Sensitive/Normal" and U0 check for trip added
Release date: December 2018
• CB condition monitoring upgraded with opening counts and opening, closing and
charging times
• Fault locator enhanced to allow multiple line segments.
• LED matrix in P3x3x enhanced:
◦ LEDs can now be configured more flexibly.
◦ It is now possible to select for each individual LED whether it should be blinking,
latched, or non-volatile (keep its state over reboot).
◦ Each LED also has a configurable description, one for green color and another
for red.
• COMTRADE files can be read over Modbus.
• Product and vendor data changed to Schneider Electric in EDS file. This change
affects CIP protocols: DeviceNet and Ethernet/IP.
• Pole slip protection (ANSI 78) added for P30G and P3G32.
• New CBFP functions added: "CBFP1" and "CBFP2".
• Restricted earth fault protection (ANSI 64REF) for P3T32 and P3G32.
• Faulty phase detection added for ANSI 67N (I0Dir) stage.
• Ethernet's redundancy protocols are now in separate menus.
446 P3T/EN/M/30-208A
14 Firmware revision Transformer protection relay
FW revision Changes
Version: 30.106 • The setting "Inv. time coefficient k" in stages I>, Iφ>, Iφ>>, Io>, Ioφ>, Ioφ>>,
Ioφ>>> has three decimals instead of two and the minimum value for the earth
Release date: 16.5.2018
fault overcurrent was changed from 0.05 to 0.025.
• Communication protocol updates
Version: 30.104 First release
Release date: 2.10.2017
P3T/EN/M/30-208A 447
Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92500 Rueil Malmaison - France
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
www.schneider-electric.com
As standards, specifications, and designs change from time to time,

please ask for confirmation of the information given in this publication.
© 2024 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved.
P3T/EN/M/30-208A — 10/2024

p3T32 2024 Version

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

p3T32 2024 Version

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

p3T32 2024 Version

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PowerLogic P3T32

Transformer protection relay

4.4 RMS values.....................................................................................................60

6 Protection functions.................................................................... 117

7 Supporting functions.................................................................. 268

7.7 Current transformer supervision (ANSI 60)...................................................289

8 Communication and protocols....................................................327

9 Applications and configuration examples...................................347

10.6 Connections................................................................................................ 359

11 Test and environmental conditions........................................... 427

11.2 Electrical safety tests...................................................................................428

13 Order codes and accessories.................................................. 440

Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced and maintained only

This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential

The addition of either symbol to a “Danger” or “Warning” safety

Electrical equipment must only be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained

No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising

EU directive and UKCA regulations compliance

EU directive compliance UKCA regulations compliance

Schneider Electric Limited

Telford, TF3 3BL

EMC compliance EMC compliance

2014/30/EU SI 2016 No. 1091

Compliance with the European The Electromagnetic Compatibility

Product safety Product safety

2014/35/EU SI 2016 No. 1101

Compliance with the European The Electrical Equipment (Safety)

RoHS directive RoHS regulation

2011/65/EU (inclusive of Directive (EU) SI 2012 No. 3032

1 About this manual

1.2 Related documents

P3 Advanced Quick Start P3x3x/EN QS/xxxx

eSetup Easergy Pro Setting and P3eSetup/EN M/xxxx

RTD and mA Output/Input Modules User VVIO12A_EN_M_D002

Profibus Interface Module User Manual VVPA3CG_EN_M_D004

IEC 61850 configuration instructions P3APS19001EN

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) P3APS17002EN

EtherNet/IP configuration instructions P3APS17003EN

Parallel Redundancy Protocol for Easergy P3APS17004EN

Communication parameter protocol P3TDS17005EN

Easergy P3 protection functions' P3TDS17006EN

IEC103 Interoperability List P3TDS17009EN

DNP 3.0 Device Profile Document P3TDS17010EN

P3 Advanced Series facia label instruction P3TDS17012EN

Restricted earth fault protection using an I0 P3APS17016EN

1.3 Abbreviations and terms

AFD Arc flash detection

ANSI American National Standards Institute

bps Bits per second

CBFP Circuit breaker failure protection

CLPU Cold load pickup

Controlling output Heavy duty output rated for the circuit

CPU Central processing unit

cosφ Active power divided by apparent power =

(See power factor PF.)

Negative sign indicates reverse power.

CT primary CTPRI. Nominal primary value of the IL

CT’ primary CT’PRI. Nominal primary value of the I’L

CT secondary CTSEC. Nominal secondary value of the IL